JP6202617B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a lottery is performed based on a game ball having entered the start opening, and if it is a big win, a game machine that controls a big hit gaming state and pays a large amount of prize balls when it is a lottery, so-called pachinko machine When a lottery is made based on a game ball entering the start opening, and a lottery is made, a decision regarding the type of jackpot is also made, and the number of prize balls given to the player changes based on this (For example, refer patent document 1).

JP2013-158529A

  However, in the case of the above-mentioned gaming machine, when a lottery is drawn, a decision on the type of jackpot is also made, and only the player is notified of the jackpot and the type of jackpot, so the player is passive Depending on the type of jackpot that was determined, there was a risk of lowering the fun of gaming.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that promotes active game participation by a player and can suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above-described object, in the invention according to claim 1, lottery means for performing a lottery for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port,
A specific determination means for determining one of a predetermined type of profit degree when a specific determination condition is satisfied;
Special determination means for determining any one of the profit types of a special type different from the specific type when a special determination condition different from the specific determination condition is satisfied;
A selection means by which a player can select which of the specific determination condition and the special determination condition is to be established when the lottery result is a lottery win by the lottery means;
Profit grant control for starting control of the big hit game based on the profit degree determined by the selected one after selecting either one of the specific determination condition and the special determination condition by the selection means Means,
After the lottery means wins the lottery result and before the selection by the selection means, according to the determination result of at least one of the specific determination means and the special determination means before the selection and the lottery And a selection means capable of executing a well-being effect that can promote the selection.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in the game positively by executing the welfare effect that can promote the selection, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of a left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected in the site | part of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle apparatus and was seen from the back. (A) It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (B) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front view of an antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view at the time of seeing the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism from the back. It is a principal part rear view of the door frame which shows the state provided with the static electricity prevention mechanism. It is AA sectional view taken on the line of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case. (A) is a top view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamper-proof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front, (D) These are explanatory drawings which show the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cuts and shows a door frame in the up-down direction approximate center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back surface perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launch power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. FIG. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board using the game panel of embodiment different from the examples of FIG. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear in FIG. 107. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear in FIG. 110. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally upper right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally upper left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally lower left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the attacker unit partially and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the front side unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main structure and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution unit of a center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution unit of a center accessory from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the distribution unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the distribution unit and was seen afterwards. It is a front enlarged view which shows the movement of the distribution unit in a center accessory. It is the perspective view which looked at the distribution unit periphery from diagonally upper left. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of a distribution unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive of the movable decoration body of a distribution unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the flow of the game ball in the distribution unit in a center character. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back front decoration unit in a back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back front decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper direction production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper production unit in the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper production unit for every main unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper production unit for every main unit, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit in a back upper production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit in a back upper production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back center unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the back upper center unit from the back of a warrior stone hand. It is explanatory drawing which shows removal | desorption of the 2nd raising / lowering decoration body in a back center unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper side unit in a back upper effect unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back upper side unit in a back upper effect unit, and was seen from the back. It is a front view explaining the movement of the back center unit in the back effect unit. FIG. 159 is a front view illustrating the movement of the back center unit following FIG. 159; FIG. 170 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back center unit following FIG. 160. It is a front view explaining the movement of the back side unit in the back effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower direction production unit in a back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower direction production unit in a back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower direction production unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower direction production unit for every main member, and was seen afterwards. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front unit in the back lower direction production unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back lower front unit in the back lower direction production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom front unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back bottom front unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view showing a back lower direction production unit in a normal state. It is a front view shown in the state where the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit in the back bottom production unit is raised halfway. It is a front view which shows the state which raised the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit to the raise end. It is a front view which shows in the state which raised the back lower back inside decoration body in the back lower direction production unit to the appearance position. 175 is a front view showing a state in which the pointer member of the lower back middle decorative body is rotated in the state of FIG. 174; FIG. It is a front view which shows in the state which raised the back lower front slider of the back lower front unit to the raise end, and raised the back lower back inside decoration body to the appearance position. It is a front view shown in the state where the back bottom rear side decorative body in the back bottom effect unit is rotated to the appearance position. 179 is a front view showing the state in which the lower back middle decorative body is raised to the appearance position in the state of FIG. 177. FIG. 178 is a front view showing the state in which the lower back front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 178; FIG. 178 is a front view showing the state in which the front back bottom slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 177; FIG. (A) is a left view of the back lower right production unit in a back unit, (b) is a front view of the back lower right production unit in a back unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower right production unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the back lower right production unit from the back. (A) is AA sectional drawing in FIG. 181, (b) is BB sectional drawing in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower right production unit and was seen from the front. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view showing a rear side of the lower right unit base in FIG. 184 in an enlarged manner. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back lower right production unit and was seen afterwards. FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear side of the lower right lower unit base in FIG. 186 in an enlarged manner. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back lower right rotation decoration body in a back lower right production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the production ball of a back lower right production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the production | presentation ball | bowl of the back lower right production | presentation unit following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lift of the effect ball in a back lower right effect unit. It is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the back effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a movement of a back lower direction production unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in a main control board. It is a block diagram of a door frame base substrate, a peripheral relay terminal plate, an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal audio | voice signal cutoff board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game preparation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game mode determination process. (A) is an example of a symbol determination table used when determining the jackpot state type, and (B) is an example of a round number determination table used when determining the execution mode of the jackpot game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of jackpot game processing. It is an image diagram displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and (A) a notice display indicating that the game is explained until the jackpot game is started, and (B) a game in the game until the jackpot game is started. It is a guidance display that guides the person's gaze. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is explanatory display about the method of selecting a rush type jackpot game. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is an explanatory display about the method of selecting the single announcement type jackpot game. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a display which prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game is executed. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a display which shows that the present is a rush type timing. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a display which shows that it is the timing of one notification type now. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing the flow of the display effect that is executed when the one notification type is selected. (A) The figure which shows the aspect of the display effect performed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device based on the result of special lottery, (B) The display effect performed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device based on the result of special lottery It is a figure which shows the aspect of the display effect following (A). (A) A display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device on the basis of the result of the special lottery, and a diagram showing an aspect of the display effect following FIG. 217 (B), and (B) based on the result of the special lottery. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing a form of the display effect following (A). (A) A display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery, and a diagram showing a display effect following FIG. 218 (B), and (B) based on the result of the special lottery. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing a form of the display effect following (A). 219 is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device based on the result of the special lottery, and shows a display effect mode following FIG. 219 (B). FIG. It is a time chart which shows the process from jackpot generation | occurrence | production by special symbol to the jackpot game start. 10 is a flowchart of a gaming state determination process executed according to backup data as one process in the power recovery process (power-on process) by the main control MPU. It is an image figure displayed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a figure which shows an example of the specific operation instruction | indication screen to the effect of performing specific operation by a player. It is a time chart which shows the process from the stop of the special symbol in the conventional game machine to the jackpot game start, and the ON / OFF state of the time-short signal output from the external terminal board and the jackpot signal. The process from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the jackpot game for explaining the case of adopting the same jackpot / medium signal output method as before, and the on / off state of the short time signal and jackpot / medium signal output from the external terminal board are shown. It is a time chart. It is a time chart which shows the process from the stop of the special symbol in the present invention to the start of the jackpot game, and the on / off state of the short time signal and the jackpot signal output from the external terminal board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game preparation process for outputting a jackpot medium signal. It is a time chart which shows the process from the stop of the special symbol in the present invention to the start of the jackpot game, and the on / off state of the short time signal and the jackpot signal output from the external terminal board. It is a display screen (image) displayed on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device, and shows that it is possible to take a break before the big hit game. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing a flow of the display effect that is executed when the rush type is selected. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of a liquid crystal display device, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the flow of the display effect performed at the time of the big hit related to the 1st special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game comment display process. This is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is an example of an effect in which a comment is transmitted based on the time from the start of the gate to the passage. This is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is an effect example in which a comment is transmitted based on the average time from the start of the gate to the passage when Ren-chan ends. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a historical information display process. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is an effect example in which information based on the history at the time of selection of the lash type is displayed together with an explanation display about the method of selecting the rush type. It is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and is an effect example in which information based on the history at the time of selection of one notification type is displayed together with an explanation display about a method of selecting one notification type .

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 that is operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can see inside the game area 1100. By inserting a finger or the like, it is impossible to touch a game ball or obstacle nail G (see FIG. 114) in the game area 1100, various winning holes, or an accessory. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 112). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. While being able to hold the pachinko machine 1 easily as a finger hook, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the horizontal direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 67) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support 644 (see FIG. 70, etc.) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21, and the lower After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 97) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by a rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame shaft support metal 644 (refer to FIG. 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 67 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12, 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 are provided.

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of the wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view shown.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the front view of the door frame base main body 110.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 in front view. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. And a wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape with a synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. In addition, a rectangular notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in a front view) is provided on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110. Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. A ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and a game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Portion 114, a wiring passage opening 115 through which the wiring from handle device 500 can pass through in a front-rear direction at a predetermined position of handle attachment portion 114, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, the rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a door frame protruding piece 110c protruding a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and the door frame protruding piece 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130 and an attachment hole 110h (see FIG. 18 etc.) for attaching the side speaker cover 338 at appropriate positions. Is formed.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Furthermore, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the front side above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and includes a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 that is recessed substantially backward in a triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front side is opened by bending a metal plate. Thereby, in order to perform an illegal act with respect to the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is made of a metal that can be drilled with a thin drill or the like from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300. It can be blocked by the crime prevention member 121 and can prevent an illegal act.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  The door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the horizontal direction and having a cross section in an I-shape as shown in FIGS. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. By inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198, the wiring cord 196 can be held (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric devices are connected to the door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, rental unit 360, as electrical equipment, Bundle 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. Moreover, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the upper surface, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 bent toward the front (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 bent forward toward the front right side (open side) of the upper long edge. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 112). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 112), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 that protrudes along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the projection piece 184 before the crime prevention. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  Although the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 is not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a side inner lens 212 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, The right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted thereon, and the side inner on the lower side A right side lower decorative board 216 having a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof, and a rear side of the right side upper decorative board 214. The right side attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214. An upper decorative board cover 218, and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 while being disposed at a front surface of the side lens 210 and in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, while being attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially from the center, a side upper inner lens 206 disposed between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and the side upper inner lens 206 as a side inner lens. An inner lens bracket 208 to be attached to 212 and an upper right speaker 222 to be attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently decorated with light by the light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and a left end at the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. It is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a plurality extending substantially concentrically with the gaming window 101. A radiating lens portion 210b having a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiating lens portions 210b in the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centered on the lower central portion of the game window 101 when viewed from the front, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed backward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  Further, the side lens 210 includes, on the right side, a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction. By the side diffusion lens portion 210c, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 can be diffused widely in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, and the sound from the upper right speaker is favorably transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the drawing, a portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a in the side lens 210 is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, a portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses at the peak portion protruding forward in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 can diffuse and refract light by a wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses. As well as letting you see it, you can make it look strange.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are disposed at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 have a relatively high irradiation. Those having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° -60 °) are used. Note that the LEDs 214c of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red and green LEDs in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The upper side inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side in front view.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the side upper inner lens 206, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. The side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-like front surface as in the side inner lens 212, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the crest-like projecting portion of the wrinkled portion. In addition, the light can be irregularly refracted and diffusely reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged to be inserted in front of the radiating lens portion 210b that is recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rocky surface that is rugged by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. The side lens 210 thus made can be accented. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side. FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decoration unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emission mode of the left side decoration unit with a photograph.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the right side is the gaming window 101. The left side and the upper side are formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are formed asymmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially same width as the right side decoration unit 200 and extends in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and an oval shape disposed between the large window frames 242a. A frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a that are continuous with the upper side of the side lower decorative frame 242 and extend in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101, and a large And a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b disposed between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 also includes a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250 An inner decorative member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and extending in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 and having a plated layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 A plurality of bands extending in a radial pattern centered on the lower left and right center of the gaming window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 disposed on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view, and a transparent upper portion that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252. The upper speaker bracket 264 and a diffusion part formed by a plurality of band-like lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially centered on the lower left and right centers And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side lower decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration frame 244, a left side upper decoration board cover 258, and a left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a light-impermeable member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 has translucency and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. Further, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (the small windows with respect to the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right central lower portions of the gaming window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b, there are formed opening frames 242c and 244c that pass through the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a state of being cut out, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the large window frames 242a and 244a in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are closed by inserting the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 from the rear side. An inner decorative member 251 disposed on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. A diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusion portion 252a so that the rear of the side inner lens 252 passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The lower side decorative frame 242 in the left side decorative unit 240 of the present example has a shape extending in the vertical direction along the left outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small frame disposed between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. A window frame 242b, and an opening frame 242c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 242b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Is formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form a peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and an outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 is continuous with the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left outer periphery to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in a substantially triangular shape. It is formed in a U-shaped cross-section with the side opened. The side upper decoration frame 244 includes two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small window frame disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. 244b and an opening frame 244c that is disposed on both sides of the small window frame 244b (the game window 101 side and the outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface, and is formed of a synthetic resin. ing.

  The side upper decorative frame 244 is configured such that the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side upper decorative frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a design that is continuous with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

  In this example, the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size that combines the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size that extends from the center to the left side of the left and upper sides of the game window 101. Yes. The side lens 250 has a configuration in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 is recessed from the rear side, and is recessed rearward between the peripheral lens portions 250a. And a radiation lens portion 250b in which a side flash lens 246 is disposed on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Furthermore, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 includes a plurality of slits 251 a that are disposed on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250 a in the side lens 250 and extend along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decorative member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and is concentric with the center of the gaming window 101 as a center. Several are provided. In addition, the inner decorative member 251 has a front surface in which a plurality of slits 251 a are formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. Note that the inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and is visible from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  In addition, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Yes. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into the inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially centering on the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 on the front surface. The decorative member 251 intersects (substantially orthogonal) with the direction in which the slit 251a extends.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusion part 252 a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251 a of the inner decorative member 251. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the drawing, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and are larger than the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °). LEDs 254b disposed at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) is used.

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via a protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the mischief of the left upper speaker 262 or the breaking of the cone of the upper left speaker 262 to insert an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 in this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and is less likely to cause noise with respect to other pachinko machines.

  Next, a characteristic light emission effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a side lens 250 including a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms and curved the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and is disposed on the rear surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metallic gloss plating layer and provided with a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and disposed in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 on which a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a are mounted on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 and a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses. (See FIG. 35 and the like). Thereby, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light irradiated forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. It is irradiated from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 toward the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, a part of the light irradiated forward (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted to the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to irradiate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. And since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected toward the inner decoration member 251 by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a at the (front surface), and a part of the light reflected from the surface of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is irradiated to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the circumferential lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are smoothly curved, so The light reflected on the rear surface side converges and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) diffuses, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has a direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and a peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surface of the lens part 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersected by the diffusion portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-like lenses in the side inner lens 252. It diffuses in the direction of (substantially orthogonal). Accordingly, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades extending in a direction that is longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersecting the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, a fantastic luminous decoration with a sense of perspective can be made (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and between the upper edge on the center side in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the drawing, the upper decoration unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extended frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip, and A front decoration member 281 having a frame-like lower extension frame 281c extending from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becoming thinner toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower part arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281 A translucent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape that is inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283; an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward; and a surface disposed on the rear side of the upper central lens 284 A plate-like diffusion lens 285 having a plurality of fine prisms formed thereon, an annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusion lens 285 and supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens support member 286 A light shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and a position corresponding to the inside of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light shielding member 287 disposed on the rear side of the light shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and an upper central decorative substrate 288 on which a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the tube portion 287a are mounted on the front surface.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of front decoration units 280 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 289. The upper side decorative board 290 on which the LED 290a is mounted, the board cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative board 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the board cover 291 and extends backward. A mounting bracket 292, an upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281; An upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped into a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295; a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295; and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape. .

  In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plated layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 glitters with light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a central ring lens portion 282b facing the center frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a, and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. And an extended frame lens portion 282c facing the inside of the frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of band-like lenses extending radially are arranged in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the axis of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of concentrically extending prisms are formed. As a result, the plurality of prisms and belt-like lenses of the upper lens 282 can diffuse light, so that the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper central lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses are formed on the rear side, so that light can be irregularly refracted. Is invisible.

  In addition, the upper central decorative board 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately decorated with light emission. Furthermore, the upper side decorative board 290 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extending frame 281b and the lower extending frame 281c in the front decorative member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the inside of the frame. The upper side decorative board 290 can make the upper extended frame 281b and the lower extended frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 have a light emission decoration by appropriately causing the LED 290a to emit light.

[1-2E. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 45 is a cross-sectional view taken along a portion of the ball rental unit of the tray unit in the door frame.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 that is fixed at the approximate center of the front surface, opened upward and rearward, and has a large left side (axial support side) in front view and bulges forward. Upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction is projected forward, upper plate front decoration member 316 attached to the upper front edge of upper plate upper panel 314, and upper plate front part The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and is located on the right upper side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  In addition, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 from the right and left center to the lower surface on the right side, and is attached to the lower side of the board mounting base 320. And an upper plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted thereon. A part of the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 can be illuminated by decorating the LED 322a of the upper dish decoration substrate 322 as appropriate.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-like lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 to be described later are provided at a portion that covers the lower end front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right side in front view. A lower plate cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and an upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position of the lower left and right center left sides of the lower plate cover 328. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  Also, the dish unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower dish upper left side cover 332 and the lower dish upper left side cover 332 that are obliquely extended to cover the left side front end of the lower dish main body 324 and the left front end of the lower dish top plate 326, and the front and rear. A lower plate lower left side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that allows the sound to be transmitted by closing the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and protection A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower pan lower left side cover 334. The right front end of the lower dish top plate 326 is covered with an upper dish front decorative member 316.

  The dish unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the dish unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 formed in a continuous shape and having an opening 338a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338 A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in the shape of a disk that is loosely curved so as to close 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected. The side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and a decoration attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decoration member 318. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c that is formed in a step shape that is further lower than the decorative mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction and for mounting an operation unit 400 to be described later. Yes.

  The upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314. The upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed with a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape on the right side, while the left side is formed in a smooth shape from a position right to the center in the left-right direction. It is formed in such a rugged shape. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish front decoration member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be irregularly refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 is disposed on the rear side of the left smoothly formed portion of the upper dish front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper dish front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, whereas the upper dish upper inner decorative member 318 has a right side of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player side and looks like a feeling of distance.

  The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 is formed of a plurality of curved surfaces whose surfaces are curved in a spindle shape, similar to the right part of the upper dish front decorative member 316. The upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 which will be described later. Further, the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), can diffuse light refractingly, and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Yes. An upper plate decoration board 322 is disposed on the rear side of the right portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decoration member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decoration board 322 is connected to the upper plate decoration board 322. By appropriately emitting light, the upper dish front decorative member 316 and the upper dish upper right decorative member 319 can emit light appropriately.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front end and side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower dish cover 328 is made of a black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and provided with a plated layer having a silvery metallic appearance (matte state such as a sandblast treatment instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower dish side cover 330 includes a plate-like portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the dish unit 300. The lock hole 328 a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330 a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  The lower pan upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. The lower pan lower left cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the pan unit 300. The plate-shaped part which forms is provided. An opening 334a of the lower pan left lower cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of a lower speaker 821 (low sound speaker) provided in the main body frame 3 to be described later. It can be permeated through. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower pan left lower cover 334 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted therein.

  The dish unit 300 of this example is configured such that the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334, and the lower dish side cover 330, the lower dish lower left cover 334, Is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. The upper plate ball release button 341 is moved up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310. The operation piece 342 is supported so as to be operable (turnable), and the plate unit base 310 is supported. And a contact piece that slides up and down by the vertical movement of the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 and comes into contact with an operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583 in a ball feed unit 580 described later. An upper dish ball removal slider 343 that is provided on the rear side of the dish unit base 310 and includes an upper dish ball removal slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is arranged between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish lower left cover 334 on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 and forms a bottom center part of the dish unit 300. A punching base 351, a plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353. Yes.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is biased by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a. .

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower plate ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower plate ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Be able to.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward and are opened and closed by sliding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 backward. The shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball hole 352b move backward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is lowered by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coinciding with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the lending unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the lending remaining display portion 363, a lending remaining display portion 363 that is disposed on the rear side of the front cover 365, and a lending button 361. And a ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and the rear side of the ball rental unit mounting part 310b of the tray unit base 310 covering the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. A rear cover 367 attached to the rear cover. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310m. A transparent front cover 365 that closes the display opening 310n is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n that is closed by the cover 365, and a protrusion 310o that is formed on the outer periphery of the two button openings 310m and protrudes forward. The rental remaining display part 363 arranged on the rear side through the player can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of the present example has a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 disposed above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c. It is arranged to face. In the rental unit 360, the return button 362 is disposed at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored differently from the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the lending button 361 and the return button 362.

  The ball rental unit 360 also includes a protruding portion 310o that protrudes forward (player side) from the outer periphery of the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts a hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protruding portion 310o before the hand touches the lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be aware of the presence of the lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. 46A is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46B is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is disposed on the upper side of the cover body 426 and has a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder 401c of the dial operation unit 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430 a that is attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416 b of the operation section holding member 416 and the inner cylinder section 401 a of the dial operation section 401 can pass. A dial decoration board 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the ring, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 and detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration substrate 432 is latched and held on the lower surface of the operation portion holding member 416 by a substrate holding claw 416g of the operation portion holding member 416.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower diameter than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. When the sliding gear 410 is inserted into the button support cylinder 416b and the sliding surface 410a is brought into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends are opposed to each other and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from the upper side; A pair of board holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  The base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like are attached. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the upper cover 422 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the lower surface of the outer periphery of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached with a predetermined screw to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and then The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover main body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401, Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed to avoid the concentration of the impacts, and the impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 can be reduced. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. The effects using the 401 (press operation unit 405) can be made more difficult to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and the dial drive means 414. Can withstand high loads , It is possible to sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51A is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 51B is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as seen from the back. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, a handle body 504 that is disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a front surface of the handle body 504 And a front end cover 506 which is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body rear 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

  In addition, the handle device 500 has a rear end and a front end rotatably supported by an inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506. A shaft member 510 that can rotate integrally with the shaft 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. And a rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Furthermore, the handle device 500 has one end attached to the inner base 508 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 511. Auxiliary spring 514 for biasing, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, a firing stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508 A single-shot button 520 that is pivotally supported and operates a firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504 so that the handle body 504 is in an initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Energized to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and has a rear end portion that extends in a cylindrical shape rearward from a front end portion that bulges rearwardly. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shape. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arc-shaped slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed in the handle body 504, and three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward are formed in the front end cover 506. These mounting bosses 506 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504 a of the handle body 504. Accordingly, the rotational range of the handle body 504 is restricted by the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 coming into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking projection 504b protruding rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, the handle main body 504 is biased so as to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 at one end side.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor. When the handle main body 504 (the handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle main body 504 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the handle main body 504 or the like. Then, when the touch sensor 516 detects a player's contact, when the handle body 504 rotates, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball is shot. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while the handle device 500 is being rotated, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520 and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 194) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotational drive can be stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launch device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are connected to the door as in a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating due to game ball driving defects It has to be able to bet.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. 52A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 52B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 53 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 has a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and communicates with the first sphere inlet 542a. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right when viewed from the front as it goes to the front end of the cover base 542, and a second sphere entrance that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a. 542c and a second sphere passage 542d that communicates with the second sphere inlet 542c and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. From 544a, the plate unit 300 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is turned to the left when viewed from the front. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the back. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 83). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 194) stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the game A notification for urging a person to discharge the game ball in the dish unit 300 to the outside is provided.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[Antistatic measures for door frame base substrate 194]
As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (transparent polycarbonate molded product) (see FIGS. 52A, 52B, and 53) includes the second ball passage 542d and the game ball for guiding the game ball to the lower plate. Is formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while being in contact with the wall surface of the passage, so that the game ball and the resin are rubbed to generate static electricity and the game ball is charged. Cheap.

  For this reason, a metal ground rail 554 is provided at the bottom of the second ball path 542d to remove the static electricity of the game ball generated by rolling resistance caused by the circulation of the game ball and discharge it to the lower plate. Yes. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped grounding metal 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the left end grounding metal 556 can be electrically connected to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 52A, 52B and 53). The ground metal 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, and 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

  Although the second ball path 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the ground rail 554 as described above, the electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, and it becomes 10 kV or more. (3-4 kV at most even if you feel pain from the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). Moreover, even if the electric charge accumulated in the resin is grounded, only the very periphery is removed, and most of it remains. Then, there is a possibility that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto may malfunction due to electrostatic induction due to this electric charge.

  In the gaming machine, a ground wire for discharging static electricity is attached to the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, for example. However, there is a possibility that the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident, or the connection terminal portion of the ground wire may be disconnected.

  The embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, so that even if the ground is not taken, electrostatic induction is not caused by charges accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. Further, the invention relates to an invention relating to an antistatic mechanism that shields the door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and prevents static electricity that has escaped to the shield metal plate from jumping to surrounding conductors. It is.

  FIG. 54 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of a door frame showing a state equipped with an antistatic mechanism when viewed from the back. FIG. 56 is a main part rear view of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. FIG. 57 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a metal (tinplate in this example) thin plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so as not to cause electrostatic induction due to the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. And a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) that is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and insulates the electric charge jumped to the shield plate 562 so as not to jump to the surrounding conductor. And an insulating sheet 570.

  The shield plate 562 has a flat plate-like conductive portion 563 that is conductively contacted by contacting the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the door frame 5 at an upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent in the left-right direction. Is a substantially plate-shaped shield part 564 that is located below and behind the conductive part 563 and is disposed over substantially the entire back side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower back surface of the door frame 5. And have.

  A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563. An insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565, and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner near the upper side of the conductive portion 563. Is drilled.

  The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield part 564 of the shield plate 562, and functions to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield part 564 from the surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 by sticking.

  55 to 57, as described above, the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the static electricity prevention mechanism 560 is disposed over substantially the entire rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is disposed on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is disposed between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is positioned on the outer side in the radial direction than the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562. The conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 contacts the back surface of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5 so as to be in conductive contact and to release static electricity.

  It should be noted that mounting boss portions 110g, 110h, 110i, and 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are projected from appropriate positions on the right side portion of the lower rear surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base body 110). Further, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 to the shield plate 562 and the grounding metal plate 556 are provided at appropriate locations on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. 154c (see FIG. 56).

  The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110g into the insertion hole 566, the screw is inserted into the mounting hole 567 and the screw insertion hole 154a of the lower reinforcing metal fitting 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. Screwed to the base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 is disposed with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. Screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. In addition, a screw is inserted into the mounting portion of the grounding metal 556, and further, screws are inserted into the screw insertion holes 154 b and 154 c of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154, and by screwing the screws, static electricity is applied to the metal lower reinforcing metal plate 154. Screwed to the door frame base body 110 so as to escape.

  The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached to the attachment boss portion 110g together with screws. In addition, a ground wire (not shown) is attached to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 together with the ground metal fitting 556 by screws.

[Operation of antistatic mechanism 560]
The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 escapes to the metal lower reinforcement sheet metal 154 through the shield part 564 of the shield plate 562 in surface contact and the conductive part 563 in surface contact with the lower reinforcement sheet metal 154. The door-frame base substrate 194 can be shielded by the thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 so that electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

  Further, since the shield plate 562 is disposed so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge jumped to the shield plate 562 is transferred from the corner or end surface of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). (Things and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[1-2I. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 58A is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and FIG. 58B is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. FIG. 59 is a rear view of the ball feeding unit. 60A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 60B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after the rear case is removed. Further, FIG. 61A is a plan view of the tamper-proof member in the ball feeding unit, FIG. 61B is a front view of the tamper-proof member, and FIG. 61C is a perspective view of the tamper-proof member viewed from the front. (D) is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of a fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in the front view, and the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is disposed on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a which is located below the entrance port 581a and partitions the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feed member 584, and the partition portion 583a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 58), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 60) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 60B and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right as viewed from the rear of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582a of the rear cover 582 so as to be detachable from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 59 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape whose overall outer diameter in the rear view is a horizontally long shape, and on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip which is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c divided vertically with a dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side side) of the upper end portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 588 so as to be separated from each other. A character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the distal end (the left end side in the rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves backward, It is formed in a V shape in plan view, and a wire rod Iw attached to an illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect each other at a predetermined angle in plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed as follows.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud preventing member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It is like that. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, as shown in the figure, a tamper-proof member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is shown. A portion corresponding to the portion where the is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to the fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the hit ball launching device 650 sends the illegal game ball I to the game area of the game board 4. When the player hits the inside 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the hitting ball launcher 650 moves obliquely to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in the front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. An attempt is made to enter the game area 1100 through the game. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw differs from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the path of the game ball It moves along the route connecting at the shortest distance. Accordingly, the wire Iw extending from the dish unit 300 through the hitting supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launcher 650 moves the game ball I in the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). Thus, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the hitting ball supply port 582a so as to move to the shortest route, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed at the upper right of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear view. The wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) that extends rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the anti-fraud member 588 disposed at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the force of the illegal game ball I.

  As a result, the wire Iw attached to the unauthorized game ball I is pulled by the unauthorized game ball I in the cutting direction 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 in a direction in which the gap is narrowed (leftward in front view). In this state, friction and shearing force are applied by the cutting portion 588d, and the wire Iw is cut (see FIG. 61D). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I attached with the wire Iw is attenuated by friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, it does not enter the game area 1100 between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the anti-fraud member 588. Can be prevented. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, so that it is impossible to perform an illegal act. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cut portion 588d, thereby reducing the momentum of the illegal game ball I and playing area 1100. It is possible to prevent intrusion, so that it is possible to prevent illegal acts.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. Since the player can be less annoyed and the interest can be prevented from being reduced, and the plate unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301. The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  In addition, the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a is compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is disposed as close as possible to the ball hitting device 650. Therefore, the wire Iw adhering to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentary) state immediately after being fired by the ball hitting device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. As the wire Iw is pulled quickly (strongly), the wire Iw can be surely cut, and the force of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent entry into the game area 1100. It is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the tamper-proof member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b that is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rear cover 582, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from projecting rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the anti-fraud member 588 is injured by an operator during assembly. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the anti-fraud member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I, the upper upper piece 588b is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material interposed therebetween. Thus, since the V-shaped cutting part 588d is formed, the cutting part 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 112). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a disposed on the upper sides of the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. Stop piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Molding decoration on door frame]
Next, modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, shape decoration, will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 62. FIG. FIG. 62 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at the substantially vertical center. The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the vertically long oval gaming window 101 as shown in the figure. In order to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The door frame 5 is greatly different in appearance on both sides across the gaming window 101, and the right side has a natural rock-like appearance crumpled by the side lens 210 that forms the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that are visible on the left side from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. It has become.

  62, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 have different amounts of forward projection, as shown in FIG. It protrudes forward larger than 240. In addition, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

  Thereby, when the door frame 5 of this example is seen from the front right side, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front part When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 appears larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 becomes almost invisible, and a different impression can be given depending on the player's standing position with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like that. That is, since the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1 and can be given an illusion like a pachinko machine of a different model, the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play, etc. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical left and right, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows in the left and right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the whole appearance of the island equipment is smooth and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives the player a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and attract the player's interest strongly.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby allowing the gaming window 101 to emit light. It is possible to decorate the light emission with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b and 216b disposed on the rear side of the side flash lenses 204 and 246, respectively. , 254b, 256 are turned on and off to change the mode of light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view showing an arrangement of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 64 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210 a and 250 a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming window 101 at the center in the left-right direction. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one smooth loose curved surface. In the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is disposed between the peripheral lens portion 250a and the side inner lens 252 in the side lens 250.

  Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246) are provided. . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are relatively high in luminance. LED. The two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 disposed at the center in the left-right direction, an annular central annular lens portion 282b disposed on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and outward outward from the central annular lens portion 282b. And four extending frame lens portions 282c extending to the right. The front surface of the extended frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decorative unit 280 includes an upper central decorative substrate 288 disposed on the rear side of the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and the upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 disposed on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288. On the upper central decorative substrate 288, a plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface, and the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually decorated with light emission. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 so that each extended frame lens portion 282c can be decorated with light emission. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a on the upper central decorative board 288 and the upper side decorative board 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the appearance is continuous with the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this dish unit 300, an upper dish decoration board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper dish decoration element 316, and a plurality of LEDs 322 a mounted on the upper dish decoration board 322 are used in the upper dish decoration element 316. The upper dish upper right decorative member 319 that decorates the right part and the front outer periphery of the upper dish ball removal button 341 can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 63 and 64) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the cross-hatched range in FIGS. 63 and 64), and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light as appropriate so as to surround the gaming window 101. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. The radial group 104 (in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the ring shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 214 c of the upper right side decorative board 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. It is possible to notify various information to a person or a game hall employee who installed the pachinko machine 1.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 288 a and 288 b corresponding to the upper central lens 284 and the central annular lens portion 282 b in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 are the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The upper center group 106 is configured to illuminate and decorate the upper center. The LED 288a and 288b of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make a light emitting decoration that becomes a dot. The LED 290a corresponding to the extended frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be decorated with light emission.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322 a corresponding to the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper right decoration member 319 arranged on the lower side of the gaming window 101 is used to decorate the upper dish 301 with light emission. The dish group 108 is set. In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in this embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which they belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250). ing. The two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, a central part 106a, a right part 106b, and a left part 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the eleven LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d on the front and rear sides and on the right and left sides. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and a pair of left and right 109a and front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  In the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, there are three times 84 systems. The LEDs 288a and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, so that there are ten systems of the same number in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  Further, by coordinating with LEDs (not shown in detail) provided on the game board 4, the LEDs of the game board 4, the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first annular group 102 With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged on the outer side, it is possible to produce a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, each of the systems 102 a to 102 j and 103 a to 103 j is appropriately caused to emit light, so that the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 is aligned along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284 or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. In addition, by causing each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

  In addition, by causing the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 to emit light, an opportunity or a specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state, probability variation gaming state, time-short gaming state, probability variation short-time gaming state) is given to the player. , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emission effect for lighting and decorating the upper plate 301, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation is performed. A light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405 can be performed. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 71. FIG. 65 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 66 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 67 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 68 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 69 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 69). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left ends in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 65) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate-like shape in which the lower end hangs down from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and the lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be fitted into the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 73). As shown in FIG. 72 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 67, FIG. A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 70 and the like). The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( 73), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock engagement holes 621 are engaged with and engaged with engagement protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000, and the front end frame portion 602 is engaged. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 67).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that is allowed to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 67 and the like) penetrating in the up-down direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 69 and 113) for regulating the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. 74 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 75 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 102) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate a rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 67, FIG. 102, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 83. FIG. 76 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 77 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 78 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen after disassembly. FIG. 82 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 79, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 80, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 80, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth with the upper part open, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 83) that opens downward on the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 78) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. The ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not become one step by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 narrows toward the discharge port 731a. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731 so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 81 to 83 and the like, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 in the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b having a predetermined space communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in communication with the lower left side (open side) and bent substantially in a letter shape. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. The upper part of the back cover 742 has a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and the relay board mounting. The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and heat generated by the payout motor 744 is generated. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 82, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detecting board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the space between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748. The detection slit 749a is formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or a ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 82, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, It can be discharged outside the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 in 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 78, FIG. 79, and FIG. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 83). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 83) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 83) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and the game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received by the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs differs.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantial game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is determined. Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction at the same time as the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front-rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is in contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 93. 87 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 88 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from after being disassembled. FIG. 91 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 92A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 92B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 93A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 93B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, A vertically long slit-shaped compound that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A through hole 815 of, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. In addition, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a lower speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. The bass reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a heavy bass with respect to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear open, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831 and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above in an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thereby, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 67).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 93, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Thus, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to eliminate the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to flow through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It can be eliminated, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 90, a power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  Further, the power board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power terminal 853 (see FIGS. 88 and 90) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the power board box 850 has a standing wall portion 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  In addition, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 where the power terminal 853 faces. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 194) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 66). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and externally connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 through a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the back. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b when viewed from the back. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, as shown It is arranged to be close to the position.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has the fixing piece 873h inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871, thereby The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 92, the terminal board box 870 of the present example, when assembled, has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the unauthorized entry of the tool from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIG. 1 and FIG. 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This relay relays the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96. FIG. 94A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 94B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 95 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900 as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a notch portion 914 for confirmation cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body portion 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 105) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from dropping from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screw-coupled to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared with engagement by a simple claw. Can not be released and the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted The locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. A rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 112). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 112).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 112). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and performing illegal acts. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. 97A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 97B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 98 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 98 (B) is a glass door slide rod and a main body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the sliding door for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the anti-fraud member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 to 99, the lock device 1000 is a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are prevented from being illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw-fastening portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 99) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw-fastening portion 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper end portion and middle portion of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 99) opposite to the side surface 1001b provided with a protrusion, and the lower end portions of both open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is mounted not only on the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also on the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, the lock attaching portion 625 is fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense with the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. A lower insertion hole 1005 and a rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 101 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 67 and 72) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  In addition, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the tamper-proof notch 1007 behind the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1040. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 100, when the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 100A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The eaves 1050 are raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 100A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is normally unlocked by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 on the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock penetration hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist the same effect as the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 mounted on the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the award ball device 740 are rear. And a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as that of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that can visually check the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material having a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 104 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 106 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 106 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

  FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 104 and the like as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 is the game as viewed from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 109 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 107 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the front structural member of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 107 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111 is the game board as viewed from the rear of FIG. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, it is provided (see FIGS. 114 to 120).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1111 inside the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the upper left side when viewed from the front. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the hit ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the urging force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (injected into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted with a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 105). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of the present example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface, A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out sphere. A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160, The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end of the rear surface of the rear surface when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 whose rear side is opened and a thin horizontal box shape that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is opened on the front side, and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 105 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In addition, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 106 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 A first special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol, and a lottery result of the first special symbol that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball into the first start port 2101 (first The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 A second consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol that is arranged and lottery by accepting a game ball at the second starting port 2102 as the second special symbol. A special symbol indicator 1186 and a second special symbol for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2102, which is composed of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the second special symbol indicator 1186. A storage indicator 1187. Note that the lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102 is different from the big hit lottery found in the conventional pachinko machine, and is a precondition for executing the big hit game. This is a lottery to determine whether or not to operate the conditional device, and to determine the expected value of the winning ball amount. Therefore, even if the lottery is won, the condition device only operates, and the jackpot game is not executed with this alone as in the conventional pachinko machine.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 has a reserved number related to the passage of the gate unit 2301 by a game ball that is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 made up of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit (condition device is activated Round indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the open / close pattern of the winning prize opening 2103 is repeated (number of rounds) It is provided with a 190, a.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, probability variation state, time shortening state, probability variation short state, jackpot gaming state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. More specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holds is 1, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the combination of the emission color and the lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2301. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined time similarly to the special symbol.

  Further, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  Furthermore, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes a two-round display lamp 1190a and a 16-round display lamp 1190b made up of predetermined LEDs. Numbers can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 147). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. Compared to the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. FIG. Note that the front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 107 to 109 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction, It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the attacker unit 2100 and the center accessory 2500, the details of which will be described later. Thus, the attacker unit 2100 and the like are inserted and fixed from the front side (see FIG. 119 and the like).

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape. 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the attachment boss of the front component member 1110 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 that is recessed in a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction on the rear side. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 141, etc.) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3010c formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3010 in the back box 3010). Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 107, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, in a predetermined range from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  In addition, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out-sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 108) that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and that opens at the lower end side downward. And a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it becomes possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the state of holding the panel holder 1220 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, since the thin panel plate 1210 supports only the front unit, it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position such as an obstacle nail or a winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-4G. Second embodiment of front component]
Next, a front component member 1110A having a form different from that of the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. 110 and 112, the gaming panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 have the outer shape of the panel board 1210 and the inner shape of the through-hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 in the embodiment shown in FIGS. The configuration is the same as that of the example of FIGS. 107 to 109, and detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The front structural member 1110A shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 is different from the front structural member 1110 described above in that a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is different and the function display unit 1180 is not provided. The point is very different. In addition, about another structure, it is the same as that of the front structural member 1110, and while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component member 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit 2000).

  As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-like inner peripheral shape that extends from the out-port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction in a front view to the inner rail 1112 and the stop portion 1114 of the outer rail 1111. The shape is the same as that of the above-described front component member 1110, and the shape from the stop portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from that of the above-described front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a portion extending from the stopper 1114 to a position immediately above the right-side certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed immediately below the stopper 1114 is formed in a gentle arc shape, and from the arc-shaped lower end to the outlet. It is formed in a straight line inclined so that the distance to the guide surface 1115 becomes lower toward the out-mouth guide surface 1115.

  The front component member 1110A of the present example can secure a wider game area 1100 than the above-described front component member 1110, and the wide game area 1100 can make the player more entertaining. It can be done.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 113 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state in which the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 112, the security structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased and the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 112, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 113, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 for housing the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally upper right front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally upper left front. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the lower left front. FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 119 is a perspective view disassembled for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the diagonal front, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view exploded for each main member constituting the game board and viewed from the diagonal rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110A that partitions and forms the inner periphery of the game region 1100 to be driven, and a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game region 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110A so as to close the game region 1100 A plate-like game panel 1200 having a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 119 and the like) and defining a rear end of the game area 1100.

  The gaming panel 1200 of this example is a plate-like plate that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose inner periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110A, and has a transparent panel plate 1210 that has a smaller outer shape than the front component member 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110A while holding the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side. An opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  The gaming board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1215 of the gaming panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a left end of the front end of the back unit 3000. And a function display unit 1180 that is visible from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and that is visible from the gaming window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko machine 1. A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a display screen (display area) which is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. A board holder 1160 attached to a lower part of the rear surface of the gaming panel 1200, and a rear surface of the board holder 1160 Includes a main control board box 1170 attached, a.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example includes an attacker unit 2100 arranged at the lower part in the game area 1100 so as to extend right above the out port 1151 in the front view and the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The front side unit 2200 arranged along the inner periphery of the game unit, the gate unit 2300 arranged at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left end in front view in the game area 1100, and the game area 1100 And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 arranged in the central portion.

  Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction in which the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. A back box 3010 in which 3010b is formed, a back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, a back effect unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and a back box The back bottom rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010b in the 3010, and the bottom right bottom disposed between the back bottom rendering unit 3400 and the front front decoration unit 3100 in the bottom right front corner in the back box 3010. The production unit 3600 is mainly provided. The front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be viewed from the player side through the transparent panel board 1210.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board that houses a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 194) having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150, as will be described in detail later. A box 1910 is provided.

  In the gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, a game area 1100 is divided into left and right by a center accessory 2500 attached to the game panel 1200. The outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 (The inner circumference of the front component member 1110A) is a region having a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer periphery of the game region 1100 (the front component member 1110A). And a plurality of obstacle nails (shown in the figure) on the front surface of the panel board 1210 in the left area of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Are omitted).

  In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (injected with a strength higher than a predetermined strength), the center accessory from the upstream side of the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A. It is sent to the sorting space 2530 side by the sorting approach passage 2545 of 2500, and after being sorted in either the left or right direction in the sorting space 2530 by the sorting valve 2551 of the sorting unit 2550, it is discharged from the outlet 2534. Then, the game ball is returned to the game area 1100 from the discharge port 2541 which is guided by the guide passage 2540 and opened to the upstream side of the big winning port 2103 of the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball is distributed. By passing through the space 2530, the open large winning opening 2103 can be received (winned) with a high probability.

  Further, in the game board 4 of this example, when the game ball is driven to the left side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is moved to the gate unit 2300, the front side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2100 by a plurality of obstacle nails. Or a warp inlet 2504 on the way to be discharged directly above the first starting port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 via the stage 2510, and the gate portion 2301, the general winning ports 2104, 2201, It is possible to win the start opening 2101, 2102, the grand prize opening 2103, etc., so that the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed.

  That is, in the route on the right side with the center character 2500 in between, it is possible to entertain the game balls in the distribution space 2530 without being in contact with the obstacle nail and easy acceptance into the big prize opening 2103. In the route on the left side with the center object 2500 sandwiched, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball with a feeling of dynamism by jumping with the obstacle nail. The game ball can be driven so as to pass through a specific route, and the game ball can be prevented from being monotonous in the operation and movement of the game ball.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged so as to extend from right above the out port 1151 to the right side at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100, and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). A front side unit 2200 disposed on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and extending in an arc shape substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and above the left end of the front side unit 2200, in the vicinity of the left end of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. A gate unit 2300 arranged at a position slightly above the center in the vertical direction, and a frame-like shape that is arranged on the right side of the game area from the approximate center of the game area 1100 and is supported by the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). A center accessory 2500.

  The attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail later. The first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 from which a predetermined special lottery result is drawn in response to the reception of a game ball, and according to the special lottery result A large winning opening 2103 that can receive a game ball and a general winning opening 2104 that can always receive a game ball are provided. In this example, the second start port 2102 is arranged immediately below the first start port 2101, and the lower second start port 2102 is normally unable to receive game balls, and the gate unit 2300 It is a variable winning opening that allows game balls to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn in response to the passing of the game balls at 2301. The big winning opening 2103 is arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 when viewed from the front. The central axes of directions are arranged at different positions.

  Although the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail later, the front side unit 2200 is arranged on the left side of the two general winning ports 2201 and the general winning port 2201 arranged on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 and flows down from above. Shelves 2202 and 2203 for guiding the game balls to the right.

  As will be described in detail later, the gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the left side of the center accessory 2500 above the front side unit 2200 and is attached to the front surface of the transparent panel plate 1210. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2301 having a size that allows only one game ball to pass therethrough, and a gate sensor 2302 that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in the gate portion 2301.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a large opening 1215 formed substantially at the center of the panel plate 1210, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side. Is formed in a frame shape having a window portion 2501 that can be visually recognized from the player side. In the center accessory 2500, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 are prevented from entering the frame. A peripheral wall 2503, a warp inlet 2504 that opens to a predetermined position of the peripheral wall 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a game ball that is discharged from the warp outlet 2505 in the left-right direction And a stage 2510 for releasing into the game area 1100 and returning to the game area 1100. The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is disposed immediately above the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball recirculated from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 has a high probability. The unit 2100 can be received in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102.

  Further, in the center accessory 2500, a distribution space 2530 through which game balls flowing down along the outer peripheral wall 2503 in the upper right part of the center in the left-right direction in front view flows, and game balls are distributed in the distribution space 2530. A distribution valve 2551 that distributes to either the left or right, a gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) through which game balls distributed by the distribution valve 2551 can pass, and a gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate) 2575R), a distribution detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) that can detect that the game ball has passed, and a game ball distributed in the distribution space 2530 at the center in the horizontal direction at a position below the stage 2510. Guide path 2540 for guiding to the side, and the game ball guided by the guide path 2540 to the attacker unit 2100 Kicking the outlet 2541 to reflux and release to the game area 1100 in the upper winning opening 2103, it is provided.

  The center role 2500 is configured such that a game ball that has flowed down the distribution space 2530 can be received with high probability into the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. In addition, the distribution space 2530 of the distribution unit 2550 is provided with a jackpot game in a mode corresponding to the distributed direction by distributing the game ball in any direction when the condition device is activated. It is like that.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from below. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit partially disassembled and viewed later.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of reception openings (winning openings) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, it is disposed between the first start port 2101 that is disposed immediately above the out port 1151 in the game panel 1200 and is capable of receiving game balls at all times, and is generally disposed between the first start port 2101 and the out port 1151. The second start port 2102 that is not allowed to receive a game ball, and the second start port 2102 and the first start port 2101 are arranged at a height intermediate between the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 on the right side of the front view. Normally, it is possible to accept a long-sized rectangular large winning opening 2103 which is not allowed to receive a game ball, and a regular gaming ball arranged immediately above the large winning opening 2103 and between the large winning opening 2103 and the second start opening 2102. And a general winning opening 2104.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winning) at all times. On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed immediately below the first start port 2101 is, as shown in the figure, formed by a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second start port 2102. The space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102 in the illustrated state (normal state).

  The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 are pivotally supported at the lower end side, and the upper end side is rotated in a direction away from each other to be expanded. A game ball can be received in the second start port 2102. That is, the second start port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105. The second start port 2102 opens and closes the pair of movable pieces 2105 in accordance with a normal lottery result that is drawn when a game ball passes through the gate portion of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor. It has become.

  Further, the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger than the width of the opening of the first start opening 2101 and the second start opening 2102. As shown in the figure, the special winning opening 2103 is normally closed by an opening / closing member 2106 having a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is opened / closed by turning the opening / closing member 2106. The opening / closing member 2106 for opening and closing the grand prize opening 2103 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable about a substantially lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the special prize opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball. At the same time, when the upper side is rotated so as to move to the front side, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  Furthermore, the two general winning ports 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are substantially the same height as the second starting port 2102 between the large winning port 2103 and the second starting port 2102 and directly above the center of the large winning port 2103 in the left-right direction. It arrange | positions in the state where each upper direction was open | released.

  The attacker unit 2100 has such a width (width) that the lateral widths of the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and each game ball is received one by one. ing. Further, the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other and expanded to be three times the outer shape of the game ball. The width is about 5 times. Further, the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is in an open state, which is 5 to 8 times the width of the game ball. In other words, in a state where the game ball can be received, the first start port 2101, the general winning port 2104, the second start port 2102, and the big winning port 2103 are formed so as to be easily received.

  Furthermore, the attacker unit 2100 of this example includes a base plate 2110 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 so as to close the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200 and a flat front end. A first receiving member 2111 which is attached at a position where the first starting port 2101 is arranged to form the first starting port 2101 and whose upper side is opened, and a position where the first receiving member 2111 on the base plate 2110 is attached (first starting member). A second receiving member 2112 which is attached to the lower side of the mouth 2101 and pivotally supports a pair of movable pieces 2105 and which forms a second starting port 2102 and is open on the upper and rear sides, and a base plate 2110 A general receiving member 2113 which is attached at a position where the general winning port 2104 is arranged to form the general winning port 2104 and whose upper side is opened, It is provided.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 2110 and supports a start port solenoid 2114 that opens and closes a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102 and covers the start port solenoid 2114. A solenoid cover 2115 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a starter decoration board 2116 sandwiched between the solenoid cover 2115 and the base plate 2110 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the big prize opening 2103 in the base plate 2110 and supports an opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the big prize opening 2103 so as to be rotatable and can be divided vertically. Unit case 2120, an attacker solenoid 2121 supported in the unit case 2120 for driving the opening / closing member 2106 to open and close, a count sensor 2122 for detecting a game ball received in the big prize opening 2103, and an upper portion of the unit case 2120 And a general winning port sensor 2123 that is arranged immediately above the big winning port 2103 and detects a game ball received by the general winning port 2104, and a unit case 2120 that covers the rear side and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110. On the rear side of the unit cover 2124 and the unit cover 2124 A large prize opening decoration board 2125 attached to the front face and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon, and an attacker unit relay board 2126 disposed on the rear side of the big prize opening decoration board 2125 and attached to the rear side of the unit cover 2124. Yes.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape whose front surface extends in the left-right direction, and a shallow relief-like decoration is applied to the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a penetrating in the front-rear direction through which a game ball can pass at a position corresponding to the second starting port 2102 (see FIG. 123). Further, the base plate 2110 is formed with a flange portion 2110b extending rearward at a position corresponding to the first start port 2101, and a game ball received by the first receiving member 2111 as the first start port 2101. Can be transferred to the first passage 3122a in the front front decorative unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which will be described later, via the guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115. ing.

  As shown in the drawing, the second receiving member 2112 of the attacker unit 2100 has a translucent front surface and is decorated with a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Although not shown in detail, the second receiving member 2112 includes a pair of shaft portions extending rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by the shaft portion.

  Further, the general receiving member 2113 of the attacker unit 2100 includes a collar portion 2113a that guides the received game ball to the rear side of the panel plate 1210.

  Although not shown, the starter solenoid 2114 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and that is biased in the protruding direction by a coil spring. The plunger is supported by a base plate 2110 and a solenoid cover 2115 at a position behind the two start ports 2102 so that the plunger protrudes forward. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2114 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2114 moves backward against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are connected via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

  Further, the solenoid cover 2115 of the attacker unit 2100 is provided with a guide path 2115a on the upper surface, the front end side being connected to the rear end of the flange 2110b of the base plate, and guiding the game ball from the flange 2110b to the right in front view. ing. The guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 is received by the first receiving member 2111 and is received by the first start port 2101 and the game ball guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the flange portion 2110b of the base plate 2110. It can be guided to the right in front view and delivered to the first passage 3122a in the front front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. In addition, the solenoid cover 2115 includes a discharge port 2115b that opens rearward under a portion that supports the start port solenoid 2114. The discharge port 2115b communicates with the second start port 2102, and a game ball received in the second start port 2102 is transferred from the discharge port 2115b to the second passage 3122b in the front front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. Can be delivered to.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the unit case 2120 of the attacker unit 2100 includes a large winning / ejecting port 2120a for discharging the game balls received in the large winning port 2103 downward on the rear side of the panel plate 1210, and a large winning award. A general discharge port 2120b for discharging the game balls received in the general winning port 2104 disposed immediately above the port 2103 to the lower side behind the panel plate 1210. Although not shown, the unit case 2120 has a first passage for guiding the game ball received in the big prize opening 2103 to the rear side from the game panel 1210 and discharging it from the big inlet / outlet 2120a, And a second passage for discharging the game balls received by the ball receiving portion 2124a of the unit cover 2124 from the general discharge port 2120b and received by the general winning port 2104 immediately above the big winning port 2103. As shown in FIG. 126, the unit case 2120 supports the general prize opening sensor 2123 at a position directly below the ball receiving portion 2124 a in the unit cover 2124.

  Although not shown in the figure, the attacker solenoid 2121 of the attacker unit 2100 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, as in the case of the start port solenoid 2114. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2121 is immersed, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  As shown in the figure, the unit cover 2124 of the attacker unit 2100 is received by the general winning port 2104 immediately behind the collar part 2113a of the general receiving member 2113 attached immediately above the big prize opening 2103 and is moved backward by the collar part 2113a. A ball receiving portion 2124a for receiving the guided game ball and guiding it downward is provided.

  The starter opening decoration board 2116 of the attacker unit 2100 can emit light by decorating the second starter opening 2102 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Also, the special winning opening decoration board 2125 of the attacker unit is configured so that the special winning opening 2103 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. Further, the attacker unit relay board 2126 includes a start opening solenoid 2114, an attack solenoid 2121, a count sensor 2122, a general winning opening sensor 2123, a panel relay board 3040 (main control board 4100), a starting opening decoration board 2116, and a large winning opening decoration. This is for relaying the connection between the substrate 2125 and the lamp driving substrate 3041.

  The attacker unit 2100 of this example is in a state where the first start port 2101 can always accept a game ball. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable is performed by energizing the starting port solenoid 2114 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate unit 2301 in the gate unit 2300 described later. The piece 2105 is expanded and can be received. Also, in the grand prize winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize) (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit” ”), The opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern and can be received by energizing the attacker solenoid 2121.

  In this attacker unit 2100, the game balls received in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are the first passage 3122a and the second passage of the lower unit base 3122 in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. After being received by 3122b and detected by the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132, it is discharged downward.

  Further, the attacker unit 2100 detects the game balls received in the special winning opening 2103 and the general winning opening 2104 directly above by the count sensor 2122 and the general winning opening sensor 2123 in the unit case 2120, and then the unit case 2120. It is discharged downward from the large inlet / outlet 2120a and the general outlet 2120b on the lower surface.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2121 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left / right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2121 is arranged as close as possible to the opening / closing member 2106. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

[2-3. Front side unit]
Subsequently, the front side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 127A is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 127B is a perspective view of the front side unit as viewed from the rear. The front side unit 2200 in the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 is located on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 and at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the panel board 1210 so that it may contact | connect.

  As shown in the drawing, the front side unit 2200 of this example is formed in an arc shape along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and has two general winning ports 2201 arranged on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. , Two shelf portions 2202 and 2203 that are arranged on the left side from the center in the left-right direction and are inclined so that the right end side is lowered in front view, and a plate-like shape that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1210 and closes the opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 A base 2210 and a flange 2211 extending rearward from the rear surface of the base 2210 where the general winning opening 2201 is disposed.

  As shown in the figure, the front side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning ports 2201 and shelves 2202 and 2203 on the front surface of the base 2210, and the whole is formed substantially transparent.

  In addition, the front side unit 2200 moves the game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center object 2500 in the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 by the two shelves 2202 and 2203. It can be induced. In addition, the front side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in the general winning opening 2201 to the rear side of the panel plate 1210 by the flange portion 2211, so that the lower unit base in the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. 3122 can be transferred to a general passage 3122d.

[2-4. Gate unit]
Next, the gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The gate unit 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. Thus, it is fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel plate 1210).

  The gate unit 2300 has a gate portion 2301 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a gate sensor 2302 disposed in the gate portion 2301 detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2301. Can be done.

  Note that the gate unit 2300 of the present example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate, and the rear side of the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the gaming panel 1200 is the panel plate 1210. It is designed to fit within the thickness. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2302 extends from the rear surface of the panel plate 1210.

  When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the gate unit 2300 can detect the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302, and when the gate sensor 2302 detects the passage of the game ball, The lottery result is drawn, and the start opening solenoid 2114 is driven according to the selected lottery result, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second start opening 2102 rotate, and the second start opening 2102 receives the predetermined time. It has become possible.

[2-5. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 128 to 140. 128 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the center accessory distribution unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the center accessory as the distribution unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the sorting unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the sorting unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 136 is an enlarged front view showing the movement of the sorting unit in the center object, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the surrounding of the sorting unit seen from the upper left, and FIG. 138 shows the driving of the sorting unit. FIG. 139 is an explanatory diagram showing driving of the movable decorative body of the sorting unit. FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the flow of game balls in the sorting unit in the center bonus.

  The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, a liquid crystal display device 1900 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is arranged on the rear side in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100 is visible. The large window portion 2501 is provided.

  The center accessory 2500 has a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 on the outer periphery of the window portion 2501 and bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 to the inside of the game area 1100 with the approximate center in the left-right direction as a boundary. And a peripheral wall portion 2503 for guiding the game ball flowing down to the left and right and preventing the game ball from entering the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 opens on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 located on the front side of the panel plate 1210 and allows a game ball 2504 flowing down the game area 1100 to enter the warp inlet 2504 (FIGS. 116 and 117). ), A warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a first start port in the attacker unit 2100 after rolling the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 in the horizontal direction. And a stage 2510 disposed at the lower inner edge of the window portion 2501 to be discharged and refluxed into the game area 1100 above 2101.

  A stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 is supplied with a game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 and a first stage 2511 in which the supplied game ball can be discharged forward from a predetermined position. The second stage 2512 is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2511 and is supplied with a game ball from the first stage 2511 and can discharge the supplied game ball forward from a predetermined position. The second stage 2512 is arranged on the front side of the second stage 2512. And the right and left sides of the second stage 2512 between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511. The game ball is supplied from the third stage 2513 and the supplied game ball can be released downward. The fourth stage 2514 and the fourth stage 2514 are arranged below the fourth stage 2514, and a game ball is supplied from the fourth stage, and the game ball is released forward from a predetermined position to be placed in the game area 1100. And a fifth stage 2515 for recirculation.

  Further, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 opens to a predetermined position of the first stage 2511 and allows the game ball to enter, and opens to a predetermined position of the second stage 2512 and the game ball enters. The second chance entrance 2517 that has been made possible, and the game balls that have entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 are recirculated and released into the game area 1100 and opened immediately above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100. And a chance exit 2518.

  The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is formed in a curved shape so that the left and right ends are the highest, and is formed so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is higher, and is generally smooth and flat W-shaped. A game ball is emitted forward from the lowest part on both sides of the part of the game area 1100 that is higher in the center in the left-right direction. Further, the second stage 2512 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the left and right parts that are lowest in the first stage 2511 and discharges the game ball forward, and is loosely curved so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is lowered. The game ball is discharged forward from a predetermined width at the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 has a length in the left-right direction that is substantially the same as that of the first stage 2511 and is curved so that the left and right ends are the highest. It is formed in a smooth and flat W-shaped wave shape so that the center in the direction becomes high as a whole, and the lowest parts on the left and right sides of the raised part in the center in the left and right direction of the game area 1100 are the second stage. It is formed to be located on the outer side in the left-right direction with respect to 2512. In the third stage 2513, the game ball is discharged backward from the lowest part.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the fourth stage 2514 in the stage 2510 is independently arranged on both the left and right sides of the second stage 2512, and is inclined gently so that the side far from the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a drop hole 2514a that opens downward and allows a game ball to pass therethrough is provided at the lowest position. The fourth stage 2514 is configured such that the supplied game ball is discharged downward through the drop hole 2514a.

  The fifth stage 2515 in the stage 2510 has a length in the left-right direction that spans the drop holes 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 that are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. The game area 1100 is formed in a smooth and flat W-shaped wave shape so that the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 becomes higher. The game ball is discharged forward (in the game area 1100) from the lowest part of the game.

  In addition, the first chance entrance 2516 in the stage 2510 is arranged so that the rear half in the front-rear direction is placed on a heightened portion in the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 in the first stage 2511. Further, the second chance entrance 2517 is arranged at the lower portion of the game area 1100 in the second stage 2512 at the center in the left-right direction so as to open to the rear side in the front-rear direction. The first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 communicate with each other below the stage 2510, respectively, and proceed from the position directly below the raised portion at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 in the fifth stage 2515. A game ball is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2518 opened.

  In the stage 2510 of the center bonus 2500, the game ball supplied via the warp entrance 2504 enters either the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 and is released from the chance exit 2518 into the game area 1100. Then, since the chance exit 2518 is arranged immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, a game ball is accepted into the first start port 2101 (the open second start port 2102) with a high probability. (Wins).

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, a groove narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball extending in the front-rear direction is formed on the inner bottom surface of the chance outlet 2518, and the game ball is rectified by this groove. The behavior of the game ball emitted from the chance exit 2518 can be stabilized by being released into the game area 1100.

  In the center accessory 2500, almost the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the game balls that circulate through the stages 2511, 2512, 2513, 2514, and 2515 formed in multiple stages from the player side are sufficiently provided. It can be visually recognized.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the third stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500 extends in the left-right direction from the left end of the center accessory 2500 to a position substantially the same as the right end of the first stage 2511. The game ball protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1210 of the panel 1200, and the game ball abuts against the obstacle nail planted in the lower region of the center object 2500 in the game region 1100 and greatly jumps upward. However, it can come into contact with the lower surface side of the third stage 2513 and rebound downward. This prevents the game ball jumped by the obstacle nail from entering the window 2501 (inside the frame) of the center object 2500 and prevents the game ball from entering the window 2501. Is arranged below the stage 2510 so that the inside of the stage 2510 and the window 2501 can be easily seen.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 of the present example is a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and protrudes forward from the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502 and is driven into the game area 1100. A transparent frame-shaped center base 2520 having a peripheral wall portion 2503 capable of preventing the game ball from entering the window portion 2501 (inside the frame) is further provided. The center base 2530 has a rear extension wall 2521 extending rearward from the rear surface on the inner peripheral side of the flange portion 2502. When the center base 2530 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210, the rear extension wall 2521 is a panel. It is inserted into the opening 1215 of the plate 1210.

  The center base 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a space forming recess 2522 whose front side for forming a distribution space 2530 to be described later is opened at a right end position above the center in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The center accessory 2500 includes a transparent plate-shaped distribution space cover 2525 that closes the open front end side of the space formation recess 2522 in the center base 2520. The distribution space cover 2525, the space formation recess 2522, and the like. Thus, a distribution space 2530 is formed.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 of this example is arranged at the right end position above the center in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and the game ball flowing down along the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side from the center in the horizontal direction can enter. At the same time, the game balls that have entered the distribution space 2530 have a predetermined width that can be discharged to the outside of the right peripheral wall 2503 at the approximate center in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. A guide passage 2540 that guides and guides the game ball flowing down along the right peripheral wall 2503 to the upstream side of the big prize opening 2503 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball in a predetermined direction in the distribution space 2530 And a game unit that is arranged in the distribution space 2530 and is distributed to the left and right by the distribution unit 2550. 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) and two distribution detection sensors 2580 (2580L, 2580R) capable of detecting the game balls that have passed through these gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R), respectively. I have.

  The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the distribution space 2530, and the upper end side opens at a predetermined position on the upper right side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 when viewed from the front, and the lower end side opens at the upper end of the distribution space 2530, and below A distribution approach passage 2545 formed so as to become narrower as it travels toward is further provided, and game balls enter the distribution space 2530 via the distribution entry passage 2545.

  The center accessory 2500 is provided with a distribution suggesting member 2590 that is disposed on each of the left and right sides of the distribution space 2530 and formed in a downward arrow shape. This distribution suggestion member 2590 is partially translucent, and can be decorated with light emission by a decorative substrate disposed on the rear side, depending on the distribution direction of a distribution valve 2551 of a distribution unit 2550 described later. By emitting light, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the distribution direction and the like.

  As described above, the distribution space 2530 in the center accessory 2500 is formed by the space formation recess 2522 whose front side is opened in the center base 2520 and the distribution space cover 2525 that closes the front end of the space formation recess 2522. The rear side can be seen well by the transparent center base 2520 and the distribution space cover 2525.

  The distribution space 2530 includes an upper space 2531 that bulges upward in a semicircular shape, and a lower space 2532 that is disposed below the upper space 2531 and bulges wider in the left-right direction than the upper space 2531. Yes. In the distribution space 2530, the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545 is opened at the center in the left-right direction of the upper space 2531. In addition, the distribution space 2530 is inclined such that the bottom portion 2533 of the lower space 2532 is lower on the right side when viewed from the front, and a discharge port 2534 that opens to the peripheral wall portion 2503 is formed at the right end of the bottom portion 2533 of the lower space 2532. Has been.

  In the lower space 2532 of the distribution space 2530, a left gate 2575L incorporating a distribution detection sensor 2580L and a right gate 2575R incorporating a distribution detection sensor 2580R are disposed apart from each other in the left-right direction. Specifically, two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L and right gate 2575R) each incorporating a distribution detection sensor 2580 (distribution detection sensor 2580L, distribution detection sensor 2580R) are arranged in the upper space 2531 in the distribution unit 2550. On the axis that is distributed to the left and right by the distribution valve 2551 and hangs down (on the axis that is perpendicular to the circumference passing through the center between the inner periphery of the upper space 2531 and the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 2551a of the distribution valve 2551). Respectively.

  The distribution space 2530 has a circular opening 2535 penetrating in the front-rear direction along the inner shape of the upper space 2531 formed in a semicircle on the rear wall that defines the rear end of the distribution space 2530. Is formed. The opening 2535 is closed so that a game ball cannot pass therethrough by a disc-shaped rear wall 2551c of a sorting valve 2551 in a sorting unit 2550 described later.

  The guide passage 2540 in the center accessory 2500 is discharged from the discharge port 2534 of the distribution space 2530 to the outer peripheral side of the peripheral wall portion 2503 and flows down between the inner periphery of the game area 1100 and the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503. The ball is guided to the center side in the left-right direction when viewed from the front at a position below the stage 2510, and from the outlet 2541 (see FIG. 117) opened upstream of the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. 2103 can be discharged.

  In addition, in the passage between the discharge port 2534 of the distribution space 2530 and the guide passage 2540 on the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 in the center accessory 2500, the flow velocity of the game ball is attenuated by coming into contact with the game ball. A plurality of protrusions 2506 are provided.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the distribution approach passage 2545 in the center accessory 2500 is formed to become narrower as it goes downward, and the width on the lower end side is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball. The game balls can be sent to the lower distribution space 2530 in a row. The distribution approach passage 2545 is formed such that the upper end side of the left side wall in front view forming the passage is continuous downward from the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503, whereas the upper end of the right side wall in front view is It is formed so as to extend to the stop portion 1114 of the front component member 1110A that divides the inner periphery of the game area 1100. As a result, all game balls that have been driven between the upper inner periphery of the game area 1100 and the center of the center object 2500 from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the outer periphery of the right peripheral wall 2503 are received in the distribution approach passage 2545 Are sent to the distribution space 2530.

  The distribution unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 is disposed in the upper space 2531 in the distribution space 2530 and rotates to distribute the game balls in a predetermined direction, and the distribution valve 2551. A distribution shaft 2552 extending rearward from the rotation center of the valve 2551 and rotating together with the distribution valve 2551, and a latching piece 2553a at a position fixed to the rear end of the distribution shaft 2552 and deviated from the axis. A stop member 2553, a unit base 2554 that rotatably supports the distribution shaft 2552 between the locking member 2553 and the distribution valve 2551, and is disposed on the rear side of the distribution space 2530; Side and below the distribution shaft 2552 is supported so as to be slidable within a predetermined slide range in the left-right direction. And a sorting slider 2555 having a groove 2555b extending vertically from one end side, a locking piece 2555a of the sorting slider 2555, and a locking piece of the locking member 2553. A connecting spring 2556 that is locked so that an urging force acts in a direction in which both ends approach each other across 2553a, and a transmission pin 2557a that slides in the groove 2555b of the sorting slider 2555 and extends in the front-rear direction. And a link member 2557 that is rotatably supported at a position eccentric from the axis of the transmission pin 2557a, and the link member 2557 is driven to rotate so that the transmission pin 2557a revolves and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554. Minute drive motor 2558.

  As shown in the figure, the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 includes a cylindrical portion 2551a that extends short in the front-rear direction, a valve portion 2551b that protrudes radially from the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion 2551a, and a tip of the valve portion 2551b. And a transparent disk-shaped rear wall portion 2551c attached to the rear side of the cylindrical portion 2551a and the valve portion 2551b with the same diameter. The distribution valve 2551 is configured so that the game ball can be distributed in a predetermined direction by the valve portion 2551b, and the game ball cannot pass through the opening 2535 of the distribution space 2530 by the rear wall 2551c. It can be closed to.

  The locking member 2553 of the sorting unit 2550 is formed such that the locking piece 2553a protrudes rearward from a position eccentric with respect to the axis of the sorting shaft 2552. The locking member 2553 includes a stopper piece 2553b that protrudes in the radial direction from a position rotated about 90 degrees around the axis with respect to the direction in which the locking piece 2553a is eccentric. When assembled, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 has a tip positioned within a rotation restricting portion 2554c formed in a U-shape of the unit base 2554. The rotation range of the distribution shaft 2552 (distribution valve 2551) can be regulated by contacting the circumferential end. Note that the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is formed so as to become thinner toward the tip as shown in the figure.

  The distribution valve 2551 and the locking member 2553 of the distribution unit 2550 are substantially in the same position as the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 when the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 rises substantially vertically. It is fixed to the front end and rear end of the sorting shaft 2552 in a non-rotatable state so as to be vertically suspended.

  The unit base 2554 of the sorting unit 2550 has a cylindrical cylindrical shaft portion 2554a extending in the front-rear direction through which the sorting shaft 2552 is inserted, and is formed below the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction and in the left-right direction. And a slit 2554b for sliding the sorting slider 2555 in the left-right direction. In the unit base 2554, bearing bushes 2559 are inserted into both ends of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a, and the distribution shaft 2552 can be rotatably supported via the bearing bushes 2559. Yes. Further, two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554 are formed at the same height and spaced apart in the left-right direction.

  The unit base 2554 is disposed at a position separated from the axial center of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a (distribution shaft 2552) by a predetermined amount in the radial direction and extends rearward and has a substantially U-shape with the axial center side open. The formed rotation restricting portion 2554c is provided (see FIG. 138 and the like). In the assembled state of the sorting unit 2550, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is inserted and arranged inside the U-shaped portion of the rotation restricting portion 2554c. By restricting the stopper piece 2553b to the end in the circumferential direction around the axis of the distribution shaft 2552, the rotation range of the locking member 2553 (the distribution valve 2551) is regulated via the stopper piece 2553b. Can be done.

  Further, the unit base 2554 includes a cylindrical support cylinder portion 2554d that extends forward and shorter than the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a above the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a. The support cylinder portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 is for rotatably supporting a support pin 2566 described later by a bearing bush 2559 inserted at both ends. The unit base 2554 of the distribution unit 2550 is attached to the rear side of the center base 2520.

  The sorting slider 2555 of the sorting unit 2550 includes a strip-like main body 2555c extending from the center in the vertical direction of the groove 2555b extending in the vertical direction to one side in the left-right direction (left side in front view). A locking piece 2555a extends rearward from a predetermined position of 2555c. The sorting slider 2555 includes a cylindrical protrusion 2555d that protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 2555c extending in the left-right direction and is inserted into the two slits 2554b in the unit base 2554 in a slidable state. . The sorting slider 2555 is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction within a predetermined sliding range guided by the slit 2554b by inserting the two protrusions 2555d into the two slits 2554b of the unit base 2554, respectively. It has become.

  The two projections 2555d of the sorting slider 2555 extend through the slit 2554b to the front side of the unit base 2554, and the tips of the projections 2555d extending to the front surface of the unit base 2554 are connected to each other. By attaching the receiving plate 2560 so as to be connected, it is prevented from coming out of the slit 2554b.

  In addition, the sorting slider 2555 includes a plate-shaped detection piece 2555e extending downward from a lower surface between the locking piece 2555a and the groove 2555b in the main body 2555c, and a groove sandwiching the locking piece 2555a in the main body 2555c. Rack gear 2555f formed on the upper surface opposite to 2555b. The detection piece 2555e of the distribution slider 2555 is detected by a distribution valve position detection sensor 2561 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554. By detecting the detection piece 2555e, the detection piece 2555e of the distribution slider 2555 is detected. The direction in which the game ball can be distributed by the distribution valve 2551 can be detected via the slide position. Further, the rack gear 2555f of the sorting slider 2555 is engaged with a first gear portion 2562a of a first transmission gear 2562, which will be described later. The movable lower decorative body 2567 can be transmitted and moved.

  The distribution unit 2550 is rotatably supported at a position above the distribution slider 2555 on the rear side of the unit base 2554, and has a fan-shaped first gear portion 2562a that meshes with the rack gear 2555f of the distribution slider 2555, and A unit base that meshes with a first transmission gear 2562 having a spur gear-like second gear portion 2562b that is smaller in diameter than the first gear portion 2562a and is integrally rotatable, and a second gear portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 2563 that is rotatably supported on the rear side of 2554, a driven gear portion 2564a meshing with the second transmission gear 2563, and a driven gear portion 2564a are formed on the outer periphery and in the unit base 2554 Cylindrical insertion portion 2564b and insertion portion 2564b inserted rotatably on the outer periphery of the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a. An operating piece 2564c that extends long in the shape of a plate upward in the radial direction, a transmission slit 2564d that is formed at the tip of the operating piece 2564c, penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the radial direction, and extends downward from the insertion portion 2564b in the radial direction. And a driven transmission member 2564 having two attachment portions 2564e extending to the surface.

  Further, the sorting unit 2550 is slidably inserted into the transmission slit 2564d of the driven transmission member 2564 and extended rearward and is disposed at different positions above the sliding pin 2565a and rearward. A distributed movable upper decoration body 2565 having an extended shaft fixing portion 2565b, which is arranged between the distribution valve 2551 and the unit base 2554 and three-dimensionally imitating a part of a predetermined character, A support pin 2566 that is fixed to the shaft fixing portion 2565b of the decorative body 2565, is inserted into the support tube portion 2554d of the unit base 2554, and is rotatably supported via the bearing bush 2559. Arranged below the decorative body 2565 and a mounting portion 2564e of the rear follower transmission member 2564 is attached to the predetermined character. And a, a sterically mimic the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 a site different from the sorting movable on decorative body 2565.

  Further, the distribution unit 2550 has a plurality of openings 2568a through which the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a and the support tube portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 can pass, and the outer shape is a predetermined three-dimensional shape and a part thereof is translucent. A sorting back decoration body 2568 which is formed on the front side of the unit base 2554 behind the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 and the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567, and the sorting back decoration body. 2568 and a unit base 2554, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a sorting decoration board 2569 for illuminating and decorating the sorting back decoration 2568, and a sorting drive attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2554 Motor 2558, distribution valve position detection sensor 2561, and distribution relaying connection between distribution detection sensor 2580 and panel relay board 3040 Includes a relay board 2570, the.

  The first transmission gear 2562 and the second transmission gear 2563 of the sorting unit 2550 are rotatably supported by a columnar shaft portion extending rearward from the rear surface of the unit base 2554, and the first transmission gear 2562. The second gear portion 2562b and the second transmission gear 2563 are accommodated in a recess recessed forward from the rear surface side of the unit base 2554. In the concave portion of the unit base 2554 that accommodates the second transmission gear 2563 and the like, an opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed. To be exposed. The second transmission gear 2563 meshes with the driven gear portion 2564a of the driven transmission member 2564 that is rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 2554a at a portion exposed to the front side of the unit base 2554.

  In the sorting unit 2550, the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 is three-dimensionally modeled on the head of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567. Is three-dimensionally imitating the same character's arm as the distributed movable upper decoration body 2565. In addition, as shown in the figure, the distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 is shaped in a state where the arm has a heel. Further, the sorting back decoration 2568 of the sorting unit 2550 has a relief shape on the front side except for the head and arms of the same character as the sorting movable upper decoration 2565 and the sorting movable lower decoration 2567. Is formed. Accordingly, when the sorting unit 2550 is assembled and viewed from the front, the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565, the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567, and the sorting back decoration body 2568 are used to display a predetermined character with a heel. A whole body image is formed, and a whole body image of a predetermined character can be visually recognized from the player side through a transparent center base 2520 and a distribution space cover 2525.

  Next, the movement of the sorting unit 2550 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. First, the movement of the distribution valve 2551 disposed in the distribution space 2530 will be described. When the link member 2557 is driven to rotate by driving the distribution drive motor 2558, the transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 revolves around the rotation axis of the distribution drive motor 2558 with a predetermined radius. The transmission pin 2557a of the link member 2557 is slidably inserted into the groove 2555b extending in the vertical direction of the sorting slider 2555 supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and the transmission pin 2557a revolves. Since the relative positions of the transmission pin 2557a in the vertical and horizontal directions change, the revolution of the transmission pin 2557a causes the transmission pin 2557a to slide up and down in the groove 2555b of the distribution slider 2555, and at the same time the distribution slider 2555 It is guided by the slit 2554b of 2554 and slides in the left-right direction.

  When the sorting slider 2555 slides in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2555a of the sorting slider 2555 also slides in the left-right direction so that it slides in the left-right direction within the same range as the revolution diameter of the transmission pin 2557a. It has become. The locking piece 2555a of the sorting slider 2555 is formed so that the approximate center of the sliding range in the left-right direction of the locking piece 2555a is located on a vertical line passing through the axis of the sorting shaft 2552. By sliding the slider 2555 in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2555a moves to the left or right side over a vertical line passing through the axis of the sorting shaft 2552.

  In this sorting unit 2550, the lower end side of the connecting spring 2556 is locked to the locking piece 2555 a of the sorting slider 2555, and the upper end of the connecting spring 2556 is fixed to the rear end of the sorting shaft 2552. When the sorting slider 2555 (locking piece 2555a) slides in the left-right direction, the locking piece 2553a of the locking member 2553 is moved to the sorting member 2553 via the connecting spring 2556. The slider 2555 is pulled in the sliding direction, and the locking member 2553 (distribution shaft 2552) is rotated. Thus, the distribution valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the distribution shaft 2552 is also rotated by driving the distribution drive motor 2558.

  In the allocating unit 2550, the locking member 2553 and the allocating slider 2555 are elastically connected by a connecting spring 2556. In addition, even when trying to be sandwiched between the inner wall of the distribution space 2530 and the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551, the valve portion 2551b can be rotated in the direction of escaping from the game ball by the expansion and contraction of the connecting spring 2556. ing. Accordingly, even when the distribution valve 2551 is rotating and the game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 by the valve portion 2551b, depending on the timing at which the game ball flows down, the connection spring 2556 In addition to pushing the valve portion 2551b against the urging force and allowing the game ball to enter the distribution space 2530, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being pinched at the entrance of the distribution space 2530, It is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging.

  In this example, when the sorting slider 2555 is slid leftward in the rear view, the sorting shaft 2552 (the sorting valve 2551) rotates counterclockwise in the rear view (FIG. 138 (a)). The game balls can be distributed in the left direction of the front view by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530 (see FIG. 136 (a)). On the other hand, when the sorting slider 2555 is slid rightward in the rear view, the sorting shaft 2552 (the sorting valve 2551) rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view (see FIG. 138 (b)). The game balls can be distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530 (see FIG. 136 (b)). Further, in this example, when the sorting slider 2555 is slid to the slide end in the right direction in the rear view, the detection piece 2555e of the sorting slider 2555 is detected by the sorting valve position detection sensor 2561. .

  Incidentally, the locking member 2553 fixed to the rear end of the distribution shaft 2552 is provided with a stopper piece 2553b that can come into contact with the rotation restricting portion 2554c formed on the rear surface of the unit base 2554. The stopper piece 2553b abuts on the circumferential end of the rotation restricting portion 2554c formed in a substantially U shape so that the rotation range of the distribution shaft 2552 (the distribution valve 2551) can be restricted. It has become. Thereby, even if the game ball comes into contact with the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551, the valve portion 2551b can be prevented from rotating downward, and the distribution valve 2551 can securely move the game ball in a predetermined direction. Can be sorted. Further, as shown in the drawing, the stopper piece 2553b of the locking member 2553 is formed so as to become thinner toward the tip, and can exert an elastic force when coming into contact with the rotation restricting portion 2554c. The impact generated by the game ball coming into contact with the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 can be mitigated by the elastic force of the stopper piece 2553b, and the valve portion 2551b and the like can be prevented from being damaged by the impact. It is like that.

  Next, the movement of the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 and the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 arranged on the rear side of the sorting space 2530 will be described. As described above, the distribution unit 2550 can slide the distribution slider 2555 in the left-right direction by rotating the distribution drive motor 2558. In the sorting unit 2550 of this example, the sorting slider 2555 is provided with a rack gear 2555f on the tip side of the locking piece 2555a, and the first gear portion meshed with the rack gear 2555f by sliding the sorting slider 2555 in the left-right direction. A first transmission gear 2562 having 2562a is configured to rotate.

  When the first transmission gear 2562 rotates, the second transmission gear 2563 meshed with the second gear portion 2562b of the first transmission gear 2562 rotates in the opposite direction, and further, the driven gear meshed with the second transmission gear 25563. A driven transmission member 2564 having a portion 2564 a rotates in the same direction as the first transmission gear 252. The follower transmission member 2564 is provided with a lower movable movable decoration body 2567 on the front side, and the lower movable move decoration body 2567 is rotated in the same direction as the follower transmission member 2564 and the first transmission gear 2562. It has become.

  On the other hand, the elongated transmission slit 2564d extending in the radial direction in the driven transmission member 2564 is movable and supported by a support cylinder portion 2554d of the unit base 2554 so as to be rotatable via a support pin 2566. A slide pin 2565a extending long rearward in the upper decorative body 2565 is slidably inserted. The sliding pin 2565a of the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 is disposed between the rotation axis of the driven transmission member 2564 and the rotation axis of the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, and the driven transmission member 2564. Is rotated with the transmission slit 2564d, the sorting movable upper decorative body 2565 is rotated in the opposite direction to the driven transmission member 2564 via the support pin 2566 inserted into the transmission slit 2564d.

  Accordingly, when the sorting drive motor 2558 of the sorting unit 2550 is rotationally driven and the sorting slider 2555 is slid in the left-right direction, the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 and the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 are moved in different directions. It can be rotated. As a result, when viewed from the front, the predetermined character can show the player a movement (movable effect) that shakes the heel while tilting his head.

  In this example, when the sorting slider 2555 is slid to the left in the rear view, the sorting movable upper decorative body 2565 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view and the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 is on the back. It rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed (see FIG. 139 (a)). Further, when the sorting slider 2555 is slid to the right in the rear view, the sorting movable upper decorative body 2565 rotates counterclockwise in the rear view and the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 is clocked in the rear view. It is designed to rotate in the direction of rotation (see FIG. 139 (b)).

  Further, in the state where the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game ball to the left in the front view, the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 rises substantially straight in the distribution unit 2550 of the center accessory 2500. And the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 is in a state where its heel is positioned on the rear side of the left sorting sensor 2580L (see FIG. 136 (a)). On the other hand, in a state where the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game ball to the right in front view, the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 is inclined to the right, and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 is The hook is located on the rear side of the right distribution detection sensor 2580R (see FIG. 136 (b)). Thereby, not only the direction of the rotation position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551, but also the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the cage of the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 arranged on the rear side of the distribution space 2530. The player can recognize the game ball, and the player can have the illusion that the game ball is distributed by the cage of the movable movable decoration 2567. .

  By the way, when the distribution valve 2551 is in the form shown in FIG. 136 (b), the game balls are distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551. Thus, when the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, such a game ball will not immediately pass through the right gate 2575R and be detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. An irregular delay unit 2585 is provided between the distribution unit 2550 and the distribution detection sensor 2580R (see FIGS. 136, 140, and 137). The irregular delay unit 2585 does not have a constant time until the game ball distributed rightward by the distribution valve 2551 passes the right gate 2575R, that is, until the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects the game ball. Thus, the delay is irregular.

  The irregular delay unit 2585 includes an upper irregular delay creating means 2586 and a lower irregular delay creating means 2587. The upper irregular delay producing means 2586 and the lower irregular delay producing means 2587 have holes 2586a and 2587a each having a size through which a game ball can pass, as can be seen from FIG. Further, the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 is configured such that a game ball can roll around the hole 2587a.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 136 and 140, the axes passing through the centers of the holes 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 and the holes 2587a of the lower irregular delay producing means 2587 are both parallel to each other. Although there is, it is not on the same axis but is shifted in the horizontal direction. As described above, the axial center of the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 and the axial center of the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay producing means 2587 are deviated from each other. Even if the played game ball passes through the upper irregular delay creation means 2586, it does not immediately pass through the lower irregular delay creation means 2587, but rolls around the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay creation means 2587. Thereafter, when the game ball falls from the hole 2587a, the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R.

  Furthermore, the path from which the game balls distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 reach the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 is large enough to allow the game balls to flow down one by one, As can be seen from FIG. 140, the path of the game ball distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 and the axis of the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 are shifted. When the ball passes through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586, the movement of the game ball can be irregular. In this way, the game balls distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 are irregularly delayed at different timings each time they are distributed in the right direction in the front view and pass through the right gate 2575R (distribution detection). Sensor 2580R).

  Further, the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 is provided with an irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 for detecting that a game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586. As a result, when the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, the game ball still rolls around the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 and thus still passes through the right gate 2575R. Even if it is not detected (even if it is not detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), in any case, this game ball passes through the right gate 2575R and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (that is, the front right by the distribution valve 2551). It is possible to detect in advance that the game balls have been distributed in the direction.

  Next, the movement of the game ball by the distribution unit 2550 in the distribution space 2530 in the center accessory 2500 will be described. The game balls are placed in the game space 1100 so that the game balls enter the distribution space 2530 between the center of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500 from the center in the left-right direction in the front view to the upper right side and the inner periphery of the game region 1100. It can be made to enter through the sorting entry passage 2545 by being driven in. A rotatable distribution valve 2551 having a valve portion 2551b is disposed above the distribution space 2530 where the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545 is open, and has a constant cycle (for example, 3 seconds to 10 seconds). The direction of distribution by the valve portion 2551b is changed by repeating rotation and stop at intervals).

  In the center accessory 2500, when the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 rises substantially vertically (see FIG. 114 and the like), the valve portion 2551b is positioned at the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545. The game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 from the distribution entry passage 2545. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the distribution valve 2511 in this state, the game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 and is temporarily stopped at the lower end of the distribution entry passage 2545. .

  The game balls distributed in either the left or right direction by the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 pass through the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) arranged immediately below the distributed flow path. This is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580 (the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the distribution detection sensor 2589R), and it can be detected in which direction the game balls are actually distributed. As described above, when the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, the right gate 2575R is immediately distributed to the right in the front view by the irregular delay unit 258 as described above. Instead of passing through the right gate 2575R after being delayed by a different time each time and detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580. When the game ball is distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551, the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 detects the right in the front view before the passage through the right gate 2575R (detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580). It is possible to detect that the direction has been distributed.

  In this example, the two gates 2575 (the left gate 2575 and the right gate 2575R) are arranged at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the lower space 2532 in the distribution space 2530 from the center in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. Since they are spaced apart from each other, spaces are formed between the two gates 2575 (between the left gate 2575 and the right gate 2575R) and outside the two gates 2575 in the left-right direction. It has become a state. Accordingly, when the game ball cannot pass through the gate 2575 for some reason, the game ball can flow down to the bottom portion 2533 through the side of the gate 2575 and be discharged from the discharge port 2534, and the inside of the distribution space 2530. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stagnated and causing a ball clogging.

  In this example, it is detected which game ball has passed through two gates 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R) arranged on the left and right, and is executed according to the passage destination as will be described later. Since the method for determining the mode of the jackpot game is different (for example, the expected value of the prize ball amount is the same when detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and when detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, Since the winning ball amount to be paid out is determined by lottery in any one of the combinations of a plurality of jackpot game modes), the movement (position) of the valve portion 2551b of the distribution valve 2551 and the desired privilege Based on the position of the gate 2575 to be given, the game ball can be passed to a desired gate 2575 by measuring the timing of the game ball to be driven. So more entertaining work is interest in the game has become possible to suppress deterioration.

  Furthermore, in this example, when the distribution detection sensor 2580L detects that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, and when the distribution detection sensor 2580R detects that the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R. In any case, the mode of the jackpot game is determined by lottery (the jackpot game mode determination lottery in step S607 described later). At this time, the game ball distributed to the right in the front view by the distribution valve 2551 does not immediately pass through the right gate 2575R (immediately without being detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), and such detection is performed by the irregular delay unit. Randomly delayed by 2585. Thereby, prior to the jackpot game mode determination lottery, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the game ball rolling around the hole 2587a of the lower irregular delay creation means 2587, and to raise the player's mood. .

  Further, in this example, since the discharge port 2534 for discharging the game ball from the distribution space 2530 is disposed at the lower right corner of the distribution space 2530 in front view, it is distributed leftward by the distribution valve 2551. The time spent staying in the distribution space 2530 is different between the game balls distributed to the right and the game balls distributed to the right. Therefore, in the two game balls that are continuously shot into the game area 1100, the game ball to be hit first is distributed to the left by the distribution valve 2511, and the game ball to be shot later is to the right by the distribution valve 2511. When two game balls are struck at such a timing that they can be distributed, the game spheres that are struck later in the distribution space 2530 will follow the game spheres that have been struck first, and the two game spheres are substantially lined up. Can be discharged from the discharge port 2534 (see FIG. 140). As a result, the game balls discharged side by side from the distribution space 2530 are released in a state of being arranged in the upstream side of the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100, so The game balls can be received, and more game balls can be received in the big prize opening 2103.

  Specifically, for example, in a jackpot game or the like in which the big prize opening 2103 can be received, the big prize opening 2103 is opened or closed depending on the elapsed time of the open state or the number of game balls received, When a predetermined number of game balls are received in time, the special winning opening 2103 is closed. In this big prize opening 2103, there is a time lag from when the game ball passes through the opening of the big prize opening 2103 until it is detected by the count sensor 2122. If game balls can enter the big prize opening 2103, it is possible to win more than a predetermined number of game balls. However, in the distribution of normal game balls, the interval between game balls is not reduced so much. It was difficult to enter the game balls. However, as described above, since the game balls can be released to the side of the big prize opening 2103 with the distribution space 2530 and the distribution valve 2551 being substantially aligned, two games are played at the moment when the big prize opening 2103 is closed. It is possible to allow the ball to enter the big winning opening 2103, and it is possible to win more game balls than a predetermined number.

  Although detailed description of the center accessory 2500 is omitted, a decorative member that is formed in a predetermined shape and decorates the center accessory 2500 at an appropriate position, or a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko 1 is three-dimensionally displayed. In addition to the imitated character body, etc., a decoration member and a decoration board having a plurality of LEDs on the rear side of the character body are provided, so that the decoration member can be appropriately decorated with light emission. . In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the decorative member that decorates the rear side of the stage 2510 is opaque, and the back side effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side is visible from the player side in a normal state. There is no such thing.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 of this example has a shape in which the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2503 on the right side of the approximate center in the left-right direction in front view is substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 (the inner periphery of the front component member 1110A). In the state where the game panel 1200 is attached to the panel plate 1210, a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed along the outer periphery of the right peripheral wall 2503 of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to easily hit the game ball into the distribution space 2530 through the distribution approach passage 2545 by making a right strike, and at a high probability to the big prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100. Can be accepted. Further, when the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel board 1210, a region having a predetermined width is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500 between the inner periphery of the game region 1100. .

  Further, in this example, the irregular delay unit 2585 is provided only in front of the right gate 2575R, but it is not necessarily provided only in front of the right gate 2575R, and is provided in front of the left gate 2575L. It is also possible to provide them in front of both the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R, or not to provide them in front of either gate.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 to 144. 141 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit that is disassembled from the back unit, and FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit that is disassembled from the back unit. is there.

  The back unit 3000 of this example is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), the front side is opened, and the rear wall 3010a has an opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces. The formed back box 3010, the back front decoration unit 3100 disposed near the front end in the back box 3010, the back effect unit 3200 disposed above the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back box 3010 The back bottom rendering unit 3400 disposed below the opening 3010b and the back bottom right rendering unit disposed between the back bottom rendering unit 3400 and the back front decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the back box 3010. 3600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a decorative seal 3030 that is attached to the lower edge of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010 and the front surfaces of both the left and right edges, and a back surface that is lower than the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. A panel relay board 3040 attached to the lower right corner of the view, a lamp driving board 3041 attached on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010 on the left side of the opening 3010b, and the lamp driving board 3041 covered from the rear side. A substrate cover 3042 attached to the rear surface and a motor drive substrate 3045 (see FIG. 194) supported rotatably inside an axis extending in the left-right direction at positions on both sides of the lower side of the opening 3010b in the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. ) Of a horizontally long motor drive board box 3043 and a back box 3010 It includes a shield plate 3044 consisting mounted on the side upper metal plate, a.

  The panel relay board 3040 in the back unit 3000 includes a connection between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4010, a general winning opening sensor 2123, a count sensor 2122, a gate sensor 2302, This relay is used to relay the connection with the start-up solenoid 2114, the attacker solenoid 2121 and the like.

  The lamp driving board 3041 in the back unit 3000 is based on control signals (commands) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, and 430 provided on the door frame 5. , 432, etc., and each decoration board 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, 3690, 3692, etc. provided in the game board 4 This is for controlling the light emission of the LED.

  Further, the motor drive board 3045 in the back unit 3000 is based on a control signal (command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 and each drive motor provided in the game board 4 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, 3622, 3640, 3676 and the like, and solenoids 3624, 3660 and the like are controlled.

  The back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 has a box shape with the front side opened, and a substantially rectangular opening 3010b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall 3010a. The opening 3010b of the back box 3010 is formed smaller than the front view outline of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The back 3010 is formed with a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c extending outward from the outer periphery of the front end, and the fixing portion 3010c is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220). Although detailed description is omitted, the back box 3010 is formed with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the units 3100, 3200, 3400, 3600, boards and the like.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d that is recessed in the outer periphery of the opening 3010b on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a so as to have a size substantially the same as the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and a rear view of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. The liquid crystal fixing portion 3010e formed on the left side and into which the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted, and the liquid crystal fixing hole 3010e are formed on the opposite side (right side in the rear view) of the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d. And a lock mechanism attaching portion 3010f to which the is attached. The back box 3010 is configured such that the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d from the rear side, and the rear surface in the liquid crystal insertion portion frame 3010d on the rear wall 3010a is a flat surface. The front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 comes into contact.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a lock mechanism 3050 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the rear surface of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010. The lock mechanism 3050 of this example is attached to the lock mechanism attachment portion 3010f of the back box 3010 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. When the lock mechanism 3050 is slid upward, the fixing piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is moved backward. When an insertion port that can be inserted from the side is opened and the fixing piece 1902 is inserted from the insertion port and the lock mechanism 3050 is slid upward, the rear end of the insertion port is closed and the fixing piece 1902 cannot be removed. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked.

[2-7. Front decoration unit]
Subsequently, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 147. FIG. 145 (a) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 145 (b) is a perspective view of the back front decorative unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the front decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the rear decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The back decorative unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 of this example has a predetermined logo formed on the front side in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and the overall shape of the front view is substantially L-shaped. The front end portion in the back box 3010 is attached along the left side and the lower side in front view. The front decoration unit 3100 can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel 1210 of the game panel 1200, and mainly decorates the rear side of the game area 1100 in which the obstacle nails are planted. doing.

  This back front decoration unit 3100 is arranged in the back box 3010 on the left side of the front opening 3010b and extends in the vertical direction, and more than the back front left decoration unit 3110 and the opening 3010b in the back front left decoration unit 3110 and the back box 3010. A back front lower decoration unit 3120 disposed on the lower side and extending in the left-right direction, and a function display unit 1180 attached to the lower front surface of the back front left decoration unit 3110 are provided. The back front left decorative unit 3110 and the back front lower decorative unit 3120 are logo lens members formed so that a predetermined logo conforming to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 is three-dimensionally shaped and partially translucent. 3111, 3121, and a left unit base 3112 and a lower unit base 3122 that support the rear side of the logo lens members 3111, 3121 and are attached to the back box 3010.

  The back front left decorative unit 3110 is disposed between the upper part of the logo lens member 3121 and the left unit base 3112 and has a front back left top decorative board 3113 mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a back front left top decorative board 3113 below. The front left middle decorative board 3114 arranged between the logo lens member 3121 and the left unit base 3112 on the side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and the logo lens member 3121 under the back front left middle decorative board 3114 And a front left decorative substrate 3115 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof. The back front left decoration unit 3110 appropriately lights up the LEDs mounted on the back front left top decorative board 3113, the back front left middle decorative board 3114, and the back front left decorative board 3115, thereby illuminating the logo lens member 3121. It can be made to.

  The front lower decorative unit 3120 is arranged between the logo lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 on the left side from the approximate center in the left-right direction, and has a front lower lower decorative substrate 3123 mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, A back front lower right decorative board 3124 is disposed between the lens member 3121 and the lower unit base 3122 on the right side from the approximate center in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. The back front lower decoration unit 3120 can light up and decorate the logo lens member 3121 by appropriately causing the LEDs mounted on the back front lower left decorative board 3123 and the back front lower right decorative board 3124 to emit light. ing.

  The lower unit base 3122 of the lower front lower decorative unit 3120 receives the game ball received at the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000 and guided and released from the guide path 2115a of the solenoid cover 2115 on the front side. A first passage 3122a that guides downward and a second passage 3122b that receives the game ball received in the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 and discharged from the discharge port 2115b of the solenoid cover 2115, and guides it downward. A ball receiving portion 3122c for receiving a game ball received from the general winning member 2113 and released from the collar portion 2113a of the general receiving member 2113, and a general winning port 2201 of the front side unit 2200, which is received by the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. Receiving game balls released from And a general passage 3122d for guiding downward Te.

  In addition, the back front lower decoration unit 3120 detects a game ball circulating in the first passage 3122a, thereby detecting the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port 2101; A second start port sensor 3132 for detecting the reception of the game ball to the second start port 2102 by detecting the game ball circulating in the 3122b, the game ball received by the ball receiving portion 3122c, and the general passage 3122d And a general winning opening sensor 3233 that detects the acceptance of the gaming balls to the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 by detecting the game balls that circulate. The game balls received by the ball receiving unit 3122c and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3133 are discharged downward through the general winning opening sensor 3133.

  Further, the front lower decorative unit 3120 further includes a magnetic detection sensor 3134 that is attached to the lower unit base 3122 at a position corresponding to the rear side of the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 and can detect magnetism. The magnetism detection sensor 3134 can detect magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect fraud using a magnet or the like. In this example, a magnetic detection sensor 3134 is also provided at a position on the upper rear side of the function display unit 1180 in the front left decorative unit 3110, and the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and the center accessory 2500 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts by detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the warp inlet 2504.

  The front lower decoration unit 3120 is attached to the front side of the lower unit base 3122 and appropriately closes the front side of the first passage 3122a, the second passage 3122b, and the general passage 3122d to prevent the game ball from falling off. A passage cover 3125 is provided.

  The function display unit 1180 in the back front decoration unit 3100 includes a shallow box-shaped function display front cover having a plurality of through holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, the outer shape of which is shaped like a building, and the rear side being released. A function display board 1191 inserted from the rear side into the function display front cover and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front face; a function display back cover that covers the rear face of the function display board 1191 and is attached to the rear side of the function display front cover; It has. Each LED mounted on the function display board 1191 faces the player side through each through hole of the function display front cover 3141.

  Each LED mounted on the front surface of the function display board 1191 in the function display unit 1180 is similar to the above, the game state display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special display. A symbol display 1186, a second special symbol storage display 1187, a normal symbol storage display 1188, a normal symbol display 1189, and a round display 1190 are provided.

  Specifically, the game status indicator 1183 is composed of one LED, and is for displaying a game status that changes when a game ball is driven into the game area 1100. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 is composed of two LEDs and is used for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of the game ball to the first start port 2101. The first special symbol indicator 1185 is composed of eight LEDs, and is used for displaying the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball to the first start port 2101 as the first special symbol. Further, the second special symbol display 1186 is configured to display a second special lottery result, which is composed of eight LEDs, and is selected by receiving a game ball into the second starting port 2102 as a second special symbol. The second special symbol memory display 1187 is composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of game balls to the second starting port 2102.

  Further, the normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs and displays the number of reserves relating to the passage of the gate portion 2301 by the game ball. Further, the normal symbol display 1189 is for displaying a normal lottery result which is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2301 as a normal symbol. Further, the round indicator 1190 is composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the grand prize winning opening 2103 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit”. It is.

[2-8. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 162. FIG. 148 is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the back effect unit in the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 151 is an exploded perspective view of the main production unit as seen from the front. FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the back center unit in the back effect unit as seen from the front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the back center unit in the back effect unit as seen from the back, and FIG. FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the upper center unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the back center unit as seen from the back of the warrior. Moreover, FIG. 156 is explanatory drawing which shows removal | desorption of the 2nd raising / lowering decoration body in a back center unit. Further, FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the back side side unit in the back side production unit as seen from the front and FIG. 158 is an exploded perspective view of the back side side unit in the back effect unit as seen from the back. FIG. FIG. 159 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back center unit in the back effect unit, FIG. 160 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back center unit following FIG. 159, and FIG. It is a front view explaining the motion of the back center unit following. Further, FIG. 162 is a front view for explaining the movement of the back side unit in the back effect unit.

  The back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 of this embodiment is attached above the opening 3010b between the front effect unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and the rear wall 3010a of the back box 3010. This back effect unit 3200 includes a back center unit 3210 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a back side unit 3300 disposed on the left and right sides of the back center unit 3210, a back center unit 3210, A back lens member 3202 attached so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the back side unit 3300.

  Although the details will be described later, the back effect unit 3200 can be slid (lifted) to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the back center unit 3210 and can display a predetermined effect image. A liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided.

  First, the back center unit 3210 in the back effect unit 3200 will be described. The back center unit 3210 of this example is supported so as to be separated in the left-right direction and to extend in the up-down direction on the front side of the back center center base 3212 and the back center center 3212 attached at a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A pair of cylindrical first shafts 3214, a plate-like main body portion 3216a supported by the pair of first shafts 3214 so as to be movable up and down, an attachment portion 3216b extending forward from both left and right ends of the main body portion 3216a, and a rear surface And a first slide base 3216 having a rack gear 3216c extending in the vertical direction at both left and right ends.

  Further, the back upper center unit 3210 is attached to the attachment portion 3216b of the first slide base 3216, and a first lifting decorative body 3218 that three-dimensionally imitates a part of the face (above the upper chin) of a predetermined character, A pair of pinion gears 3220 disposed on the rear side of the back center base 3212 and meshed with the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216, and supported so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction on the back side of the back center base 3212. , A pair of transmission gears 3222 that mesh with each pinion gear 3220, a connection shaft 3224 that couples the transmission gears 3222 so as to rotate together, and a drive gear 3226 that meshes with one (right side of the front view) transmission gear 3222. And a back first drive motor 3228 for rotating the drive gear 3226.

  The back center unit 3210 includes a center cover 3230 that is attached to the rear side of the back center base 3212. A pair of pinion gears 3220 and a connecting shaft 3224 are rotatably supported by the center cover 3230. In addition, a back upper first drive motor 3228 is attached to the rear surface of the back upper center cover 3230 via a motor bracket 3232.

  Further, the back center unit 3210 is connected to the back second drive motor 3234 attached to the rear surface of the center cover 3230 so that the rotation shaft protrudes from the front surface of the center cover 3230, and to the rotation shaft of the back second drive motor 3234 A fixed drive gear 3236, a driven gear portion 3238a meshing with the drive gear 3236, a transmission gear portion 3238b that rotates integrally with the driven gear portion 3238a and has a diameter larger than that of the driven gear portion 3238a and gear teeth arranged on the outer periphery. And a first connecting pin 3238c protruding forward from a position slightly inward of the transmission gear portion 3238b, around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the center cover 3230 between the center cover 3230 and the back upper center base 3212. First gear member 3238 that is rotatably supported and transmission of first gear member 3238 An operating gear portion 3240a that meshes with the inner portion 3238b and has the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3238b and that has a plurality of gear teeth arranged in the circumferential direction. A second gear member 3240 having a second connecting pin 3240b protruding forward from a position of the same radius and rotatably supported by the center cover 3230.

  The first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 in the back center unit 3210 are rotatably supported at substantially the same height, and the transmission gear is located at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the back center unit 3210. The portion 3238b and the operating gear portion 3240a are arranged and supported by the center cover 3230 so as to mesh with each other. In addition, the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 are such that the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b are perpendicular to the centers of the rotation centers of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, respectively. The transmission gear portion 3238b and the operating gear portion 3240a are meshed with each other so as to be symmetric with respect to the line.

  Further, the back upper center unit 3210 includes a first connecting pin 3238c and a second connecting pin 3240b of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 that are slidably inserted and penetrated in the front-rear direction and extended in the left-right direction. A drive slider 3242 having a pair of slits 3242a and supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the back center base 3212 and the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240, and the left and right ends of the drive slide 3242 And a slide support member 3244 that is slidably supported in cooperation with the back center center base 3212.

  Further, the back center unit 3210 is separated in the left-right direction at a position in front of the first slide base 3216 supported by the first shaft 3214 so as to be movable up and down, and extends in the up-down direction. A pair of second shafts 3246 supported in such a manner, a plate-like second slide base 3248 supported by the pair of second shafts 3246 so as to be movable up and down, and detachably supported on the front side of the second slide base 3248. A second elevating decorative body 3250 which is arranged on the rear side of the first elevating decorative body 3218 and which three-dimensionally simulates different parts (lower jaws) in the face of the same character as the first elevating decorative body 3218, and a second elevating decorative body 3218 A second liquid crystal display device 3252 attached to the decorative body 3250 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image toward the front side. The upper center decoration member 3254 which is attached to the upper front center of the rear upper center base 3212 and imitates a rotating lamp, and is attached to the upper front surface of the upper upper center base 3212 and supports the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246. And a shaft presser 3256 to be used.

  Further, the back center unit 3210 has a plurality of gear teeth arranged on the outer periphery of the fan-shaped front end, meshes with the driven gear portion 3238a of the first gear member 3238, and is rotatable to a predetermined position on the front surface of the center cover 3230. An assist gear 3258 that is supported, and an assist spring 3260 that biases the assist gear 3258 to rotate in a direction in which the drive slider 3242 moves up via the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 are provided. .

  The back center center 3212 in the back center unit 3210 has a shaft holding portion 3212a that holds the lower ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 on the front surface side, and the upper ends of the first shaft 3214 and the second shaft 3246 are shaft pressers. The shaft support portion 3212b to which the shaft presser 3256 is attached in cooperation with the support 3256 and the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 supported by the first shaft 3214 so as to be movable up and down is disposed in the front-rear direction. An opening 3212c that penetrates and a notch 3212d that is disposed in the center in the left-right direction and is cut out in a rectangular shape from the lower end upward are provided.

  The back center base 3212 is configured such that the rack gear 3216c of the first slide base 3216 faces rearward from the opening 3212c, and the pinion gear 3220 meshes with the rack gear 3216c through the opening 3212c. Further, the back center center base 3212 is attached to a lift slider 3242 disposed on the rear side through the notch 3212d and a second slide base 3248 disposed on the front side and supported by the second shaft 3246 so as to be movable up and down. ing.

  The first slide base 3216 in the back center unit 3210 includes a detection piece 3216d extending upward from the upper end of the main body 3216a, in addition to the main body 3216a, the attachment 3216b, and the rack gear 3216c. The detection piece 3216d of the first slide base 3216 is detected by a first lift detection sensor 3262 attached to the back center base 3212, so that the lift position of the first slide base 3216 (first lift decorative body 3218) is increased. (Rising position) can be detected.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first elevating decorative body 3218 in the back center unit 3210 is formed so that a member forming the front side has translucency, and a plurality of LEDs are formed on the front side. A mounted front and back middle decorative board is provided. Thereby, the first elevating decorative body can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs on the back, front, and front decorative boards.

  Further, the lifting slider 3242 in the back center unit 3210 includes a detection piece 3242b extending upward from a predetermined position on the upper side, and the detection piece 3242b is attached to a predetermined position on the back upper center base 3212. By being detected by the lift detection sensor 3264, the lift position (lift position) of the lift slider 3242 (second lift decorative body 3254) can be detected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 156, the second slide base 3248 in the back center unit 3210 includes plate-shaped fixing pieces 3248a extending from the left and right ends outward in the left-right direction and spaced apart in the vertical direction. A fixing hole 3248b formed substantially in the lower center of the direction and penetrating in the vertical direction; and a locking hole 3248c disposed adjacent to the fixing hole 3248b and penetrating in the front-rear direction. In the second slide base 3248, four fixed pieces 3248a are inserted into the fixed grooves 3250a formed on the rear surface of the second lift decorative body 3250, respectively, and the second lift base 3248 is inserted into the fixed holes 3248b. A fixed claw 3250b of the decorative body 3250 is inserted from above, and the second lifting decorative body 3250 can be suspended and supported by the fixed piece 3248a and the fixed hole 3248b. Further, the second slide base 3248 is configured such that the locking claws 3250c of the second elevating decorative body 3250 are elastically inserted into the locking holes 3248c. The back upper center unit 3210 is prevented from moving the second elevating decorative body 3250 upward relative to the second slide base 3248 by inserting the locking claw 3250c into the locking hole 3248c. The second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 are in a state where they cannot be separated from each other (locked state).

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second elevating decorative body 3250 in the back center unit 3210 is formed in the shape of a front view imitating the mouth of a predetermined character, and the second liquid crystal so as to face the mouth. A display device 3252 is attached. The second elevating decorative body 3250 has a fixing groove 3250a into which the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 can be inserted and a fixing claw 3250b which can be inserted into the fixing hole 3248b of the second slide base 3248 from above on the rear surface side. And a locking claw 3250c that can be elastically inserted and locked to the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248 from the rear side. The fixing groove 3250a of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is formed into a substantially L-shaped groove that rises upward from the bottom of the opening that is opened rearward, and is fixed in the fixing groove 3250a. When the fixed piece 3248a is relatively moved upward after the piece 3248a is inserted, the fixed piece 3248a is prevented from coming out backward. When the fixed piece 3248a does not come out backward from the fixed groove 3250a, the locking claw 3250c is elastically inserted into the locking hole 3248c, and the locking claw 3248c is inserted into the locking hole 3248c. By inserting 3250c, the second slide base 3248 is prevented from moving downward relative to the second elevating decorative body 3250. Thereby, the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be brought into a state in which they cannot be separated from each other (locked state), and the second elevating decorative body is released by releasing the locking by the locking claw 3250c. When the second slide base is moved downward relative to 3250, the fixed piece 3248a comes out backward from the fixed groove 3250a, and the second elevating decorative body 3250 and the second slide base 3248 are separated from each other. be able to. That is, the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be detachably supported with respect to the second slide base 3248.

  Although not shown, the second elevating decorative body 3250 includes a back, middle, and back decorative board having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface on the outside of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 inside. The second elevating decorative body 3250 can be decorated with light emission by the upper, middle and rear decorative substrates.

  The back center decoration member 3254 in the back center unit 3210 is formed in a shape simulating a rotating lamp in a front view. Although the detailed illustration of the back center decoration member 3254 is omitted, a surface member having a translucent shape formed to resemble a rotating lamp and a rear opening of the surface member are closed to form a back center center 3212. A base member to be mounted, a reflector that is arranged between the base member and the surface member and is inclined in a conical shape so as to be located rearward as it goes downward; A rear upper middle upper decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted in an arc shape upward. The back center decoration member 3254 is configured such that light from the LED mounted upward on the back middle upper decoration board is reflected to the front side by the reflector. In addition, the back center decoration member 3254 can perform light emission decoration such that light is swirling in the surface member by sequentially emitting LEDs arranged in an arc shape. Light emitting decoration similar to revolving lights can be performed.

  Furthermore, the back center unit 3210 is attached to the back middle side decorative board 3266, which is attached to the upper left and right corners of the front surface of the center cover 3230 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the back side of the center cover 3230. Back top first drive motor 3228, back top second drive motor 3234, back top middle decoration board 3266, back middle front decoration board of first lift decoration body 3218, and second lift decoration body 3250 back, middle and rear A backside relay board 3268 for relaying the connection between the decorative board and the motor driving board and the lamp driving board, and a second liquid crystal relay board 3270 for relaying the connection between the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the peripheral control board 4010. And.

  Next, the back side unit 3300 in the back effect unit 3200 will be described. The back side unit 3300 of this example is configured substantially symmetrically and will be described with the same reference numerals. The back side unit 3300 is a shallow box with a front side open and is mounted in the back box 3010, and the back side base 3302 so that the rotation shaft protrudes to the front side of the back side base 3302. Back side drive motor 3304 (3304L, 3304R) attached to the rear side, spur gear-like drive gear 3306 fixed to the rotating shaft of back side drive motor 3304, and large diameter meshing with drive gear 3306 A driven gear portion 3308a, and a transmission gear member 3308 having a transmission pin 3308b protruding forward from a position slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the driven gear portion 3308a and rotatably supported on the front side of the back upper side base 3302; It is equipped with.

  In the back side unit 3300, the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 is slidably inserted, and a guide groove 3310a and a guide groove 3310a extending in a predetermined direction through the front and rear direction are formed and the guide groove A drive link member 3310 having a plate-like action piece 3310b extending in the extending direction of 3310a and a disk-like base portion 3310c formed on one end side of the action piece 3310b, and fixed to the front surface of the base portion 3310c of the drive link member 3310. Cylindrical shaft portion 3312a, arm portion 3312b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis of shaft portion 3312a from the tip of shaft portion 3312a and three-dimensionally formed in a predetermined shape, and connecting portion formed at the tip of arm portion 3312b First movable decorative body 3312 having 3312c and shaft portion 3312a of first movable decorative body 3312 are rotatable. And a, a decorative cover 3314 which covers the front surface of the disposed back on the side base 3302 between the first movable decorative body 3312 and the driving link member 3310 while lifting.

  Further, the back upper side unit 3300 is supported at a predetermined position on the front surface of the decorative cover 3314 so as to be rotatable around an axial core having one end extending in the front-rear direction, and the other end extends a predetermined amount in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A rod-shaped arm member 3316 and a base end rotatably supported on the other end side of the arm member 3316 and rotatably connected to the connecting portion 3312c of the first movable decorative body 3312 in the middle of the tip. And a second movable decorative body 3318 whose outer shape is formed into a three-dimensional predetermined shape, and a rear upper side decorative board disposed between the decorative cover 3314 and the rear upper side base 3302 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. 3320 and a back upper side lower decorative substrate 3322.

  The drive link member 3310 of the back upper side unit 3300 is rotatably supported by the decorative cover 3314 via the shaft portion 3312a of the first movable decorative body 3312. The drive link member 3310 includes a detection piece 3310d extending outward from a predetermined position of the action piece 3310b, and the back side rotation detection sensor 3324 attached to the back side side base 3302 is provided with the detection piece 3310d. , The rotational positions of the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 can be detected via the drive link member 3310.

  In the back upper side unit 3300, the first movable decorative body 3312 is formed in a shape that three-dimensionally represents the forearm of a predetermined character, and the second movable decorative body 3318 has a nozzle of a household vacuum cleaner. In addition, a hand of a predetermined character is formed at a portion connected to the connecting portion 3312c of the first movable decorative body 3312, and the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 are used to form a nozzle of the vacuum cleaner. An arm with a shape is formed. The arm member 3316 is formed in a shape simulating a hose of a vacuum cleaner.

  Further, although the detailed illustration of the first movable decorative body 3312 of the back side unit 3300 is omitted, the back side first decorative element in which the surface member has translucency and a plurality of LEDs are mounted therein. A substrate is provided, and the first movable decorative body 3312 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. Although the detailed illustration of the second movable decorative body 3318 is omitted, the surface member has translucency, and a back side second decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided. The second movable decorative body 3318 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  Next, the movement of the back effect unit 3200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 159, the back top effect unit 3200 of the present example is in a raised position where the first lift decoration body 3218 and the second lift decoration body 3252 in the back center unit 3210 are respectively at the rising ends, as shown in FIG. And the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 respectively disposed on the left and right sides of the back side unit 3300 are positioned at a retracted position in which the arms are opened apart from each other. ing. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 provided in the second elevating decorative body 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first elevating decorative body 3218.

  More specifically, in this normal state, the first slide base 3216 of the back center unit 3210 is engaged with the pinion gear 3220 near the lower end of the rack gear 3216c extending in the vertical direction. Further, the first connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b of the first gear member 3238 and the second gear member 3240 in the back center unit 3210 are separated from each other from the substantially rising end (top dead center) in the revolution locus. The first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b are in contact with the outer ends of the slits 3242a in the drive slider 3242, respectively, at slightly rotated positions. Accordingly, a downward force acts on the first connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b via the second slide base 3248 and the drive slider 3242 due to the load of the second elevating decorative body 3250 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Thus, even if the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b try to rotate away from each other, the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b are in contact with the outer end of the slit 3242a. The one connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b cannot move away from each other, and the state in which the first connection pin 3238c and the second connection pin 3240b are stopped from rotating is maintained, and the second drive on the back side A load is not applied to the motor 3228.

  On the other hand, in a normal state in the back side unit 3300, the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 that rotates the drive link member 3310 extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the guide groove 3310a and rotates the transmission gear member 3308. The drive link member 3310 is positioned on the rotation center side of the axis passing through the shaft core, and is in contact with the proximal end of the guide groove 3310a. As a result, a force that moves the connecting portion 3312c relatively downward acts on the first movable decorative body 3312 by a load applied to the connecting portion 3312c side of the first movable decorative body 3312, thereby driving the drive link member. Even if a force to rotate the acting piece 3310b of 3310 to the rotation center side of the transmission gear member 3308 is applied and a force to revolve the transmission pin 3308b of the transmission gear member 3308 is applied, the transmission is performed. Since the pin 3308b is in contact with the proximal end of the guide groove 3310a, the transmission pin 3308b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the drive link member 3310 (first movable decorative body 3312) is prevented. The normal state is maintained. As a result, the load is not applied to the back side drive motor 3304 in a normal state.

  From this normal state, when the first gear member 3238 is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction in the front view by the back second drive motor 3234 of the back center unit 3210, the first gear member 3238 The first connecting pin 3238c starts to revolve in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second connecting pin 3240b of the second gear member 3240 rotates in the counterclockwise direction. The first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b revolve so that their relative positions change with each other, so that the vertical position of the drive slider 3242 is simultaneously slid within the slit 3242a of the drive slider 3242. Will change. In this example, until the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b reach the top dead center, the drive slider 3242 (second elevating decorative body 3250) slightly rises from the raised position and exceeds the top dead center. The drive slider 3242 is lowered.

  When the first connecting pin 3238c and the second connecting pin 3240b reach the bottom dead center, the drive slider 3242 (second elevating decorative body 3250) is located at the lowest lowered position, and the back upper second drive motor 3234. The rotation drive of is stopped. In the state where the second elevating decorative body 3250 is positioned at the lowered position, as shown in FIG. And the entire second liquid crystal display device 3250 can be seen from the mouth to the player side.

  When the drive gear 3226 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the back top first drive motor 3228 in a state where the second elevating decorative body 3250 of the back center unit 3210 is positioned at the lowered position, a front view meshing with the drive gear 3226 is obtained. While the transmission gear 3222 on the right side rotates, the transmission gear 3222 on the opposite side simultaneously rotates in the same direction via the connecting shaft 3224, and the pinion gears 3220 meshed with the respective transmission gears 3222 rotate and each pinion gear 3220. The first slide base 3216 (first elevating decorative body 3218) is slid downward from the raised position by the rack gear 3216c meshed with. In the first slide base 3216, the rack gear 3216c separated from each other on the left and right are simultaneously driven up and down, so that the first slide base 3216 slides smoothly without rattling.

  When the first slide base 3216 reaches the descending end, the back upper first drive motor 3228 is stopped, and the first elevating decorative body 3218 is in the lowered position. In this state, the relative positional relationship between the first elevating decorative body 3218 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 is substantially the same as the normal state, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 faces a small amount from the mouth. It becomes. On the other hand, on the upper side of the first elevating decorative body 3218, as shown in FIG. 161, the back upper center decorative member 3254 can be visually recognized from the player side. By appropriately emitting the LEDs on the middle upper decorative board, it is possible to show the player a light emission effect such as a rotating lamp.

  In order to return to the normal state (the raised position), the first elevating decorative body 3218 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be returned to the raised position by performing a drive reverse to the above. it can. Further, in this example, the first elevating decorative body 3218 cannot be brought into the lowered position while the second elevating decorative body 3250 remains in the raised position because of its structure.

  On the other hand, in the back side unit 3300 in the back effect unit 3200, as shown in FIG. 162 (a), in the normal state, the distal end side (the side of the connecting portion 3312c) of the left and right first movable decorative bodies 3312 is. It is in a state where they are away from each other, and a predetermined character is holding his / her vacuum cleaner (nozzles) in his hands and spreading his arms. In this normal state, the back side drive motor 3304 of the back side unit 3300 is driven to drive the drive gear 3306 in the appropriate direction (the left side is the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the right side when viewed from the front is the counterclockwise direction). When it is driven to rotate, the transmission gear member 3308 that meshes with the drive gear 3306 rotates, and the transmission pin 3308b revolves at a predetermined radius.

  When the transmission pin 3308b revolves, the relative position of the transmission pin 3308b moves, so that the transmission pin 3308b slides in the guide groove 3310a of the drive link member 3310 and is simultaneously pushed by the transmission pin 3308b. The drive link member 3310 rotates so that the tip side thereof moves downward, and the first movable decorative body 3312 rotates together with the drive link member 3310.

  In the back side unit 3300, the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, and the arm member 3316 form a parallel link, and the front end side of the first movable decorative body 3312 (the connecting portion 3312c side). When the first movable decorative body 3312 rotates so as to move downward, the arm member 3316 rotates in the same manner as the first movable decorative body 3312, whereas the second movable decorative body 3318 changes its orientation. The movement moves as it is. Accordingly, the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3318 on the left and right sides of the second movable decorative body 3318 shown in FIG. 162 (b) approach each other from the retracted position shown in FIG. 162 (a). It becomes the state of the appearance position.

  In order to return the first movable decorative body 3312, the second movable decorative body 3318, and the like to the normal state (retracted position state), the first movable decorative body 3312 and the second movable decorative body 3312 The second movable decorative body 3318 and the like can be returned to the normal state.

  Thus, according to the back effect unit 3200 of this example, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is provided separately from the normal liquid crystal display device 1900, it is possible to display effect images on two different display devices, respectively. In addition, it is possible to present the player with a completely different display effect from the conventional display effects, and to suppress the entertainment of the player from deteriorating and making the player entertained.

  Further, since the small second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the large liquid crystal display device 1900, the collaboration between the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be enjoyed. It is possible to increase the interest of the player.

  In the back center unit 3210, the second elevating decorative body 3250 that supports the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably supported with respect to the second slide base 3248 that is driven to move up and down in the vertical direction. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) can be easily separated from the back center unit 3210 and replaced. It is possible to increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 by reducing the time and labor required for removing the second liquid crystal display device 3252 when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, thereby improving the recyclability and the environment. The pachinko machine 1 is easy to use.

[2-9. Bottom production unit]
Next, the back bottom effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 163 to 180. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the lower back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the lower back effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 165 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member. FIG. 166 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled as the main member. FIG. In addition, FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the front back front unit in the back bottom rendering unit as viewed from the front, FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the back bottom front unit in the back bottom rendering unit as viewed from the back, and FIG. FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the lower front unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 170 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 171 is a front view showing the back bottom effect unit in a normal state, and FIG. 172 is a front view showing the back bottom front slider of the back bottom front unit in the back bottom effect unit being raised halfway. FIG. 173 is a front view showing a state in which the lower back front slider of the lower back front unit is raised to the rising end. Moreover, FIG. 174 is a front view showing a state in which the back-under-rear middle decorative body in the back-under direction production unit is raised to the appearance position, and FIG. It is a front view which shows the state made to do. Further, FIG. 176 is a front view showing a state in which the back-below front slider of the back-bottom front unit is raised to the rising end and the back-bottom rear middle decorative body is raised to the appearance position, and FIG. FIG. 178 is a front view showing the back lower back side decorative body rotated to the appearance position, and FIG. 178 is a front view showing the back lower back middle decorative body raised to the appearance position in the state of FIG. 177; FIG. 179 is a front view showing the state in which the lower back front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 178. Further, FIG. 180 is a front view showing the state in which the back bottom front slider is raised to the rising end in the state of FIG. 177.

  The back bottom effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 of this example is attached below the opening 3010b between the back front decoration unit 3100 and the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The back lower production unit 3400 is mounted in the back box 3010 and has a lower back unit base 3402 formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a rotation shaft extending rearward through the back lower unit base 3402. A rear lower rear side drive motor 3404 attached to a predetermined position (lower right corner in front view) of the lower front surface of the lower lower unit base 3402 so as to protrude, and a spur gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower lower rear side drive motor 3404 -Shaped drive gear 3406, a small-diameter first gear portion 3408a meshing with the drive gear 3406, and a second gear portion 3408b integrally formed on the rear surface of the first gear portion 3408a and having a larger diameter than the first gear portion 3408a. And an intermediate gear 3408 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the back lower unit base 3402.

  In addition, the lower back effect unit 3400 includes a transmission gear portion 3410a that meshes with the second gear portion 3408b of the intermediate gear 3408, and a first cam pin 3410b that protrudes rearward from a position slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the transmission gear portion 3410a. A first cam gear 3410 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the lower back unit base 3402, a driven gear portion 3412a meshing with the transmission gear portion 3410a of the first cam gear 3410 and having the same diameter as the transmission gear portion 3410a, a driven gear The second cam pin 3412b is slightly smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the portion 3412a and protrudes rearward from a position having the same radius as the revolution radius of the first cam pin 3410b. A second cam gear 3412 that is rotatably supported. The first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 are supported on the rear surface side of the lower back unit base 3402 so that the center of the axis connecting the respective rotation centers is located at the approximate center in the left-right direction of the lower back unit base 3402. Has been.

  Further, in the lower back effect unit 3400, the first cam pin 3410b of the first cam gear 3410 is slidably inserted to form a long hole-like slit 3414a and slit 3414a extending in a predetermined direction, and the slit 3414a extends in the extending direction. A first link member having a strip-shaped action piece 3414b extending to one side and a cylindrical shaft portion 3414c formed on the base end side extending from the slit 3414a of the action piece 3414b and extending in the front-rear direction. 3414 and the second cam pin 3412b of the second cam gear 3412 are slidably inserted to form a long hole-like slit 3416a and slit 3416a extending in a predetermined direction, and extending to one side in the extending direction of the slit 3416a. It is long from the strip 3416a of the strip-shaped action piece 3416b and the action piece 3416b. A second link member 3416 having a cylindrical shaft portion 3416c extending in the front-rear direction are formed in the micro broth proximal end side, and a. The first link member 3414 includes a detection piece 3414d extending in a plate shape from the shaft portion 3414c in the direction perpendicular to the shaft.

  Furthermore, the back lower direction production unit 3400 has a pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 (3420L, 3420R) supported rotatably around the axis extending in the front-rear direction near the left and right corners of the front upper portion of the back lower unit base. ). The pair of lower back side decorative bodies 3420 extend in a substantially arc shape along a surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, and each is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape. More specifically, the back lower back side decorative body 3420 includes a support pin 3422 extending in the front-rear direction rotatably supported at a predetermined position of the back lower unit base 3402, and a support pin 3422 extending from the front end side of the support pin 3422. A decorative body body 3424 having a translucent shape and extending in a substantially arc shape along a surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis and having a three-dimensional predetermined shape, and disposed behind the decorative body body 3424. A lens sheet (not shown) capable of diffusing light, and a back lower back side decoration board 3426 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 are formed so that the support pins 3422 are substantially symmetrical with respect to a perpendicular line passing through the center of the axis connecting the rotation centers of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412. The shaft portions of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are supported at the rear end of the support pin 3422 that is rotatably supported by the lower unit base 3402 and extends rearward through the back lower unit base 3402. 3414c and 3416c are fixed, respectively. That is, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotatably supported with respect to the lower back unit base 3402 via the support pins 3422 of the lower back side decorative body 3420. Further, when the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are rotated (turned), the back lower back side decorative body 3420 is also rotated. The support pin 3422 of the back lower back side decorative body 3420 is rotatably supported by the back lower unit base 3402 via the bush 3428.

  In addition, the back lower direction production unit 3400 is a plate-shaped protection plate 3430 that is attached to the upper left and right corners on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and that a part of the rear surface of the back lower back side decorative body 3420 can slide. A back bottom rear side rotation detection sensor 3432 which is attached to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the back bottom unit base 3402 and can detect the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414. In this example, by detecting the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 by the back bottom back side rotation detection sensor 3432, the rotation position of the back bottom back side decorative body 3420 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, the back lower direction production unit 3400 supports the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the lower lower unit base 3402 and the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A tip is connected to a pair of guide shafts 3470 that are spaced apart in the left-right direction at the center of the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and a lower front surface of the lower back inner decorative body 3450 supported by the pair of guide shafts 3470. And an arm portion 3472a whose base end extends to one outer side in the left-right direction (left side in front view) of the pair of guide shafts 3470, and a spur gear-like gear portion integrally formed on the base end side of the arm portion 3472a. 3472b and a plate-shaped detection piece 3472c extending outward from the gear portion 3472b, and the back side is rotatable about the axis of the gear portion 3472b. An elevating arm member 3472 supported on the front surface of the knit base 3402, a driving gear 3474 that meshes with a gear portion 3472b of the elevating arm member 3472 and is disposed on the rear side of the lower back unit base 3402, and the driving gear 3474 is a rotating shaft. A back-behind back middle drive motor 3476 that is fixed and attached to the front side of the back-under unit base 3402 so that the rotating shaft extends rearward through the back-under unit base 3402.

  The back lower direction production unit 3400 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and cooperates with the lower back unit base 3402 to hold the lower end of the guide shaft 3470, and the front surface of the back lower unit base 3402. The back and bottom back middle lift detection sensor 3480 attached to a predetermined position of the lift arm member 3472 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3472c and the gear portion 3472b of the lift arm member 3472 are engaged with the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 3482 that is supported, an assist gear 3484 that meshes with the intermediate gear 3482 and is formed in a fan shape and is rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402, and the assist gear 3484 is moved up and down. The tip of the arm portion 3472a of the arm member 3472 moves upward. Includes an assist spring 3486 for urging to rotate the direction.

  Further, the back lower direction production unit 3400 is attached to the rear side of the back lower unit base 3402, and the back lower back side drive motor 3404, the back lower back side rotation detection sensor 3432, the back lower pointer drive motor 3460, the back lower back middle Drive motor 3476, back-under-back middle lift sensor 3480, back-bottom front drive motor 3508, connection between back-bottom front-bottom detection sensor 3544 and motor drive board 3045, back-bottom rear side decoration board 3426, back-bottom back A decorative board 3456, a lower back front side decorative board 3536, and a lower back front relay board 3488 for relaying the connection between the lower back front middle decorative board 3546 and the lamp driving board 3041 are provided.

  The back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 in the back-bottom effect unit 3400 includes a horizontally-long rectangular base portion 3452a that is supported by a pair of guide shafts 3470 so that it can be moved up and down, and a support portion that extends upward from the upper side of the base portion 3452a into a vertically long rectangular shape. A plate-like slider base 3452 having 3352b, a translucent decorative body 3454 which is attached to the front surface of the support portion 3452b of the slider base 3452 and has a three-dimensional outer shape, and a decorative body 3454. And a support lens 3452b of the slider base 3452 and a sheet lens (not shown) capable of diffusing light, and a sheet lens and a support portion 3452b of the slider base 3452. And a rear back and middle decorative board 3456 on which the LED is mounted.

  Further, the back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 is disposed on the front surface of the decorative body main body 3454 and has a base end rotatably supported at the center of the decorative body main body 3454 and an outer shape of a pointer member 3458 formed in an arrow shape; And a lower back pointer drive motor 3460 that is driven to rotate around the base end of the pointer member 3458 and is attached to a predetermined position of the slider base 3452. Although not shown in detail, the lower back pointer drive motor 3460 is disposed such that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction, and a worm gear is fixed to the rotation shaft, and further meshes with the worm gear. Rotational drive is transmitted through a plurality of gears such as spur gears so that the pointer member 3458 rotates.

  In addition, the back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 has a guide hole 3451c extending in the left-right direction that can hold the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the elevating arm member 3472 slidable in the left-right direction in the base portion 3352a of the slider base 3452. It has. By inserting the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the lifting / lowering arm member 3472 into the guide hole 3452c of the slider base 3442, the slider base 3452 and the lifting / lowering arm member 3472 are connected.

  The lower back direction rendering unit 3400 is disposed on the front side of the back lower back side decorative body 3420, the lower back rear middle decorative body 3450, the lifting arm member 3472, the drive gear 3474, and the like, and is attached to the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402. A back bottom front unit 3500 is further provided. The lower back front unit 3500 is attached to the front surface of the lower back unit base 3402 and is disposed at a pair of slits 3502a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction and extending in the up-down direction, and at the upper front end at the center in the left-right direction. The back bottom front base 3502 having the abutting portion 3502b and the front bottom back base 3502 are disposed so as to be slidable in the vertical direction by a pair of slits 3502a, and the outer shape is formed in a substantially long rectangular shape. A rack gear 3504a formed so as to extend in the vertical direction on both left and right side surfaces, a back lower front slider 3504 having a guide hole 3504b penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction, and a back lower front slider 3504 A three-dimensional model of a predetermined character that is attached to the upper front of the machine and conforms to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 A subplantar before in ornamental body 3506 having light resistance, and a.

  The lower back front slider 3504 of the lower back front unit 3500 extends from the rear end of the left and right rack gears 3504a to the left and right in the left and right ends, and extends in the vertical direction. Guide piece 3504d, a detection piece 3504e extending further outward in the left-right direction from the lower end of one (right side in the front) guide piece 3504d, and a cylindrical guide boss inserted into the slit 3502a of the lower back front base 3502 3504f. Further, the back-under-front slider 3504 has a plurality of through-holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at a portion where the back-under-front middle decorative body 3506 is attached. This back bottom front slider 3504 is supported by the slit 3502a so as to be slidable in the vertical direction when the guide boss 3504f is inserted into the slit 3502a of the back bottom front base 3502 via the bush 3507.

  In addition, the lower back front unit 3500 is attached to the rear surface of the lower front front base 3502 in the vicinity of one end in the left-right direction (right side in front view) so that the rotation shaft penetrates the lower back front base 3502 and protrudes forward. A front back front drive motor 3508, a spur gear-like drive gear 3510 fixed to the rotation shaft of the back bottom front drive motor 3508, and meshing with the drive gear 3510, are rotatably supported on the front surface of the back bottom front base 3502. The intermediate gear 3512 is meshed with one of the rack gears 3504a (right side in the front view) of the intermediate lower surface front slider 3504 slidably supported by the intermediate gear 3512 and the lower rear front base 3502, and can rotate to the front surface of the lower rear front base 3502. And an operating gear 3514 supported by the motor.

  Further, the back bottom front unit 3500 meshes with the other rack gear 3504a of the back bottom front slider 3504 slidably supported by the back bottom front base 3502, and is supported by the front surface of the back bottom front base 3502 so as to be rotatable. -Shaped driven gear 3516, a transmission gear 3518 that meshes with the driven gear 3516 and is rotatably supported on the front surface of the lower back front base 352, meshes with the transmission gear 3518, is formed in a fan shape, and An assist gear 3520 that is rotatably supported on the front surface, and an assist spring 3522 that urges the assist gear 3520 to rotate in a direction in which the back lower front slider 3504 slides upward. Although not shown in detail, the transmission gear 3518 includes a large-diameter first gear portion that meshes with the driven gear 3516 and a small-diameter second gear portion that rotates integrally with the first gear portion and meshes with the assist gear 3520. And.

  The back bottom front unit 3500 is supported by a guide hole 3504b on the front surface of the back bottom front slider 3504 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. A long hole 3524a, a locking portion 3524b formed at a predetermined position on the rear surface, and a guide hole 3504b of the lower back front slider 3504 can be projected rearward from the lower end of the rear surface, and the back lower front base 3502 can be contacted. A vertically long movable slider 3524 having a projection 3524c that can come into contact with the contact portion 3502b from below, and a lower end of the slider 3524b of the movable slider 3524, and a lower back front slider 3504 are locked. A drive spring 352 that is locked at the upper end to the portion 3504c and biases the movable slider 3524 toward the upper side of the lower back slider 3504. It has a, and.

  Further, the back bottom front unit 3500 is disposed between the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 and the back bottom front slider 3504 on both sides of the movable slider 3524, and is slidable into one guide hole 3504b of the movable slider 3524. It has a sliding pin 3532 to be inserted, and is rotatably supported by a lower back front slider 3504 at a position on the outer side in the left and right direction with respect to the sliding pin 3532 and the tip side is outward in the left and right direction from the lower back front slider 3504. A pair of back lower front side decorative bodies 3530 having an extended appearance formed in a blade shape are provided. This front back side decorative body is provided with a sliding pin 3532 on the base end side and has a translucent decorative main body 3534 whose appearance is formed in a wing shape, and is disposed on the rear side of the decorative main body 3534 to transmit light. A diffusable sheet lens (not shown), and a back lower front side decorative substrate 3536 disposed on the rear side of the sheet lens and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface.

  The lower back front unit 3500 includes a guide roller 3540 that can come into contact with the left and right guide pieces 3504d of the lower back front slider 3504 and is rotatably supported at a predetermined position on the upper front surface of the lower back front base 3502; A roller presser 3542 that prevents 3540 from coming off from the lower back front base 3502, and a front lower back elevation detection sensor that is attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower back front base 3502 and can detect a detection piece 3504e of the back front slider 3504. 3544, and a back bottom front middle decorative board 3546 attached to the upper rear surface of the back bottom front slider 3504 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The LEDs on the lower back front middle decorative board 3546 are provided at positions corresponding to the through holes of the lower back front slider 3504, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 disposed on the front side through the through holes can be decorated with light emission. It can be done. Reference numeral 3548 in the drawing is a cable presser for pressing a flexible flat cable (FFC) that connects the back-under-front middle decorative board 3546 and the back-under relay board 3488.

  Next, the movement of the back bottom production unit 3400 of this example will be described. As shown in FIG. 171, in the normal state, the back bottom effect unit 3400 has a pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 that are separated from each other in the left and right directions and extend in an arc shape in directions in which their tips are separated from each other. It is in a rotated state. In this state, the back lower back side decorative body 3420 is positioned on the left and right outside of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (retracted position state), and the left and right back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 are the center roles. It is hidden behind the object 2500 and the front effect unit 3100 and is hardly visible from the player side.

  In addition, the back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 in the back-bottom effect unit 3400 is lowered and hidden behind the back-bottom front unit 3500 (retracted position state). In this state, the liquid crystal display It is in a state of being located below the front surface of the device 1900 and in a state of being hardly visible from the player side.

  Further, the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 and the pair of back bottom front side decorative bodies 3530 of the back bottom front unit 3500 in the back bottom rendering unit 3400 are located at the descending ends, respectively, and a pair of back bottom front side decorative bodies. 3530 is in a state where the distal end side is lower than the proximal end side. In this state, both the lower back front middle decorative body 3506 and the pair of lower back front side decorative bodies 3530 are positioned below the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (retracted position state). It is almost invisible from the person side.

  More specifically, when the lower back rendering unit 3400 is in a normal state, the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 that rotate the left and right lower back rear side decorations 3420 are respectively relative to the rotation axis. The action pieces 3414b and 3416b are in a rotational position so as to extend obliquely upward. In this state, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 inserted into the slits 3414a and 3416a of the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 have their revolution trajectories. The first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b are in contact with the end portions on the front end side of the slits 3414a and 3416a.

  In this normal state, even if the force that rotates the first link member 3414 or the second link member 3416 due to the weight of the back lower back side decorative body 3420 acts on the first cam pin 3410b or the second cam pin 3412b, The first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b act in a direction to revolve so as to be directed toward the tip side of the slits 3414a and 3416a. Since it is in contact with the side end, the revolution of the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b is prevented. Thereby, the back lower back side decorative body 3420 can be maintained in a normal state without applying a load to the back lower back side drive motor 3404. Note that, in a normal state, the detection piece 3414d of the first link member 3414 is detected by the back bottom rear side rotation detection sensor 3432.

  Further, in the backside rear middle decorative body 3450 in the normal state, the tip of the arm portion 3472a of the lifting arm member 3472 slidably connected to the guide hole 3352c of the slider base 3451 in the back lower back middle decorative body 3450. However, it is in a state of extending obliquely below the center of rotation. In this example, in this state, the urging force of the assist spring 3486 is in a state in which the lifting arm member 3472 acts in the direction in which the distal end side of the arm portion 3472a rises. Note that, in a normal state, the detection piece 3472c of the lifting arm member 3472 is in a state detected by the back-and-back rear middle lifting detection sensor 3480.

  Further, in the back bottom front unit 3500 in the normal state, the back bottom front slider 3504 is positioned at the lower end, and the movable slider 3524 supported by the back bottom front slider 3504 so as to be able to move up and down is the drive spring 3526 It is located at a position relatively raised with respect to the lower back front slider 3504 by the urging force. In this state, the pair of long holes 3524a of the movable slider 3524 are located above the center of rotation of the back lower front side decorative body 3530, and the back lower front side decorative body 3530 inserted into the long hole 3524a slides. By the pin 3532, the front end side of the back lower front side decorative body 3530 is lowered.

  From this normal state, when the drive gear 3510 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front) by the lower back front drive motor 3508 of the lower back front unit 3500, the rotation is actuated via the intermediate gear 3512. The rear lower front slider 3504 is slid upward by the rack gear 3504a that is transmitted to 3514 and meshed with the operating gear 3514. Even if the lower back front slider 3504 rises, the positional relationship between the lower back front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 does not change, so that the pair of lower back front side decorative bodies 3530 have their tips lowered in the same manner as in the normal state. In this state, the whole ascends together with the lower back front slider 3504 (see FIG. 172).

  When the lower back front slider 3504 is raised to some extent, the protrusion 3524c of the movable slider 3524 supported by the lower back front slider 3504 comes into contact with the abutting portion 3502b of the lower back front base 3502 to prevent the movable slider 3524 from rising. Will come to be. Then, in the state in which the movable slider 3524 is prevented from rising by the contact portion 3502b of the back bottom front base 3502, the back bottom front drive motor 3508 is driven so that the back bottom front slider 3504 is further lifted. The slider 3504 further moves up against the biasing force of the drive spring 3526. As a result, the relative position in the vertical direction between the lower back front slider 3504 and the movable slider 3524 changes, and the elongated hole 3524a of the movable slider 3524 moves so as to go below the center of rotation of the lower back front side decorative body 3530. By doing so, the back lower front side decorative body 3530 rotates in the direction in which the tip end side rises (see FIG. 173).

  When the back-bottom front slider 3504 of the back-bottom front unit 3500 rises to the rising end, as shown in FIG. 173, the pair of back-bottom front side decorative bodies 3530 rotate to positions where the front end sides extend obliquely upward. The predetermined character imitated by the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 is in a state where the wings are spread. In this state, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorative bodies 3530 are moved from the lower side to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (appearance position state), and are sufficiently visible to the player. become able to. In addition, by performing reverse driving to the above, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 and the pair of back lower front side decorative bodies 3530 can be returned to the normal state.

  On the other hand, when the drive gear 3474 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (clockwise in front view) by the back-under-rear middle drive motor 3476 from the normal state, the lift arm member 3472 is engaged by the gear portion 3472b meshed with the drive gear 3474. However, the arm portion 3472a is rotated so that the tip side of the arm portion 3472a is raised, and is pushed by the tip end of the arm portion 3472a, so that the back and bottom rear decorative body 3450 can be raised. In the state where the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 is positioned at the rising end, the decoration main body 3454 of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 is positioned from the lower side to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the appearance position of State) and can be visually recognized by the player (see FIG. 174).

  In this back bottom middle decorative body 3450, when the back bottom pointer drive motor 3460 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction in a state where it is raised to the rising end (appearance position state), an arrow disposed on the front surface of the decoration main body 3454 The needle-shaped pointer member 3458 can be rotated like a watch hand (see FIG. 175). In addition, by performing the reverse driving to the above, the back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 can be returned to the normal state.

  Further, when the back bottom front slider 3504 of the back bottom front unit 3500 is lifted to the lift end (appearance position) with the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 raised to the lift end (appearance position state), the back bottom A back lower front middle decorative body 3506 and a pair of back lower front side decorative bodies 3530 are positioned on the front side of the rear middle decorative body 3450 so as to hide the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 ( (See FIG. 176).

  Further, when the drive gear 3406 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front) by the rear back side drive motor 3404 from the normal state, the first cam gear 3410 is moved in the same direction via the intermediate gear 3408. Simultaneously with the rotation, the second cam gear 3412 rotates in the reverse direction. In this example, the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 rotate so that the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b of the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 revolve in a direction away from each other. .

  Since the first cam gear 3410 and the second cam gear 3412 rotate, the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b positioned at the top dead center revolve toward the bottom dead center. The one cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b slide in the slits 3414a and 3416a, and are pressed by the first cam pin 3410b and the second cam pin 3412b, so that the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416 are respectively acted pieces 3414b. , 3416b is rotated in the direction of lowering, and the left and right back lower back side decorations 3420 are rotated in the same direction as the first link member 3414 and the second link member 3416, respectively.

  Then, the rotation of the back bottom rear side drive motor 3404 is stopped so that the tips of the left and right back bottom rear side decoration bodies 3420 come into contact with each other, thereby a pair of back bottom back side decorations formed in a substantially arc shape. The body 3420 is in a state of being combined in an annular shape (see FIG. 177). In this state, the pair of back and back rear decorative bodies 3420 are moved from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the front (appearance position state), and can be sufficiently viewed by the player. In addition, the reverse back side decorative body 3420 can be returned to a normal state by performing the reverse drive.

  In the back lower direction production unit 3400 of this example, the right and left back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated and positioned at the ring-shaped appearance position, and the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 is raised to appear. When placed in the position, the inside of the pair of back and back side decorative bodies 3420 is filled with the back and back back decorative body 3450 so that a large decorative body appears. (See FIG. 178). As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Note that the back lower back side decorative body 3420 may be rotated to the appearance position after the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 is first raised to the appearance position. It is possible to perform a movable effect such that the decorative body is sequentially enlarged.

  Further, with the pair of back bottom back side decorative body 3420 and back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 positioned at the appearance position, the back bottom front slider 3504 is raised, and the front bottom back front center The decorative body 3506 and the back lower front side decorative body 3530 may appear, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 and the annular back lower rear side decorative body 3420 located on the rear side of the back lower front side decorative body 3530 are provided. Thus, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 and the back lower front side decorative body 3530 can be made to stand out (see FIG. 179). In this case, the back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 may be in a lowered retreat position that is a normal state (see FIG. 180).

  As described above, according to the back bottom effect unit 3400 of this example, various movable effects can be performed, the player can be entertained, and it can be hard to get tired, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

[2-10. Bottom right production unit]
Next, the back lower right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 181 to 191. 181 (a) is a left side view of the back lower right effect unit in the back unit, (b) is a front view of the back lower right effect unit in the back unit, and FIG. 182 (a) is a back lower right effect unit. Is a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the back lower right effect unit. FIG. 183 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 181 and FIG. 181 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. Further, FIG. 184 is an exploded perspective view of the rear lower right effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 185 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear side of the lower right unit base in FIG. 184 in an enlarged manner. . FIG. 186 is an exploded oblique view of the rear lower right effect unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 187 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear side of the lower right lower unit base in FIG. 186 in an enlarged manner. . Moreover, FIG. 188 is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the back lower right rotation decoration body in a back lower right production | presentation unit. 189 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the effect ball of the back lower right effect unit, FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the effect ball of the lower right effect unit following FIG. 189, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lift of the effect ball in a lower right effect unit.

  The back lower right effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000 of the present embodiment is attached from the lower right corner to the right side of the opening 3010b in a front view in the back box 3010. This back lower right effect unit 3600 is formed in an appearance simulating a so-called rotary lottery machine, and is a shallow box-shaped main body portion 3602a having a rectangular shape with the front view extending long in the vertical direction and the rear side being opened, A cylindrical portion 3602b extending forward in the upper front portion of 3602a, a notch-like discharge portion 3602c formed at a predetermined position in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 3602b (diagonally lower left in front view), and arranged in the center of the cylindrical portion 3602b A cylindrical bearing portion 3602d penetrating in the direction, a rectangular return port 3602e formed in the cylindrical portion 3602b on the right side of the bearing portion 3602d when viewed from the front, and an upper and lower portion of the main body portion 3602a directly below the return port 3602e. A back lower right unit base 3602 having a rectangular collection port 3602f formed substantially in the center of the direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction; It is formed in a shallow box shape that is attached to the rear side of the main base 3602 and is substantially the same size as the main body 3602a and is open on the front side, and faces the return port 3602e and the recovery port 3602f in the main body 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602. A back lower right unit case 3604 having a guide slit 3604a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the up-down direction over substantially the entire height.

  The lower right rendering unit 3600 passes through the bearing portion 3602d of the lower right lower unit base 3602, and is rotatably inserted and fixed to the rear ends of the cylindrical shaft portion 3606a and the shaft portion 3606a that penetrates in the front-rear direction. Pulley section 3606b and a first driven pulley 3606 having a detection piece 3606c extending outward from the front end of the pulley section 3606b, and fixed to the distal end of the shaft section 3606a of the first driven pulley 3606 in the outer periphery and the front-rear direction. A rotating cylinder 3608 that has a plurality of (five in this example) receiving recesses 3608a that are opened and arranged in the circumferential direction and is disposed in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the lower right unit base 3602, and the rotating cylinder 3608 A plurality of effect balls each housed in each housing recess 3608a and formed in different colors from each other It is provided with a 610, a. Each receiving recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 has a size that can accommodate only one effect ball 3610.

  Also, the lower right effect unit 3600 can prevent the effect ball 3610 from moving backward from the housing recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608, and between the rotary cylinder 3608 and the main body portion 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602. A disc-shaped base 3612a that is disposed and supported rotatably on the outer periphery of the bearing portion 3602d, extends forward from the outer peripheral end of the base portion 3612a, and the effect ball 3610 moves radially outward from the receiving recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608. The peripheral wall portion 3612b that can be prevented from being formed, and the circumferential wall portion 3612b that are formed at positions facing each other across the center of the base portion 3612a, are cut out with substantially the same length as the circumferential length of one receiving recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608. A pair of side cutouts 3612c and one side cutout 361 a discharge flap 3612 having a rear notch 3612d cut out in a substantially rectangular shape from c to the center of the base 3612a, a working flap 3612e extending rearward from a predetermined position on the rear surface of the base 3612a, and a discharge flap 3612 And a shallow circle which is attached to the front end of the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602 on the front side of the rotating cylinder 3608, prevents the effect ball 3610 from moving forward from the receiving recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 and opens the front side. A dish-shaped cylindrical cover 3614. Although illustration is omitted, the operating rod 3612e of the discharge flap 3612 penetrates the main body portion 3602a of the back lower right unit base 3602 and extends into the main body portion 3602a.

  Further, the back lower right effect unit 3600 is a pulley that is rotatably supported at the same position in the front-rear direction as the pulley portion 3606b of the first driven pulley 3606 on the lower side of the back lower right unit base 3602 (in the main body portion 3602a). A first driving pulley 3616 having a portion 3616a and a spur gear-like gear portion 3616b fixed to the rear side of the pulley portion 3616a, a pulley portion 3616a of the first driving pulley 3616, and a pulley portion 3606b of the first driven pulley 3606 The first belt 3618 wound around the first driving gear 3620, the first driving gear 3620 meshing with the gear portion 3616b of the first driving pulley 3616, and the first driving gear 3620 extend through the back lower right unit case 3604 to the front side. Back lower right first drive motor 362 fixed to the rotating shaft and attached to the rear surface of the lower right lower unit case 3604 When provided with a back bottom right unit base mounted on a predetermined position of the 3602 first driven pulley 3606 of the detection piece back lower right capable of detecting a 3606c first detection sensor 3623, the.

  In the back lower right rendering unit 3600, when the first drive pulley 3616 is rotated by the back lower right first drive motor 3622 via the first drive gear 3620, the first driven pulley 3606 is rotated by the first belt 3618. A rotating cylinder 3608 that houses a plurality of effect balls 3610 rotates. Note that the rotation position of the rotary cylinder 3608 can be detected via the first driven pulley 3606 by detecting the detection piece 3606c of the first driven pulley 3606 by the back lower right first detection sensor 3623. Yes.

  The lower right lower rendering unit 3600 has a lower right lower discharge solenoid 3624 attached to the upper rear side of the lower right lower unit base 3602 so that the plunger moves back and forth in the left-right direction, and the tips of the plungers of the lower right lower discharge solenoid 3624. One end side is connected to the other end, and the other end side is connected to the operating rod 3612e of the discharge flap 3612 so that it can rotate within the main body 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602 at a position between the one end side and the other end side. A discharge link member 3626 to be supported. The discharge link member 3626 rotates when the plunger advances and retreats by energizing the lower right lower discharge solenoid 3624, and the discharge flap connected to the other end by the rotation of the discharge link member 3626. The discharge flap 3612 can be rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction (around the axis of the first driven pulley 3606) via the operating rod 3612e of 3612.

  The back lower right rendering unit 3600 has a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction with the outer periphery formed in a polygonal shape (in this example, a hexagonal shape) and the front end closed, and a cylinder of the back lower right unit base 3602 inside. The portion 3602b can be inserted, and has a shaft portion 3630a extending long rearward from the center of the bottom portion and a discharge port 3630b formed in a predetermined position on the outer periphery and penetrating in the radial direction, and has a predetermined decoration on the outer surface. A lower right rotating decorative body 3630 having a part of the front surface having translucency is provided. The bottom right rotating decorative body 3630 has a shaft portion 3630a extending rearward so as to pass through the cylindrical cover 3614 and the cylindrical first driven pulley 3606 and to extend rearward from the first driven pulley 3606. In addition, the shaft portion 3606a of the first driven pulley 3606 is rotatably supported independently of the first driven pulley 3606 (rotating cylinder 3608). Further, as shown in the figure, the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630 is provided with an arrow-shaped decoration extending toward the outer periphery in which the discharge port 3630b is formed on the front surface, and the position of the discharge port 3630b is recognized from the front side. It can be done.

  Further, the back lower right rendering unit 3600 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft portion 3630a of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and is arranged on the rear side of the first driven pulley 3606, and extends outwardly to the detection piece 3632a. The second driven pulley 3632 and the second driven pulley 3632 can be rotated to a position above the first drive pulley 3616 on the rear side of the lower right lower unit base 3602 (in the main body 3602a) at the same position in the front-rear direction. A second driving pulley 3634 having a pulley portion 3634a supported by the pulley portion, a spur gear-like gear portion 3634b fixed to the rear side of the pulley portion 3634a, a pulley portion 3634a of the second driving pulley 3634, and a second driven pulley 3632 A second belt 3636 wound around the second driving gear 3638 meshing with the gear portion 3634b of the second driving pulley 3634; A back lower right second drive motor 3640 that is fixed to a rotary shaft in which the two drive gears 3638 penetrate the back lower right unit case 3604 and extend to the front side, and is attached to the rear surface of the back lower right unit case 3604; A back lower right second detection sensor 3641 which is attached to a predetermined position of the base 3602 and can detect the detection piece 3632a of the second driven pulley 3632.

  In this back lower right rendering unit 3600, when the second drive pulley 3634 is driven to rotate by the back lower right second drive motor 3640 via the second drive gear 3638, the second driven pulley 3632 is moved via the second belt 3636. It rotates, and the back lower right rotation decoration 3630 rotates. In addition, by detecting the detection piece 3632a of the second driven pulley 3632 by the back lower right second detection sensor 3641, the rotational position of the lower right lower rotation decoration body 3630 can be detected via the second driven pulley 3632. It is like that.

  In addition, the back lower right effect unit 3600 abuts on the inner circumferences of the first belt 3618 and the second belt 3636 and is rotatably supported on the back lower right unit base 3602 coaxially. The idler pulley 3642 for changing the passing position of the belt 3636, the outer periphery of the first belt 3618 and the second belt 3636 abuts on the back lower right unit base 3602, and is rotatably supported coaxially. A tension pulley 3644 for applying tension to the two belts 3636.

  This back lower right effect unit 3600 rotates the rotating cylinder 3608 by the back lower right first drive motor 3622 so that the circumferential direction in which the specific housing recess 3608a is opened is discharged in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602. The rotation is stopped so as to coincide with the portion 3602c, and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is rotated by the back lower right second drive motor 3640 so that the discharge port 3630b is a discharge portion in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602. In a state where the rotation is stopped so as to coincide with 3602c, the lower right discharge solenoid 3624 is driven to rotate the discharge flap 3612, and the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 is moved to the lower right unit base 3602. When matched with the discharge part 3602c in the cylindrical part 3602b, a specific The effect balls 3610 accommodated in containers recess 3608A, and is capable to be released to the outside through the outlet 3630b of the back lower right rotary decorative body 3630.

  Further, the lower right rendering unit 3600 is attached at a position substantially lower than the cylindrical portion 3602b on the front surface of the main body portion 3602a of the lower right lower unit base 3602 at the same height as the recovery port 3602f. A recovery unit base 3650 having a communication port 3650a extending outward from one end side (left end side in front view) and penetrating in the front-rear direction communicating with the recovery port 3602f, and attached to the front surface of the recovery unit base 3650 and rear side And an end portion on the side extending outward from the main body 3602a. The upper end and the side of the main body 3602a extending outward from the center in the left-right direction are open. A shaft portion 3652a extending rearward from the upper portion of the storage space, and a communication port 3650a of the recovery unit base 3650 from the center in the left-right direction with respect to the shaft portion 3652a. Headed includes a collection unit cover 3652 having a recovery passage 3652b that is inclined to be lower, the.

  The lower right effect unit 3600 includes a bearing portion 3654a that is rotatably supported by the shaft portion 3652a of the recovery unit cover 3652, and a shallow dish-shaped ball receiver that is formed above the bearing portion 3654a and is open upward. A ball receiving member 3654 having a portion 3654b, a connecting pin 3654c extending rearward from the lower side of the bearing portion 3654a, and a contact portion 3654d disposed on the lower side of the connecting pin 3654c, and a connecting pin 3654c of the ball receiving member 3654 A connecting portion 3656a that can be connected, a shaft portion 3656b that is disposed below the connecting portion 3656a and that is supported by the recovery unit cover 3652 so as to be rotatable about the axis in the front-rear direction, and rearward from the lower side of the shaft portion 3656b The recovery link member 3656 having a transmission pin 3656c extending to the link member 3656c and the transmission pin 3656c of the link member 3656 A recovery slider 3658 connected to the front end and supported by a recovery unit base 3650 and a recovery unit cover 3652 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a distal end of a plunger that moves forward and backward at the base end of the recovery slider 3658 are attached. A back lower right recovery solenoid 3660 supported by the unit cover 3652, and an upper end portion of the recovery unit base 3650 and a portion of the recovery unit cover 3652 extending outward in the left-right direction from the main body portion 3602a of the lower right lower unit base 3602. And a transparent ball receiving cover 3662 covering the outer periphery of the ball receiving member 3654.

  The ball receiving member 3654 includes a pair of arm portions 3654e extending in an arc shape centering on the shaft portion 3652a from both left and right sides of the ball receiving portion 3654b, and one arm (left side in front view). The portion 3654e is formed to extend to the contact portion 3654d. As shown in the figure, the ball receiving member 3654 is formed such that the appearance of the ball receiving portion 3654b is shaped like a bowl, and a pair of arm portions 3654e are shaped like the arms of a predetermined character. It is formed in a shape that supports the bowl with both arms from below.

  In this back lower right effect unit 3600, the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 matches the discharge portion 3602c in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602, and the discharge of the discharge port 3630b in the back lower right rotating decoration 3630b. The effect ball 3610 emitted from the discharge port 3630b can be received by the ball receiving portion 3654b. Further, the back lower right effect unit 3600 can tilt the ball receiving member 3654 via the recovery link member 3656 by driving the lower right lower recovery solenoid 3660, and the tilted ball receiving portion The effect sphere 3610 can be dropped from the 3654b into the recovery passage 3652b of the recovery unit cover 3652, and the effect sphere 3610 can be sent to the recovery port 3602f of the back lower right unit base 3602.

  The lower right effect unit 3600 is a box-like shape extending in the vertical direction and has an opening 3670a that opens forward to the top and is large enough to allow the effect ball 3610 to enter. A pair of sliding pins 3670b that are slidably inserted into the guide slit 3604a of 3604 and are spaced apart from each other, formed on one end side in the left-right direction (left end side in front view) on the rear surface and extended in the up-down direction. A rack gear 3670c, a ball lift member 3670 having a detection piece 3670d extending outward from the rack gear 3670c and disposed between the recovery unit base 3602 and the recovery unit cover 3604, and an opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 The front edge side is rotatably supported on the lower edge front end side, and the rear edge side extends into the ball lift member 3670. And a movable bottom plate 3672 having an operating piece 3672a projecting forward and extending to the other end in the left-right direction of the ball lift member 3670 on the front edge side, and a spur gear meshing with the rack gear 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 And a third drive gear 3684 is fixed to a rotating shaft extending through the back lower right unit case 3604 and extending to the front side, and is attached to the rear surface of the back lower right unit case 3604. A three-drive motor 3676 and a back lower right third detection sensor 3678 attached to a predetermined position of the back lower right unit cover 3604 and capable of detecting the detection piece 3670d of the ball lift member 3670.

  The back lower right effect unit 3600 can slide the ball lift member 3670 in the vertical direction by rotationally driving the third drive gear 3675 by the back lower right third drive motor 3676. In addition, the raising / lowering position of the ball lift member 3670 can be detected by detecting the detection piece 3670d of the ball lift member 3670 by the back lower right third detection sensor 3678.

  The bottom right rendering unit 3600 has its opening 3670a coincident with the recovery port 3602f of the bottom right unit base 3602 in a state where the ball lift member 3670 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball receiving member 3654 The effect ball 3610 sent from the side enters the ball lift member 3670 through the recovery port 3602f and the opening 3670a. At this time, the movable bottom plate 3672 on which the effect ball 3610 is placed is in a state where the rear edge side is lowered, and the effect ball 3610 is held in the ball lift member 3670. In this state, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 is raised so as to coincide with the return port 3602e of the back lower right unit base 3602, the operating piece 3672a of the movable bottom plate 3672 is backed immediately before it substantially coincides with the return port 3602e. The lower edge unit base 3602 is in contact with an abutting portion (not shown) and is rotated so that the rear edge side becomes higher. As a result, when the opening 3670a coincides with the return port 3602e, the effect ball 3610 in the ball lift member 3670 rolls forward by the movable bottom plate 3672 having a raised rear edge, and passes through the opening 3670a and the return port 3602e. The rotary cylinder 3608 is returned.

  In addition, the back lower right effect unit 3600 is arranged on the upper side of the ball lift member 3670 and has a cylindrical support boss 3680a projecting forward from a substantially vertical center, extending rearward from the rear surface and guiding the recovery unit cover 3604. A backflow preventing rear member 3680 having a pair of sliding pins 3680b slidably inserted into the slit 3604a and spaced apart in the vertical direction, and having a height substantially the same as the return port 3602e in the lower right unit base 3602. The back end is supported by the support boss 3680b of the backflow prevention member 3680 so that the front end side is rotatably and slidable, and the base end side is the back lower right unit cover at a position above the return port 3602e of the back lower right unit base 3602. A rod-shaped rod having a stopper piece 3682a that is rotatably supported on the front side of 3604 and protrudes outward at the base end. The upper end is locked to the middle portion of the material 3682 and the eaves member 3682, and the lower end is engaged to a predetermined position on the front surface of the back lower unit cover 3604, and the eaves member in the direction in which the member 3680 after backflow prevention moves downward And a closing spring 3684 for biasing 3682, and a backflow prevention pre-member 3686 attached to the front surface of the backflow prevention post-member 3680.

  Although not shown, the back lower right unit cover 3604 is provided with a restriction piece that abuts against the stopper piece 3682a of the flange member 3682 and restricts the tip side of the flange member 3682 from rotating downward by a predetermined amount or more. When the stopper piece 3682a of the flange member 3682 is in contact with the restriction piece, the back flow prevention front member 3686 and the back flow prevention rear member 3680 are moved to the rear side of the return port 3602e in the back lower right unit base 3602 via the flange member 3682. The descent can be stopped at the position. This prevents the effect ball 3610 from moving from the rotating cylinder 3608 side to the rear side of the main body 3602a through the return port 3602e. When the ball lift member 3670 rises and contacts the lower end, the pre-backflow prevention member 3686 and the backflow prevention post-member 3680 rise together with the ball lift member 3670.

  Further, the back lower right rendering unit 3600 includes a decorative lens 3688 that is attached to the outside of the cylindrical portion 3602b on the front face of the lower right lower unit base 3602 and has a decoration on the front face. The lower right lower rendering unit 3600 is disposed in the lower right rotation decorative body 3630 and is attached to the front surface of the cylindrical cover 3614 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A back right lower ball receiving decorative board 3692 mounted on the lower side of the ball receiving member 3654 in the unit base 3650 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the upper surface, and a back lower right first drive mounted on the rear surface of the back lower right unit cover 3604. Motor 3622, back lower right first detection sensor 3623, back right lower discharge solenoid 3624, back right lower second drive motor 3640, back right lower second detection sensor 3641, back right lower recovery solenoid 3660, back right lower third drive Connection between the motor 3676 and the back lower right third detection sensor 3678 and the motor drive board 3045, and the back right lower rotation decoration board 3690 and the back right The connection between the Tama受 decorative substrate 3692 and the lamp driving substrate 3041, and a back lower right relay substrate 3694 to each relay, the.

  In this example, the interval (gap) between the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 3602b and the outer periphery of the rotary cylinder 3608 in the lower right lower unit base 3602 is 1/5 to 1/3 of the diameter of the effect ball 3610. It is formed within the range. Further, the rotating cylinder 3608 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and each receiving recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 is formed in the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 by the rotation of the rotating cylinder 3608. On the other hand, they match from above. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to sandwich the effect ball 3610 between the housing recess 3608a and the side notch 3612c, and it is possible to prevent problems such as the rotation cylinder 3608 not rotating. Yes.

  Next, the movement of the back lower right effect unit 3600 of this example will be described. As shown in FIGS. 188 (a) and 189 (A), the back right lower stage production unit 3600 of the present example has the discharge port 3630b of the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630 as the back right lower unit base. The cylindrical portion 3602b of 3602 is stopped in a state substantially coincident with the discharge portion 3602c. Further, in a normal state, the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 does not coincide with the discharge portion 3602c in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602, and is upward with respect to the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b. The position is shifted (non-releasing position), and the opposite rear notch 3612d is in a state of being coincident with the return port 3602e opened in the cylindrical portion 3602b of the main body portion 3602a of the lower right unit base 3602. Yes.

  In a normal state, a production ball 3610 having a different color and pattern is housed in each housing recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 (in this embodiment, a production ball with a striped pattern and a production ball without a striped pattern). It is in the state. Further, in a normal state, the ball lift member 3670 is lowered, and the opening 3670a is in a recovery position in which the opening 3670a coincides with the recovery port 3602f of the back lower right unit base 3602.

  In this normal state, first, as shown in FIG. 188 (b), the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the back lower right second drive motor 3640. Thereby, it can be suggested to the player that the lottery by the rotary lottery machine has been started. Then, the rotation of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is stopped so that the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 coincides with the discharging portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b of the lower right lower unit base 3602 (FIG. 189). (See (A)). In this example, the direction of rotation of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 rotates in an appropriate direction according to the gaming state.

  Subsequently, the rotary cylinder 3608 is rotated counterclockwise by the back lower right first drive motor 3622 so that a desired color effect ball 3610 is accommodated and the accommodation recess 3608a is accommodated in the cylindrical portion of the back lower right unit base 3602. In 3602b, it is rotated to a position substantially coinciding with the discharge portion 3602c and stopped (see FIG. 189B).

  In this state, when the lower right discharge solenoid 3624 is driven to rotate the discharge flap 3612 in the counterclockwise direction (discharge position) in a front view, the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 is moved to the lower right lower side. Matching with the discharge part 3602c in the cylindrical part 3602b of the unit base 3602, the effect ball 3610 of a desired color accommodated in the accommodation recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 includes the side cutout part 3612c, the discharge part 3602c, and the discharge port 3630b. And is discharged to the outside of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 (see FIG. 190C).

  When the effect ball 3610 is released from the housing recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608, the rotary cylinder 3608 and the release flap 3612 are reciprocally rotated a plurality of times within a predetermined angle range. As a result, the housing recess 3608a and the side notch 3612c are vibrated to eliminate dimensional errors and positioning errors of the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b, the rotary cylinder 3608, the discharge flap 3612, etc. The production ball 3610 can be reliably discharged from the discharge portion 3602c of the lower right lower unit base 3602.

  Then, the effect ball 3610 released from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is received by the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 facing upward. At this time, since the outer periphery of the ball receiving member 3654 is covered with the transparent ball receiving cover 3662, the ball receiving portion of the ball receiving member 3654 even if the effect ball 3610 is released from the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 vigorously. In addition to being able to be surely received by 3654b, it is possible to show the player the effect ball 3610 released to the ball receiving portion 3654b.

  When a predetermined time elapses after the production ball 3610 is released from the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 to the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654, the back lower right recovery solenoid 3660 is driven and the ball receiving member 3654 is viewed from the front. Rotate clockwise. By this rotation of the ball receiving member 3654, the production ball 3610 received by the ball receiving portion 3654b is released to the collection passage 3652b of the collection unit cover 3652, and rolls on the collection passage 3652b to roll the lower right unit base. It is sent to the recovery port 3602f of 3602 (see FIG. 190 (D)).

  When the production ball 3610 is discharged from the ball receiving member 3654 to the collecting passage 3652b side, the lower right lower collecting solenoid 3660 is driven a plurality of times, so that the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted a plurality of times. Yes. Thus, the effect ball 3610 can be reliably discharged from the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 to the collection passage 3652b side.

  The effect ball 3610 sent to the recovery port 3602f of the back lower right unit base 3602 through the recovery passage 3652b of the recovery unit cover 3652 passes through the recovery port 3602f and is arranged on the rear side and positioned at the recovery position. It enters the ball lift member 3670 from the opening 3670a of the 3670 (see FIG. 191 (a)). In this ball lift member 3670, the movable bottom plate 3672 on which the effect ball 3610 is placed is inclined so that the rear edge side is lowered, and the effect ball 3610 that has entered the ball lift member 3670 is The state comes into contact with the rear wall and is held in the ball lift member 3670.

  When the ball lift component 3670 is raised by the back lower right third drive motor 3676 while the production ball 3610 is held in the ball lift member 3670, the production ball 3610 held inside is also raised (FIG. 191). (See (b)). The actuating piece 3672a of the movable bottom plate 3672 is shown in the lower right unit base 3602 immediately before the return position where the opening 3670a of the rising ball lift member 3670 substantially coincides with the return port 3602e of the lower right unit base 3602. The movable bottom plate 3672 is rotated so as to abut on the abutting portion not to be raised and the rear edge side becomes higher (see FIG. 191 (c)). Thereby, the production ball 3610 on the movable bottom plate 3672 rolls forward in the ball lift member 3670, and the opening 3670 a of the ball lift member 3670, the return port 3602 e of the back lower right unit base 3602, and the discharge flap 3612. It will be returned to the rotating cylinder 3608 side through the rear notch 3612d.

  Since each receiving recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 is sized to receive only one effect ball 3610, the receiving recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 coincides with the return port 3602e of the lower right unit base 3602. When the production ball 3610 is housed inside, the production ball 3610 returned from the ball lift member 3670 to the rotary cylinder 3608 side cannot enter the housing recess 3608a and is stopped at the rear side of the rotary cylinder 3608. It becomes. By rotating the rotating cylinder 3608 in this state, when the empty receiving recess 3608a coincides with the return port 3602e, the effect ball 3610 positioned on the rear side of the rotating cylinder 3608 enters the empty receiving recess 3608a, and the receiving recess It will be accommodated in 3608a. If the effect balls 3610 released from the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 are returned one by one into the accommodation recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608, the effect ball 3610 of a predetermined color can be returned to the original accommodation recess 3608a. it can.

  When the ball lift member 3670 is in the raised state when the effect ball 3610 reaches the collection port 3602f of the back lower right unit base 3602 by rolling the collection passage 3652b of the collection unit cover 3652, Since the rear side of the collection port 3602f of the lower right unit base 3602 is closed by the front surface of the ball lift member 3670 (see FIG. 191 (c)), the effect ball 3610 cannot pass through the collection port 3602f. Then, the state is stopped at the downstream end of the recovery passage 3652b. In this state, when the ball lift member 3670 is lowered and the opening 3670a is aligned with the recovery port 3602f, the effect ball 3610 enters the ball lift member 3670 through the recovery port 3602f and is held.

  Further, in the state in which the ball lift member 3670 is lowered, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), the backflow prevention front member 3686 and the backflow prevention rear member 3680 are positioned on the rear side of the return port 3602e of the back lower right unit base 3602. Thus, the effect ball 3610 does not enter the rear side of the main body 3602a through the return port 3602e from the rotary cylinder 3608 side.

  In the above example, the rotation of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is stopped, and then the rotating cylinder 3608 is rotated so that the housing recess 3608a in which the effect ball 3610 of a desired color is housed is formed on the back lower right unit base. Although the cylindrical portion 3602b in 3602 is made to coincide with the discharge portion 3602c, while the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is rotating, the rotating cylinder 3608 is rotated to accommodate the effect ball 3610 of a desired color. The housing recess 3608a may be made to coincide with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the back lower right unit base 3602.

  Thus, according to the back lower right effect unit 3600 of this example, a movable effect in which a predetermined effect ball 3610 can actually appear can be performed using a rotary lottery machine according to the gaming state. Compared with the production by, a more realistic production can be presented to the player, and the player can be prevented from being entertained and the interest in the game being reduced.

[2-11. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the gaming state. As shown in FIG. 119, FIG. 120, and the like, this liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixed piece 1902 that protrudes outward from both the left and right sides, and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixed piece 1902. It is like that.

  Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into a liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and is projected from the right side in front view. After one fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side in the rear view in the back box 3010, the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion port formed by the locking mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward and closing the insertion slot.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 194), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3, and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  Note that the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses a light-brightness white LED as a backlight.

[2-12. Movable production on game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. FIG. 192 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the rear effect unit. Further, FIG. 193 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the lower back effect unit. In the game board 4 of the present example, as shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in a normal state, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed on the rear side through the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 can be visually recognized from the player side. It is like that.

  Further, in the normal state, the game board 4 has a first elevating decoration body 3218 and a second elevating decoration body 3250 in the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Can be seen from. The back effect unit 3200 is arranged so that the lower part of the second elevating decorative body 3250 slightly covers the front upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a normal state. In this normal state, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 provided in the second elevating decorative body 3250 is partially visible from the lower side of the first elevating decorative body 3218.

  Further, in a normal state, the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the ball receiving member 3654 of the back lower right effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 are located below the distribution space 2530 in the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500. It is arranged so as to be visible from the position to the player side. Note that the ball receiving member 3654 of the back lower right effect unit 3600 is positioned behind the predetermined character body provided in the lower part of the center accessory 2500, and the predetermined character body is the ball receiving member 3654. It seems to support the ball receiving portion 3654b.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, in a normal state, the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 in the back bottom rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are on the left and right outer sides than the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the back front decorative unit. 3100 and the center unit 2500 are located behind the sorting unit 2550 and the back lower right effect unit 3600, respectively, so that they cannot be seen from the player side. Further, in the normal state, the back lower middle decorative body 3450 and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 and the back lower front side decorative body 3530 in the back lower stage production unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are lower than the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is located at the rear side of the decorative member that decorates the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 and is not visible from the player side.

  When the game board 4 of this example moves the second elevating decoration body 3250 from the normal state to the lowered position where the second elevating decorative body 3250 is moved down to the lowest position by driving the back upper second drive motor 3234 of the back upper effect unit 3200, for example, FIG. 2, the second elevating decorative body 3250 is positioned at the upper front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the entire display screen of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is placed on the player side below the first elevating decorative body 3218. Can be seen from. In this state, the head of a predetermined character composed of the first elevating decorative body 3218 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 has its mouth wide open, and the second liquid crystal display is displayed from the mouth. The entire device 3250 is visible to the player side.

  Also, from a normal state, a pair of back and back rear side decorative bodies 3420 are driven by driving the back and back rear side drive motor 3404, the back and back back middle drive motor 3476, and the back and back front drive motor 3508 in the back and bottom rendering unit 3400. When the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506, and the back bottom front side decorative body 3530 are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, they are formed in a substantially arc shape on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 are in a state of being combined in an annular shape, and the inside of the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 is filled with the raised back bottom back rear decorative body 3450. In addition, a pair of back bottom front side decorations 3620 and a back bottom back middle decoration body 3450 are provided on the front side of the back bottom front middle decoration body 3506 from both the left and right sides. 3530 is positioned in a state of out extending obliquely upward (see Figure 193). As a result, a predetermined character with a large semicircular background member on its back is in the state of spreading the wings on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 194 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. The peripheral control board 4010 group includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling the display of the effect image.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 194, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3131 for detecting a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor for detecting a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 3132 and a detection signal from a general winning port sensor 3133 that detects a game ball received in the general winning port 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, a gate sensor 2302, and a general winning port sensor 2123, respectively. , Detection signals from the count sensor 2122, the distribution detection sensor 2580, and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 are sent to the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Or to be entered via

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, whereby the start port solenoid 2114 and the attacker solenoid are connected via the panel relay board 3040. The first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. 1186, first special symbol memory indicator 1184, second special symbol memory indicator 1187, normal symbol indicator 1189, normal symbol memory indicator 1188, gaming status indicator 1183, and round indicator 1190. Or

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, the gate sensor 2302 and the count sensor 2122 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133 use contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2301, so the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, and The detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2302 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, and the gate sensor 2302. In addition, when a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning ball 2103 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2122 also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2122. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 2213 and 3133 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133 are mechanical switches that have a shorter lifetime than the proximity switches.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. (It is described.) BC0 (see B 169) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 194, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like performs a discharge control by a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout, a launch solenoid 654, and a ball feed by a ball feed solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 194, a payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as the payout control input circuit 4111e. To the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and graphics. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 194, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this firing A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. By stopping the output, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see B 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 194, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 194, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 3041, or the gaming board Motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decoration drive board for the game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 4 To transmit to the drive board 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 The light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882, or the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. In addition, control is performed so that music, sound effects and the like according to various effects flow from the lower speaker 821, and the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, and 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter “peripheral control external” The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body driving command, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a flashing signal to the door frame via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 based on the received door frame side lighting / flashing command. 5 is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. It outputs to LED of each decoration board | substrate 2116,2125,2569,3113,3114,3115,3123,3124,3266,3320,3322,3426,3536,3546,3690,3692 etc. with which the game board 4 was equipped. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmits a drive signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received movable body drive command. 414, the drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, 3622, 3640, 3676 and the like provided in the game board 4 and the solenoids 3624, 3660 and the like.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041, the motor drive board 3045, etc. attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the 882, or via the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various productions flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. An acoustic signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Thus, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) having a sense of reality more than before.

[Measures to prevent abnormal noise]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic facilities, LED, and sensors that require electric power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes a side speaker 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of left and right side decoration units, and a lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in a speaker box 820 (FIG. 67) provided in the main body frame 3. Is connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4 and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. An amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit) is provided.

  In addition, the door frame base board 194 is bundled with wires that connect various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and the like to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010, and the like, and extends to the rear. The main frame 3 is connected to the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 on the rear side (FIG. 23).

  In addition, in the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is disposed, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the ball hitting device 650 is launched into the game area 1100. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) for guiding a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the dish unit is provided in the vicinity (FIG. 23).

  The ball path 542b of the foul cover unit 540 passes at a high speed while the game ball (metal) is in contact with the wall surface of the path, so that electrostatic charges are accumulated in this portion of the polycarbonate, which can be as high as 10 kV. Yes (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain from the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, unlike metal, the charge accumulated in the resin can only escape from the periphery even when grounded, and most of it remains.

  Then, the electrostatic induction by this electric charge may cause a malfunction of a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 adjacent thereto. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified to exceed the appropriate amplification width (when it becomes an excessive AC voltage). Occur. If this happens, for example, a cracking sound such as a squealing noise will be generated from the speaker, or the sound played back by the speaker will become a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound will be generated). It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. The digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, but is usually not on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is difficult to hear, the output tends to be set larger.

  The embodiment described below detects whether or not an audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the abnormal audio signal described above, and is an abnormal audio signal. The present invention relates to an invention related to an abnormal sound signal blocking substrate (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the various commands are received. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 194).

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the door frame base substrate 194, and the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821 and the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 provided on the door frame 5 (see FIGS. 194 and 196).

[Abnormal audio signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate will be described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. FIG. 196 is a block diagram of the door frame base substrate 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 197 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884.

  As shown in FIG. 196, the door frame base substrate 194 disposed on the door frame 5 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 disposed on the main body frame 3 are connected by a harness 196, and the door frame base substrate 194 is connected to the periphery. A woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the + 24V voltage and the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the harness 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 196, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 197, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the + 24V voltage, the woofer + signal and the woofer, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194. The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

  In addition, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, are output from the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 to the lower speaker 821, and supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been. Thus, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied to the lower speaker 821.

  By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 is disposed at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by arranging the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 in a place where it is difficult to be affected by electrostatic noise, it is possible to stably suppress an abnormal audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Abnormal audio signal blocking circuit]
The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal. The audio signal is blocked from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 197, the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 includes an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal, and an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. When the output abnormality detection signal is received, an abnormal audio signal cut-off circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of an abnormal audio signal to the lower speaker 821 is provided.

  The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 in the abnormal audio signal cutoff board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

  The woofer + signal that is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, one is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is An abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is input.

  In addition, the woofer signal that is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is branched into two in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, and one is relayed in the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is only connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal audio signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifier bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge shape, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in this embodiment, arranged in a subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit). It is mainly composed of an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF, a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (which includes an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the other woofer signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Furthermore, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifier bridge circuit. A positive voltage line 890 for supplying a positive voltage rectified by a rectifying bridge circuit is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 while a rectifying bridge is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD4 with respect to the subsequent stage. A 0V line 891 is connected to supply 0V, in which the minus portion is cut by the circuit and the voltage is substantially 0V.

  In the subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifier bridge circuit (the waveform of the + voltage in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By applying the voltage to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage, and during the period from the peak voltage of the + voltage waveform to 0V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. In addition to being connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, the base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 having one end connected to a connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the waveform of the + voltage is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, the collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and a smoothed woofer signal after rectification, that is, a + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. In addition, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, after the connection point of the positive voltage line 890 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the positive voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, and the other connected to the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Has been. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  A base terminal of a relay operation transistor STR3 is connected to a connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of a capacitor SC3 having the other end connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  The fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the A contacts) is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the fifth terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. To the external lower speaker 821.

  Further, a varistor SZNR1 for bypassing induced current by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the fifth relay SRL1 is connected. A contact protection varistor SZNR2 is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

  In addition, since the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885. It is like that.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking substrate 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal audio signal (AC voltage waveform with different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conductive, In FIG. 197, current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during a period from 0V of the positive voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an alternating voltage with a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and is kept off.

  Next, during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and in FIG. 197, a current flows from the top to the bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and reaches from the + V waveform 0V to the peak voltage of the peak. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an alternating voltage with a different amplitude peak) is input, the voltage increase due to the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and is kept off.

  Next, during a period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  In this manner, when a normal sound signal (AC voltage waveform having a different amplitude peak) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 maintains an off state. Accordingly, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 are also kept off, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 is not practically turned on.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Relay SRL1 is in an inoperative state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, the non-operating B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 (the contact is closed), and the non-operating between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal. A contact (contact open state). Therefore, the fifth terminal and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as + 24V, + 18V, + 1.5V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conducts, and in FIG. 197, a charging current flows from the top to the bottom through electrolytic resistor SC1 through resistor SR1, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, an increase in the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to an increase in the charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 as time passes is applied. As a result, the voltage reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Accordingly, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2, and the resistor SR4, and is applied to the resistor SR4 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4). , A current flows through the resistor SR5, the Zener diode SZD1, the resistor SR6, and the resistor SR7, and a voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (a voltage appearing at a connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor STR2. As a result, the transistor STR2 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, the resistor SR8, and the resistor SR9. Here, when the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, it means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. Note that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in an excited state, and the relay SRL1 between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal is the B contact at the time of operation (the contact is open), and between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal is in the operating state. A contact (contact closed state). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off for the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888. Thereby, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  In addition, the third terminal and the fourth terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground. Pulled down, the transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the path of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The coil is switched to a conducting state and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the woofer + signal from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 remains cut off.

  In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormal detection signal (photocoupler). Is turned on). When the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply an abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is kept off from the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority on preventing speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal audio signal can be grasped by an attendant or the like, or when the audio output stop state is confirmed, the operation state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input when the audio signal is extremely amplified, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, In FIG. 197, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 conduct, and a charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 197. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the positive voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak. Is done.

  For example, in the case of the woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are turned on, and in FIG. 197, a charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage due to the normal audio signal, the resistance SR1 Through, the charging current rapidly flows into the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

  Therefore, the charge stored in the positive terminal of electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 increases rapidly. Due to this rapid charge increase, the voltage at the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Accordingly, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal sound signal due to the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be described briefly.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal sound signal cut-off circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the relay SRL1 is disconnected from the 5th and 6th terminals. The woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 is blocked from the output from the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1. Thereby, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal audio signal having an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width. Therefore, an unpleasant sound can be prevented from being output to the player.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 194, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c that controls display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 A character ROM 4150d for storing various data, and a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 and Drawing control of the two liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a running signal indicating that fact to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when various persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display apparatus 3252, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Accordingly, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set in a vertical relationship (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition order”) when the sprites are arranged on the screen or when the sprites overlap each other, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device. 3252 is drawn.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 are sequentially scanned from the left to the right when viewed from the front, main scanning for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel, and intersecting the one direction. It is driven by sub-scanning in which main scanning is repeatedly performed in such a direction. When one line of drawing data output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the liquid crystal display device 1900 moves from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. Sequentially output to one line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, Based on the drawing data of the minute, the data is sequentially output to the pixels for one line from the left to the right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning.

[3-5. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 199 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process when a power failure occurs. FIG. 200 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 201 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the change start process. FIG. 204 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 205 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 206 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game preparation process. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game mode determination process, which is a process in the jackpot game preparation process. FIG. 208 is an example of a table used for the jackpot game state determination process when the jackpot flag is ON. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

[About main processing]
As shown in FIG. 198, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a process at power-on (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value when a power failure occurs). If the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings) are executed. , Setting interrupt timing, etc.).

  Note that a gaming state determination process, which will be described later, is executed as one process in the power recovery process.

  Further, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM. Further, if the RAM clear switch 4100c (FIG. 194) for instructing clearing of backup data stored in the RAM at the time of power-on processing is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. In addition, when backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) during the power-on process, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game, such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is shut off. Note that the backup data is stored in the RAM even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supplying to the device.

  Therefore, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  When the power interruption occurs, the processing of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In this process, the state at the time of the occurrence of a power failure is stored as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[Processing when a power failure occurs]
Next, as shown in FIG. 199, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, a checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply.

  In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms interrupt period by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 4100a executes the processing from step S11 to step S19 after executing the register saving process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed.

  In the timer subtraction process in step S12, it is determined whether or not the timer values of various timers are set. If the timer value is set, the timer value is decremented by 1. For example, when “500” is set as a value corresponding to 2 seconds (2000 ms) in the timer, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, the timer value is incremented by 1 every time the timer subtraction process is performed in the 4 ms period. Subtraction is performed, and when the subtraction result becomes 0, the time is up, and the time is accurately measured.

  In the random number update process 1 in step S13, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well.

  In the payout operation process in step S14, a payout command for instructing the payout control board 4110 to pay out the game ball is set based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Also, in the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid 2121). The opening / closing member 2106) for opening and closing the special winning opening 2103) is controlled, and a process for changing the open / closed state of the special winning opening 2103 is executed.

  In the normal control process in step S16, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102 by the start port solenoid 2344) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / close state of the second start port 2102 is executed.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S17, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer or the like), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed.

  In the command transmission process of step S18, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed.

  When the processing from step S11 to step S18 is executed, the return processing of the register (step S19) is executed, the timer interruption processing is finished, and the determination processing of whether or not the power failure warning signal in step S2 is detected and step S3. The process returns to the loop process constituted by the random number update process 2 in FIG.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the jackpot determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state (also called the jackpot determination or jackpot lottery), the jackpot gaming state in the jackpot determination A big hit design random number (design random number) used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to be generated, high expectation such as reach production when it is judged that it is not a big hit (losing) in the jackpot lottery Used to determine the reach determination random number used for determination (reach determination) on whether or not to produce effects, and the special symbol variable display patterns (variation time, etc.) displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186. Fluctuation display pattern random number (variable time random number), winning prize 21 in jackpot game (special bonus game) 3, a random number for determining the number of rounds used to determine the open mode (number of rounds, etc.), determination of whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102 to be in an open state (per lottery) Random numbers for determining normal hits used for determination).

  The jackpot symbol random number (symbol random number) is also used for determining the jackpot state type (whether to activate the probability variation function or the short-time function, etc.) performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won. Is done.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the jackpot determination random number related to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot symbol random number (symbol random number), the round number determination random number, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 are controlled to be open. The random number for judgment per normal symbol related to whether or not to do is updated. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and whether to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that the jackpot gaming state is generated, probability to determine to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to be in the open state) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant. It is possible to prevent the player from entering an unfavorable state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

  Although not shown in FIG. 200, in the timer interruption process, a distribution drive motor 2558 that rotates a distribution unit 2550 (more specifically, a distribution valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the distribution shaft 2552). The drive control process is also performed.

[About special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 201 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, first and second start opening prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102. Then, after the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

  More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning process (step S110) is finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ( YES in step S120), a fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start process (step S130), after the setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery for the big hit, etc., the processing flag is updated to “1”. .

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 (the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator). After the change display of the special symbol (identification symbol) from the start to the stop display is determined in any of 1186, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 uses the special time indicator 1186 based on the time-out. Stop changing the symbol display. Thereafter, when it is determined in the change start process (step S130) that the jackpot is won, the process selection flag is updated to “3”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is lost (losing), the process selection flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next timer interruption process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game preparation process (step S200) is executed. In the jackpot game preparation process, a condition device which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game is operated to perform a process of determining the mode of the jackpot game and the mode of the determined jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) ) Is set, and the accessory continuous activation device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated, and the processing flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  If the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), the processing flag is 4, and the big hit game processing (step S210) is executed. In the jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the jackpot game mode set in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607). Further, when the big hit game is finished, the processing flag is updated to “0” after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next timer interruption process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  Thus, the special control process is terminated when any one of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, and step S210 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting entrance prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of the first / second start opening winning process.

  In the first / second start opening winning process (step S110), the process is largely related to the determination on whether or not a game ball has been won at the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102, and the winning. On the condition that it is determined that there has been, the process related to the update of the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is performed.

  Accordingly, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from second start port sensor 3132, it is determined that a game ball has been won at second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired and the second control symbol 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) provided in the RAM of the second control symbol 4100 is obtained. It is determined whether or not the value of the hold count counter is less than 4 which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a, first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data obtained by winning a game ball at the second start port 2102 (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol use) A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with a special symbol type or a reservation order. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command is set to indicate that a game ball has been won at the second starting port 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S18). In such a configuration, when the suspension display on the second start port 2102 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, this can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the detection signal is 4, next, as a process of step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131, it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first start port 2101 (YES in step S205), and the next Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first special symbol lottery (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first holding number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is obtained. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first start port 2101 (a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot symbol random number) as the first start hold storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

  Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-described command transmission process (step S18). In such a configuration, it is possible to update the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like on hold on the first start port 2101 side quickly through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that no game ball has been won at the first start port 2101 or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  As will be described later, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102, a big hit is determined together with a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number, or the like. A game mode determination random number (for example, a round number determination random number) is not acquired. Accordingly, the random number for determining the jackpot game mode is not acquired in this way, and the open mode at the jackpot 2103 remains undecided (the middle stage of a series of lottery processes for the execution of the jackpot game). A game is advanced by determining a variation pattern, a stop symbol, and the like. Note that the jackpot game mode determination random number is obtained when the game ball passes through the gate 2575 (the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R) after the special symbol is stopped, and is used for the jackpot game mode determination process. (See FIG. 207).

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) for the second starting port 2102 is executed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) for the first starting port 2101 is executed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process to the first starting port 2101 is executed, the winning process to the second starting port 2102 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, a jackpot lottery, a probable variation lottery, and determination of a variable display pattern, which will be described later), and a process for determining the lottery result in advance. It is. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance determination process, by comparing the random number and the advance determination table, a lottery result (a winner of the jackpot, a type of jackpot, a variation display pattern, etc.) when the lottery using the random number is performed is determined. (The determination made in advance of the lottery is also called “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed ( Also called “Direction”).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values (first start memory) of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186. It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start memory number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 are the storage areas for the first start memory and the second start memory (the disturbances stored in the special symbol hold memory means 4214 and 4224). Therefore, if the value of the hold number counter is “0” in this step S301 (YES), the first special symbol variation process and the second special symbol variation process are related. It is determined that none of the start conditions is satisfied, the fluctuation start process is exited, the special control process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is “0” (NO in step S301), it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, and execution of the jackpot lottery that is put on hold is performed. In order to update the order, the special symbol hold storage means 4214 and 4224 perform shift processing (steps S302 to S310).

  Incidentally, each of the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 is provided with four storage areas. In each of these storage areas, a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number, a jackpot determination random number (symbol random number), a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, etc. are stored. A design random number storage area is provided.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage units 4214 and 4224 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes.

  In the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the lottery (the lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning at the second start port 2102 is performed. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 are manipulated so that all are digested first.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 203, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol display 1186 that is preferentially digested. It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start storage number) corresponding to is “0”, that is, whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224. As a result, if it is determined that a random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 (NO in step S302), the random number related to the second special symbol is read from the storage area and is read out. Obtain (step S303). In other words, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot design random number (symbol design random number), the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number) are not limited to the processing of the jackpot lottery. The second start port is provided for processing for setting a variation pattern (variation time, stop display mode, etc.), processing for setting an opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, processing for setting a gaming state, and the like. The second starting game can be progressed with the winning of the game ball to 2102 as an opportunity.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a uses various random numbers stored in the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas to update the digestion rank related to the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side. Each shift is made to the first storage area (step S304). As a result, at least a storage area becomes empty, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the empty has occurred.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S306). Further, at this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1187 so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting mode in the second special symbol memory display 1187. Is done. Note that the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way is reset when, for example, the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing ends.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 203, if it is determined in the process of step S302 that no random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol storage unit 4224 (YES in step S302), A random number related to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area of the one special symbol storage unit 4214 and obtained (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is not only the process related to the jackpot lottery, but also the process related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the process related to the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, The first start game that is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 can be advanced by being provided to the processing related to the above.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a uses various random numbers stored in the n-th (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas to update the digestion rank related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, n− Each shift is made to the first storage area (step S308). As a result, at least a storage area becomes empty, and new start information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area where the empty has occurred.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “2” in the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side (first start game) is in progress (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). Further, at this time, the drive control relating to lighting of the lamp 1184 is also performed so that the number of reservations for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side thus updated is also reflected in the lighting mode in the first special symbol memory display 1184. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to “2” is reset when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation function is not activated. A jackpot determination table for the hour, that is, a table with a low probability of being a jackpot, is selected. On the other hand, if the probability variation state is set (YES in step S312), the table when the probability variation function is activated, that is, a jackpot. Select a table with a high probability. In this example, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to 1 / 399.6 when the probability changing function is not activated (ie, normal), and the jackpot is set when the probability changing function is activated (ie, when the probability is high). Is set to 1 / 49.9.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the jackpot determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315). If it is a jackpot value (YES in step S315), a jackpot symbol random number (symbol random number) related to any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307, and FIG. By comparing with the symbol determination table shown in A), it is determined whether the jackpot is of a type that activates the probability variation function or the time reduction function (a state type related to the gaming state) (step S316). As a result, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot state type determined in step S316 is set to ON (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  However, the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment determines only the expected value of the winning ball amount for the lottery related to the execution mode (number of rounds) of the big hit game in the process of step S316. As will be described later, for the lottery for determining the number of rounds, after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped and displayed, the game ball passes through the gate 2575 and the random number for determining the jackpot game state (the random number for determining the number of rounds). ) Is obtained until the expected value of the winning ball amount is maintained in the determined state, so that one of a series of lottery processes (game lottery relating to the progress of the game) relating to the execution of the jackpot game While the lottery process (for example, the lottery concerning the number of rounds) is not yet performed, the special symbol change is started and stopped.

  In such a configuration, the prize for the execution mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) that may affect the profit itself that the player can enjoy until the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the jackpot (special bonus). Only by determining the expected value of the ball amount, the execution mode of the jackpot game to be executed is left without being determined.

  That is, in this case, even if the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the jackpot, a series of lottery processing (game lottery for the progress of the game) is not completed and the processing stage is still in progress (winning) Since the execution mode of the after game has not yet been determined, the game is maintained in a state in which it is impossible to execute the game after winning.

  In addition, the mid-stage processing stage as the game lottery is based on the jackpot winning because the game ball is newly launched by the player and can be maintained until it is received by the gate 2575. Even after the special symbol is stopped, until the jackpot game is started, for example, the expected effect on the result of the above-mentioned game lottery is performed without the information being exposed by the round indicator 648 or the like. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the game interest until the jackpot game is actually executed.

  If the processing flag is updated to [1] in step S318, the processing in step S301 is not performed unless the processing flag is updated to [0]. Become.

  On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), the process proceeds to step S318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is selected, as the jackpot symbol random number (design random number), for example, 0 to 199 as described above. Random number values generated with a random number width are prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as the value of the jackpot symbol random number (design random number). The acquired random number value is subjected to a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot state type that activates the probability variation function and the time reduction function in the process of step S316.

  However, in the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607) described later, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened and closed based on the status type of the jackpot and the side selected by the player among the sorting detection sensor 2580L or the sorting detection sensor 2580R. It is decided to be one of the jackpot games that repeats over a predetermined round with a predetermined opening / closing pattern.

  The predetermined opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2106 means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2106 is opened from the closed state or a predetermined short time (for example, 0. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2106 is returned to the closed state when one of the conditions that 5 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the big winning opening 2103 is satisfied. Therefore, as the number of rounds in which the opening / closing member 2106 is repeatedly executed in a predetermined long time in a predetermined opening / closing pattern increases, a larger amount of prize balls as a privilege can be substantially acquired by the player.

  In the jackpot game mode determination process according to the present embodiment, lottery of the number of rounds repeatedly executed in the jackpot game is performed. However, a plurality of prize balls that can be obtained by the player are different in degree. As long as it is determined as one of the jackpot game modes, it is not limited to this. For example, instead of the jackpot game mode that is repeatedly performed over a plurality of rounds with a predetermined opening / closing pattern, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened only once, but the jackpot game mode in which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened for a long time. Also good.

[About symbol determination table]
Next, the symbol determination table used when determining the jackpot state type in step S316 of the variation start process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (A), the symbol determination table includes each judgment result (12R accuracy variation per unit, 10R accuracy variation A per unit, 10R accuracy variation B per unit, 10R accuracy variation C per unit, 10R normal variation per unit, variable R accuracy variation per unit, 4R accuracy variation per unit. The symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with the big hit, 4R normal big hit. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot (and its determination probability) determined based on the first symbol random number and the type of jackpot (and its determination probability) determined based on the second symbol random number Are set differently.

In particular,
1. In the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607), the 12R jackpot gaming state (substantially 4R jackpot gaming state) is determined, and the non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state, high probability non-time-short state) and time-short state (low 2R probability change jackpot that controls to a high probability time-short state after the 12R jackpot gaming state ends in either case (probability short-time state or high-probability short-time state). The jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607) determines the 10R jackpot gaming state (substantially 4R jackpot gaming state), and the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state in both the non-short-time state and the short-time state. 2. 10R probability variation A jackpot that will be controlled to a short state with high probability later. In the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607), the 10R jackpot gaming state (substantially 4R jackpot gaming state) is determined, and if the low probability non-time-short state is controlled, the 10R jackpot gaming state is increased after the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state. 3. Control to a probabilistic non-short-time state, and if controlled to a high-probability non-short-time state and a short-time state, control to a high-probability short-time state after the 10R jackpot gaming state ends. In the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607), the 10R jackpot gaming state (substantially 4R jackpot gaming state) is determined, and when the non-time-short state is controlled, a high probability of non-probability after the 10R jackpot gaming state ends. 4. Control to the short-time state, and if it is controlled to the short-time state, control to the high-probability short-time state after the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state. The jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607) determines the 10R jackpot gaming state (substantially 4R jackpot gaming state), and the end of the 10R jackpot gaming state in both the non-short-time state and the short-time state. Later, 10R normal jackpot to control to low probability non-time-short state (normal state) The execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607). If the game mode is controlled in a non-short-time state, the determined jackpot game execution mode (round) In the case of controlling to the high probability non-short-time state after the end of the jackpot gaming state in the number), the end of the jackpot gaming state in the execution mode (number of rounds) of the determined jackpot game when controlled to the short-time state 6. Variable R-probability jackpot that will be controlled to a high probability short-time state later. In the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607), the 4R jackpot gaming state (no actual departure) is determined. If the game is controlled to the non-time saving state, the high probability non-time shortening after the 4R jackpot gaming state ends. If the control is in the short-time state, the 4R jackpot game state is controlled after the 4R jackpot gaming state is finished. In the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S607), the 4R jackpot gaming state (no actual departure) is determined, and after the 4R jackpot gaming state ends in any of the non-short-time state and the short-time state. Is a 4R normal jackpot that controls to a low probability non-short state (normal state)

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. The symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is set so that the judgment value distribution is different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 208 (A), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, per 12R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 10R normal big hit per 10R normal big hit In the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the determination value distribution is set only for the variable R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, and 4R normal big hit. Has been.

  In this example, as the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 per round in the big hit gaming state, a long opening time (for example, 28.5 seconds) and a short opening time extremely short (for example, 28.5 seconds) , 0.5 seconds). And in the short opening round, since the opening time of the opening / closing member 2106 is too short, even if the opening control of the opening / closing member 2106 is recognized, it is difficult to win a game ball in the big winning opening 2103. . That is, in a round with a short opening, game balls are rarely won at the big winning opening 2103, and unlike a round with a long opening, it is not possible to expect to acquire a gaming ball.

  Further, in this example, when 12R probability variation jackpot is reached, the 12R jackpot gaming state is determined by combining 4 rounds as the rounds for long-time release and 8 rounds as the rounds for short-time release. Become. On the other hand, in the case of 10R probability variation A big hit, 10R probability variation B big hit, 10R probability variation C big hit, 10R normal big hit, 4 rounds for the long open period and 6 rounds for the short open period The combined 10R jackpot gaming state will be determined. In the case of these jackpots, there is a difference between the 12R jackpot game state and the 10R jackpot game state, but the number of rounds that are open for a long time is the same, and it is difficult to win a game ball to the big prize opening 2103 The number of award balls that can be obtained by the player is substantially the same since only the number of rounds for short-time opening is different.

  Further, in this example, when the variable R probability variation jackpot is reached, the jackpot game execution mode (number of rounds) is determined in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) described later. Since all the rounds are composed of rounds that are open for a long time, the player can acquire a larger number of prize balls as the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state increases.

  Further, in this example, when 4R probability variation jackpot and 4R normal jackpot are reached, all four rounds are determined to be 4R jackpot gaming states composed of short-opening rounds. The game ball rarely wins, and unlike the round that is open for a long time, it cannot be expected to acquire the game ball.

  Although details will be described later, in a non-temporal state (low probability non-temporal short state, high probability non-temporal short state), even if a game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, the pair of movable pieces 2105 in the second start port 2102 Driving is not performed. For this reason, in the non-time-short state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 occurs, and the reserved ball of the second special symbol is Except for some cases, only the first special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1185 is executed, and the big hits related to the first special symbol (12R probability variable big hit, 10R positive variable A big hit, 10R positive variable B big hit, 10R positive variable C) Jackpot, 10R normal jackpot) will occur. On the other hand, in the short-time state (high probability short-time state, low probability short-time state), the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, thereby driving the pair of movable pieces 2105 in the second start port 2102. Therefore, in the short-time state, a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 2102 occurs, and the second special symbol display 1186 changes in the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol. The display is executed, and a jackpot (variable R probability variable jackpot, 4R probability variable jackpot, 4R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, in the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the 12R jackpot game state or the 10R jackpot game state is controlled as the jackpot game state (both are 4R jackpot game states because the rounds of long-time release are four rounds). On the other hand, the big hit related to the second special symbol can be controlled to the 16R big hit gaming state as the big hit gaming state at the time of the variable R probability variable big hit. In a short time state in which a game based on winning of a game ball is executed, a larger number of prize balls can be obtained than in a non-short time state in which a game based on winning a game ball to the first start port 2101 is executed. It is possible.

  Further, when determining the type of jackpot, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to a mode when the first special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second symbol on the second special symbol indicator 1186. It is determined as the mode when the special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when 12R probability variation jackpot is determined, 12R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol, and when 10R probability variation A jackpot is determined, 10R probability variation A jackpot symbol is determined as jackpot symbol, and 10R probability variation B is determined. If the jackpot is determined, the 10R probability variation B jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 10R probability variation C jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, the 10R probability variation C jackpot symbol is determined, and the 10R normal jackpot symbol is determined. If you decide on the 10R normal jackpot symbol as the jackpot symbol, if you decide on the variable R probability jackpot symbol, decide on the variable R stochastic jackpot symbol as the jackpot symbol, and if you decide on the 4R stochastic jackpot symbol on the 4R probability jackpot symbol as the jackpot symbol 4R normal as a jackpot symbol when 4R normal jackpot is determined We are determined per symbol.

  In this example, in step S411 of the variation pattern setting process to be described later, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set as an effect command, and a winning information command (such as a winning for a big hit) is set. The set effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18). Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the left / middle / right decoration pattern variation display based on the variation pattern indicated by the received effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command, and the left decoration symbol → right decoration Display control is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 so that the display is stopped and displayed in the order of symbols → medium decoration symbols.

  Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped, is a jackpot (12R probability variation jackpot) related to the first special symbol from the received winning information command. 10R probability variation A jackpot, 10R probability variation B jackpot, 10R probability variation C jackpot, 10R normal jackpot) are determined to be the same combination of decorative symbols, and when the variation time specified from the production command has passed (reach production) At the time of completion, the liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped from fluctuating, it can be determined that it is a big hit from the stopped symbol, but the 12R positive variation big hit, the 10R positive variation A big hit, the 10R positive variation B big hit. Either 10R probability variation C big hit or 10R normal big hit cannot be determined.

  In this example, after the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the game ball is passed through the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, so that the 12R big hit game state is obtained as the big hit game state. Alternatively, the game is controlled to 10R big hit gaming state (both are 4R big hit gaming state since the rounds of long-time release are all four rounds), and the rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is executed. It has become. In this rattling lottery effect, when a game ball passes through the so-called right-handed hitting detection sensor 2580L or the splitting detection sensor 2580R and is detected, the time is shortened after the end of the big hit gaming state based on the winning information command. The function is a jackpot (12R probability variable jackpot or 10R probability variable A jackpot at low probability non-short time, 12R probability variable jackpot at 10R probability variable A jackpot or 10R probability variable A jackpot or 10R probability variable B jackpot at high probability non-short time), or short time after the jackpot gaming state ends An effect that suggests whether the function is a big hit (10R probability variable B big hit or 10R positive variable C big hit or 10R normal big hit or 10R positive C big hit or 10R normal big hit when the high probability non-short time) The result is derived.

  Specifically, as a result of the rattle lottery effect, if the jackpot related to the first special symbol from the received winning information command is identified as the jackpot for which the short-time function is activated after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot game If the result is determined to be a jackpot that suggests that the short-time function is activated after the end of the state, and a jackpot that does not activate the short-time function after the end of the jackpot gaming state is specified, the jackpot that does not activate the short-time function after the end of the jackpot gaming state The production result suggests

  Here, when an effect result that suggests a jackpot in which the short-time function is activated after the end of the jackpot game state is derived as the effect result of the rattle lottery effect, the 12R jackpot game state or the 10R jackpot game state (both are rounds that are open for a long time). Since it is 4 rounds, it is possible to determine that the control is made to the high-probability time-short state after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state). After the 12R jackpot gaming state or the 10R jackpot gaming state is finished, the probability variation function and the time shortening function are activated, and the high probability time shortening is entered by entering a probability changing mode in which it can be determined that the high probability time shortening state. It can be clearly determined that the state is controlled.

  On the other hand, when an effect result that suggests a jackpot that does not activate the time-saving function after the end of the jackpot game state is derived as the effect result of the rattle lottery effect, the 10R jackpot game state (both rounds that are open for a long time must be four rounds) Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether to control to the low probability non-time-short state or to control to the high probability non-time-short state after the end of (4R jackpot gaming state). After the 10R jackpot gaming state ends, regardless of whether or not the probability variation function is activated, whether or not the high probability non-time short state is entered is entered into a probability variation latent mode in which it is difficult to determine the high probability non- It is not possible to determine whether or not the time-short state is controlled.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped, receives a variable R probability variable jackpot from among the bonus symbols related to the second special symbol from the received winning information command. If specified, the combination of the same decorative symbols is determined, and the determined stop symbol is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the variation time specified from the effect command has elapsed (when the reach effect ends). As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped from being fluctuated, it is determined from the stopped symbol that the variable R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the high probability time-short state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends. Can be determined. After the big hit gaming state is finished, the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated, and the high probability time reduction state is maintained by continuing the probability changing mode in which the high probability time reduction state can be determined. And can be clearly distinguished.

  In this example, after the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the game ball is passed to the side selected by the player in the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. After selecting either “one-shot notification type” or “rush type”, control is made into a jackpot gaming state with the jackpot game execution mode (number of rounds) determined in the jackpot game mode determination process (step S607) described later. In addition, a rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is executed. In this rattle lottery effect, when a game ball passes through the so-called right-handed hitting detection sensor 2580L or the splitting detection sensor 2580R and is detected, a big hit gaming state determination process ( An effect result indicating the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game in the jackpot game state determined in step S607) is derived.

  Although details will be described later, when the player selects the “one notification type” by passing the game ball to the distribution detection sensor 2580R side, either the 2R jackpot gaming state or the 16R jackpot gaming state is selected. Have decided to control. When the 2R jackpot gaming state is specified as the jackpot gaming state from the received round information command as the effect result of the rattle lottery effect, the rendering result suggesting the 2R jackpot gaming state is determined, and the jackpot gaming state is determined as 16R jackpot. When the gaming state is specified, it is determined as an effect result suggesting a 16R jackpot gaming state. Also, by deriving the effect result of the rattling lottery effect by the end of the 2nd round in the jackpot gaming state, when the effect result that suggests the 16R jackpot gaming state is derived, the jackpot up to the 16th round after the end of the 2nd round It can be determined that the gaming state continues.

  On the other hand, if the player selects the “rush type” by passing the game ball to the side of the distribution detection sensor 2580L, the game state will be one of the 6R, 8R, 10R, 12R, 14R, and 16R jackpot gaming states. Decide to control. In addition, it is possible to derive the effect result of the rattle lottery effect by the end of each of the 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 rounds in the jackpot game state (that is, the rattle lottery effect is performed multiple times every two rounds) If it is specified that the round is to be continued after the end of the round from which the production result of the rattle lottery effect is derived based on the received round information command, two rounds after that round are specified. If it is determined to be the production result that suggests that the minute has been added, and it is decided to end the jackpot gaming state in the round in which the production result of the rattle lottery production is derived, two rounds will not be added The effect result indicating that the jackpot gaming state is ended is determined. For example, when an effect result indicating that two rounds have been added after the sixth round is derived by deriving the effect result of the rattle lottery effect by the end of the sixth round in the jackpot game state, Even after the end of the round, it can be determined that the jackpot gaming state is continued for at least 8 rounds.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the 4R probability change big hit or 4R among the big wins related to the second special symbol from the received winning information command as the mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped. Normally, when a jackpot is specified, it is determined to be an outlier design with a reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same, but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and when the fluctuation time specified from the production command has passed (the reach production) At the time of completion, the liquid crystal display device 1900 controls display of the determined stop symbol. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped from fluctuating, it is difficult to determine whether it is a big hit from the stopped symbol, and it is further determined whether it is a 4R probability variable big hit or a 4R normal big hit. Can not do it.

  In this example, after the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops changing, the game ball is passed through the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, whereby the big hit game state is set to the 4R big hit game state. The control is performed in such a way that the round is open for a short period of time, so that there is no substantial departure, and the rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600 is executed. In this rattle lottery effect, if a game ball passes and is detected by the so-called right-handed strike sensor 2580L or 2580R, the probability is determined after the jackpot game state ends based on the winning information command. It is either a jackpot that activates the variable function and the short-time function (however, the time-function function does not operate at non-temporary times) or a jackpot that does not operate the probability-variable function and the time-short function after the jackpot gaming state ends The production result is derived.

  Specifically, as a result of the rattle lottery effect, when a 4R probability variation jackpot is identified among the jackpots related to the second special symbol from the received winning information command, the probability variation function and the time reduction after the jackpot gaming state ends. When the effect result suggesting that the function is activated and the 4R normal jackpot is specified, the effect result suggesting that the probability variation function and the time-shortening function are not activated is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  Here, when an effect result indicating a jackpot in which the probability variation function and the time-shortening function are activated after the end of the jackpot gaming state is derived as the effect result of the rattle lottery effect, the 4R jackpot gaming state (the round is a short-opening round It is possible to discriminate control to a high probability time-short state after the end of (no actual departure). After the 4R jackpot gaming state ends, the probability variation function and the time shortening function are activated, and the probability changing time mode in which the high probability time shortening state can be discriminated is continued to control to the high probability time shortening state. It can be clearly identified as being.

  On the other hand, when an effect result that suggests a jackpot in which the probability variation function and the time-shortening function do not operate is derived after the jackpot gaming state is ended as the effect result of the rattle lottery effect, It is possible to determine to control to the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) after the end of the (no substantial departure). After the 4R jackpot gaming state is completed, the low probability non-short-time state is controlled by entering the normal mode in which the low-probability non-short-time state can be determined without operating the probability variation function and the short-time function. It can be clearly determined that it is.

  In this way, when the 4R probability variation big hit or the 4R normal big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol is specified, when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped variably, the 4R probability variable big hit or 4R normal big hit. It is not possible to determine which of the jackpots, that is, whether to control to a high probability time-short state or low probability non-time-short state (normal state) after the jackpot gaming state ends. However, after the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stop fluctuating, if a game ball passes and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R by performing a so-called right strike, It becomes possible to determine whether or not to control to the high probability short-time state after the gaming state ends. In other words, when the decoration symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped from changing, the 4R big hit gaming state based on the 4R probable big hit or the 4R normal big hit is a round that is open for a short time, so there is substantially no ball. Although there is no expectation for winning a prize ball, there is an expectation for controlling to a high-probability time-short state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor The player can expect to make a so-called right-hand hit with an expectation so that the game ball passes through 2580R.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped, indicates that the reach error is detected from the received determination result notification command. If the design is determined to be a combination of decorative designs that are not the same (but the left and right decorative designs are the same), and a detachment is specified, it is a detachable design (a combination of decorative designs that is not the same. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1900.

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the lottery (Step S315) for winning the jackpot will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 204, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the jackpot flag “ON” as the process of step S401. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), a jackpot variation pattern table setting process described later is performed in order to set the variation pattern when the jackpot is won. This is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S401 that the jackpot flag is not “ON”, it is next determined whether or not a reach effect is performed as a process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (YES in step S403), the reach / loss variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the reach effect variation pattern is set although it is lost (step S404). .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S403 that no reach effect is to be performed, then in step S405, a non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the lose effect is performed without performing the reach effect. I do.

  The table set in the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in association with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value or more. At some point, a shortening change is made.

  When the selection table related to the variation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, and step S405, the main control MPU 4100a next executes the set selection table as a process of step S410. Based on the above, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Next, as the processing in step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as an effect command, and a winning information command (such as a winning for a big hit) is set.

  Further, the value of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol is set based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display concerning the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 is started. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. A display effect is performed.

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 205 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the change time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 204) as the process of step S501. It is determined whether or not the time is up. If the variation time set in the timer is not up (NO in step S501), the variation processing is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of the special symbol) concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the indicator 1186 is terminated, and the stop symbol is displayed. Further, when the display effect for the big win lottery is being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect should be confirmed and displayed to the peripheral control unit 4140 in order to end the display effect. Is set (step S503). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to “3” on the assumption that the special symbol is in a processing stage where the special symbol has been suspended, as indicated by winning the jackpot (step S505). Then, the changing process is terminated. Although not shown in the flowchart, an initial value “0” is set in an identification flag, which will be described later, together with the process of updating the process flag in step S505 to “3”.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is not ON and the game is lost in the jackpot (NO in step S504), it is determined that the special symbol is in the processing stage in which the special symbol has been suspended and stopped as indicated by the jackpot. Is updated to “0” (step S508), and the process during change ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation relating to the special symbol is performed on condition that the suspension is performed in the variation start process in step S130.

[About jackpot game preparation processing]
Next, the jackpot game preparation process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 206 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game preparation process.

  As shown in FIG. 206, when the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter simply referred to as main control MPU) starts the jackpot game preparation process (step S200), it is first determined whether or not the identification flag is 0 (step S621). ). As described above, the value of the identification flag is set to 0 when the processing flag is updated to “3”.

  Here, the identification flag is a flag for identifying whether the main control MPU branches to any of the processes in the jackpot game preparation process, in other words, for identifying the game state in the jackpot game preparation process. “0” means initial setting, “1” specifies that the explanation interval effect is being performed, “2” specifies that the jackpot gaming state determination process is in progress, 3 ”defines that the jackpot start interval production is in progress.

  When the jackpot game preparation process is executed first, as a result of setting the identification flag to 0, the main control MPU determines that step S621 is YES, proceeds to step S622, and sets an explanation interval effect command (step S622). ), The explanation interval effect timer is set (step S623), the identification flag is set to 1 (step S624), the big hit game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine. The timer value set in the explanation interval effect timer is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the timer subtraction process in step S12 of FIG.

  The explanation interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the explanation interval effect is displayed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  The explanation interval effect is that after a display effect indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, when the jackpot is a variable R probability variable jackpot, the jackpot game is actually started. This is an effect for explaining the game procedure up to that time on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the jackpot is a jackpot other than the variable R probability variable jackpot, the liquid crystal display device 1900 also performs a display effect that a predetermined number of round jackpot games are executed in addition to the display effect that the jackpot is won. Is called.

  The next processing cycle of the jackpot game preparation processing is 4 ms later. As a result of the processing flag being “3” and the identification flag being set to 1, in the next jackpot game preparation process, step S621 is determined to be NO, and the process proceeds to step S625. In step S625, it is determined whether or not the value of the identification flag is 1 (step S625). In this case, since 1 is set in the identification flag, step S625 is determined to be YES, and the process proceeds to step S626 to determine whether or not the explanation interval effect has timed up (step S626). If the explanation interval effect is not up, step S626 is determined as NO, the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interruption process routine.

  Hereinafter, based on the value “3” of the process flag and the value 1 of the identification flag until the explanation interval effect times out, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be YES, and step S626 is determined to be NO. Is repeated.

  Then, when the explanation interval effect is timed up, step S626 is determined to be YES, and the operation of the condition device is started as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, assuming that the explanation interval effect is completed ( Step S627). Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is activated (step S628). When the time reduction function is activated (step S628 is determined to be YES), the operation of the condition device is started based on the start of the operation of the condition device. The operation is stopped (step S629), and the process proceeds to step S636. On the other hand, when the time reduction function is not activated (determined as NO at step S628), the process skips step S629 and proceeds directly to step S636.

  In step S636, the gate effective effect command is set, the left gate effective command is set (step S636), the identification flag is set to 2 (step S630), the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the timer interrupt processing routine is executed. Return to.

  The gate effective effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the gate effective effect display is performed through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  The gate effective effect means that the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are activated after the explanation interval effect is completed (the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R). This is an effect display for notifying the player of the fact that it has been activated), and specifically, the player selects the type of jackpot game shown in FIG. 214, a display indicating that the current time in FIG. 214 is the “rush type” timing, and a display indicating that the current time in FIG. 215 is the “single notification type” timing.

  In step S636, the left gate valid command is set and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. 200, but the valve unit 2551b in the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550. In response to the switching of the position, either a left gate valid command or a right gate valid command is set in step S638, which will be described later, and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. The That is, at the start of the gate effective effect, the position of the valve portion 2551b is set to a position where game balls are distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side, and the left indicating that detection of the game balls by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is enabled The gate valid command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. When the position of the valve unit 2551b is switched from the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the left gate 2575L side to the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the right gate 2575R, the distribution is performed. A right gate valid command indicating that the detection of the game ball by the detection sensor 2580R is validated is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, when the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the right gate 2575R side to the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the left gate 2575L, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L becomes effective. The left gate valid command indicating that this is done is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  In addition, the time during which the position of the valve portion 2551b of the sorting valve 2551 of the sorting unit 2550 is switched can be selected because the player can select a desired side between “rush type” and “single notification type”. For example, the required time is set to 5000 msec. That is, the valve unit 2551b of the sorting unit 2550 moves every 5000 msec, and accordingly, in step S638 described later, either the left gate valid command or the right gate valid command is set, and the command shown in FIG. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the transmission process (step S18). Then, when the left gate valid command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140, the left gate 2575L of the distribution unit 2550 has become valid within the effect of the gate valid effect through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side (assignment). The liquid crystal display device 1900 performs an effect display for informing the player that the detection of the game ball by the minute detection sensor 2580L has been enabled. Specifically, the current state of FIG. A display indicating that the timing is “type” comes to be performed. In addition, when the right gate valid command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140, the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 becomes valid within the effect of the gate valid effect through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side (assignment). The liquid crystal display device 1900 performs an effect display for informing the player that the detection of the game ball by the minute detection sensor 2580R has been enabled. Specifically, the current state of FIG. A display indicating that it is the timing of “notification type” is performed.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, when a big hit is made, the player is attracted to the contents of the reach at the time of reach and can not keep an eye, and the player does not notice that the big hit game has started there were. As a result, even though it was a big hit, it was easy to miss the moment when the attacker opened the door, and it was easy to lose the fun of the game.

  In addition, there are not a few players who are so enthusiastic about games that they do not take a break or endure going to the toilet even though they have accumulated fatigue on their shoulders and hips by continuing to play for a long time. When a player wins a jackpot when the player is in such a state, since the jackpot game is subsequently performed, the game cannot be interrupted and must be played continuously.

  The gaming machine of this example has been made in view of such circumstances, and when the jackpot is allocated, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention. More specifically, the peripheral control unit 4140 that has received the gate effective effect command prompts the player to select which type of jackpot game shown in FIG. 213 is to be executed (“rush type” 6R ~ 16R and “One-shot notification type” 2Ror16R and “Aim for the one you like ♪”) or together with the display screen, you can take a break before the big hit game The display effect is also performed.

  FIG. 229 is a display screen (image) displayed on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and shows that it is possible to take a break before the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 299, “If you have not passed a ball to the gate, you can take a break before the big hit game starts!” Is displayed.

  As will be described later, even if the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, The execution mode is undecided, and the jackpot game does not proceed (the jackpot game is not started). In other words, if the player who sees the display screen of FIG. 229 does not drive the game ball into the sorting unit 2550 (right-handed) according to the player's intention, the jackpot game is not started, so this state remains. You can take a break or go to the toilet.

  Thus, in the gaming machine of this example, after the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated, the game ball is not passed through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R ( The jackpot game is not started (unless the “rush type” or “single notification type” is selected), and the player can take a break away from the gaming machine seat. However, if the gaming machine is left in such a state, a person other than the player who has won the jackpot will not only start the jackpot game by driving the game ball (right hit), but also the intention of the player On the other hand, it is possible to determine the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game.

  For example, the manager on the hall side and surrounding players may misunderstand that the jackpot game is being executed by looking at the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game has not yet been determined. Without knowing that, there is a case where a game ball is shot (right-handed) with kindness instead of a player who has left his / her seat. In such a case, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined by a person other than the player who has won the jackpot, but it becomes a problem when a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) are determined. On the other hand, when a small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined, there is a problem that the player who has won the jackpot suffers a disadvantage.

  In the gaming machine of this example, a player who has won a jackpot when selecting the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (when selecting "Rush type" or "One notification type") so that the above-mentioned problem does not occur. When the player leaves the seat, it is possible to send a warning to the outside by the player's intention so that a person other than the player does not drive the game ball (right strike). Yes. This makes it possible to appeal that there is a player who is playing with the gaming machine even if the player leaves the seat. Also, in order to be able to issue a warning to the outside by the player's will only when the player is in an advantageous state, such as when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected, personal items are placed. (When leaving a gaming machine, it is not necessary to perform a customary act when appealing that a player is playing the gaming machine or that there is a person who is willing to play) Although it is easy, it is difficult to think that it will leave the store in a state that will bring profits to the player, and it will be left with the game machine kept, and it wants to play in the hall and the game machine Can be prevented from becoming annoying to other players.

  Specifically, when the player who has won the jackpot wants to leave the seat when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected, the player follows the guidance displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the player By operating 400 (the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405), it is possible to set so that a warning image is displayed. Then, as a result of such display selection, an image indicating that the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is being selected is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. "" Is displayed. In this way, when the player leaves the seat, by setting so that a warning image is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a person other than the player who has won the jackpot is left gate 2575L or right Recognizing that the gate 2575R is being selected, the game ball is not shot (right-handed), and the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined against the player's intention. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this example has the decorative boards 2116 and 2125 provided in the game board 4 when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected (when “Rush type” or “One notification type” is selected). , 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, 3690, 3692, etc. The LED mounted on the game board 4 is lit brightly or flashing violently as a whole. As a result, the player who has won the jackpot and the person other than the player recognize that the gaming machine has won the jackpot just by looking at the lighting / flashing mode of the LED mounted on the game board 4 can do. However, even when a player who has won a jackpot leaves the seat, if he continues to appeal to the outside that he has won the jackpot, a person other than the player who has left the seat has won the jackpot The game ball is thrown in due to the kindness resulting from the misunderstanding that the state of the jackpot game is being executed, the mischief that occurs while knowing that the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is undecided, etc. Cause a problem of right-handed). For this reason, in the gaming machine of this example, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected and the player who has won the jackpot wants to leave the seat, the lighting / flashing mode of the LED mounted on the game board 4 It is possible to set to suppress. This makes it difficult for a person other than the player who has won the jackpot to recognize that the player has won the jackpot, and does not place a game ball (right hit), contrary to the intention of the player. It is possible to prevent the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game from being determined. When the player who has won the jackpot wants to leave the seat, it is set to display a warning image, or set to suppress the lighting / flashing mode of the LED mounted on the game board 4, Only one of these may be settable, or both may be settable.

  In addition, the gaming machine of this example, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected (when “Rush Type” or “One Notification Type” is selected), a warning is sent to the outside by the player's operation. In this case, the fact that the warning is transmitted is stored as a history in the peripheral control RAM 4140e. By referring to the stored history, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected, it is possible to determine whether or not a warning is issued to the outside when the player leaves the seat. . In this way, by storing the fact that a warning has been sent to the outside as a history, for example, a person other than the player can send a warning when the player leaves the seat. In the case of a game ball being thrown in (right-handed), etc., it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such troubles by not arguing that it is bad that the warning was not sent. It will be possible to avoid itself. In addition, when the player who has won the jackpot leaves the seat, even if it is set to suppress the lighting / flashing mode of the LED mounted on the game board 4, as in the case of sending a warning to the outside, It may be stored as a history in the control RAM 4140e.

  In addition, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected (when the “rush type” or “single notification type” is selected), if the player wants to leave the seat, only the player can know. Unless a password is set and the password is input, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R may not be effective. Note that the password that is set when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected may provide a different password to the player each time it is set, or the player may freely set the password. In this way, by setting a password when a player leaves the seat, for example, a person other than the player has arbitrarily shot a game ball (right-handed), etc. However, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is not effective, and it is possible to prevent the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game from being determined against the player's intention, Players will be able to leave their seats with peace of mind.

  Further, a human sensor that can detect the location of a person (whether or not a player is seated, etc.) may be provided on the front side of the gaming machine. When the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected (when “Rush Type” or “One Notification Type” is selected), if the player wants to leave the seat, the human sensor is enabled. For example, a liquid crystal display device is set when the player detects that the human sensor set and activated is not a person (whether the player has won the jackpot or the person other than the player). A warning image such as “Be careful because the gate is being selected” may be displayed on the display screen 1900. Thus, by setting the human sensor to be effective when the player leaves the seat, for example, when a person other than the player who has won the jackpot approaches the gaming machine (when seated), A warning image is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and it can be recognized that the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected. In other words, a person other than the player who has won the jackpot does not place a game ball (right hit), and the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined against the player's intention. Can be prevented.

  Furthermore, when a medium such as a camera that can be recognized by the player's face is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, the player is in an advantageous state for the player, such as when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected. , It may be possible to set (register) so that the player's face can be recognized. If the player wants to leave the seat, the player registers with the camera to recognize the player's face, and the player sets the camera's face recognition to be effective. When a person approaches the gaming machine within the range of face recognition, or when an operating means such as the handle device 500 is operated, a warning image may be displayed. In addition to displaying the warning image In addition, a warning may be given by giving a loud sound or emitting light such as a flash toward the person. In addition, regarding the cancellation of this setting, when the player returns to the seat, the registration may be canceled by itself, or the state where the setting (registration) is possible so that the player's face can be recognized has ended. Based on this, the registration may be canceled regardless of the player's operation.

  Further, as will be described later, when a game ball is driven into the distribution unit 2550 by the player's intention, the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, and based on this, the big hit game The execution mode (number of rounds) is determined, the progress stop of the jackpot game is released, and the jackpot game in the determined execution mode can be started. Thereby, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention, and the moment of starting the jackpot game is not overlooked, so that the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being impaired.

  Returning to FIG. 206, as a result of the process flag being “3” and the identification flag being set to 2, in the next period jackpot game preparation process, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be NO, step The process shifts to S631 to determine whether or not the value of the identification flag is 2 (step S631). In this case, since the identification flag is set to 2, step S631 is determined to be YES, and it is determined whether or not the position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 is being switched (step). S637). Then, in a period in which 2 is set in the identification flag, when it is time (for example, 5000 msec) during which the position of the valve portion 2551b in the sorting valve 2551 of the sorting unit 2550 is switched, the step S637 is determined as YES, When the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side to the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R, the right gate valid command is set and the position of the valve portion 2551b is set. However, when switching from the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the right gate 2575R side to the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the left gate 2575L, a left gate valid command is set (step S638). Further, during the period in which 2 is set in the identification flag, the jackpot gaming state determination process is performed regardless of the determination result in step S637 (step S632).

[Big hit game mode decision processing]
The jackpot game mode determination process executed in step S632 is one of the jackpot game preparation processes. Hereinafter, the jackpot game preparation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state determination process, and FIG. 208 is an example of a round number determination table used in the jackpot game state determination process.

  In the jackpot game state determination process, when the left or right gate passage of the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, a big hit game mode determination random number (round number determination random number) is acquired. Is done. Then, based on the acquired jackpot game mode determination random number (round number determination random number), the type of jackpot flag in the flag ON state, and the right and left of the passed gate, the mode of execution of the jackpot game (round Number) is determined.

  As shown in FIG. 207, in the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S632), the main control MPU first determines whether or not the gaming ball has been detected to be delayed (irregular delay side detection sensor), that is, the upper irregular delay. It is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the creating means 2586 (step S6071). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 (YES in step S6071), whether or not the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R (the distribution detection sensor 2580R is set). It is determined whether it has been detected (step S6072).

  When a game ball is detected with a delay (YES in step S6071), the presence or absence of detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is not determined even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L. That is, when a game ball is detected with a delay (YES in step S6071), even if the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is invalidated.

  If it is not detected in step S6072 that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R, that is, if the game ball is not detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, step S6072 is determined to be NO, and the jackpot gaming state determination process is performed. The process exits and returns to the jackpot game preparation process, and further exits the jackpot game preparation process and returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

  Hereinafter, until a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be NO, based on the value “3” of the processing flag and the value 2 of the identification flag. S631 is determined to be YES, and in the jackpot gaming state determination process, a processing routine is determined in which step S6071 is determined to be YES and step S6072 is determined to be NO.

  On the other hand, when it is detected in step S6072 that the game ball has passed the right gate 2575R, that is, when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R (YES in step S6072), the big hit in the flag ON state. According to the flag, that is, the jackpot flag turned on in step S317, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined with reference to the right gate 2575R of the round number determination table shown in FIG. 208B (step S6074). ).

  If no delay is detected in step S6071, that is, it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the hole 2586a of the upper irregular delay producing means 2586 (NO in step S6071), the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L. (Whether or not the distribution detection sensor 2580L is detected) is determined (step S6076).

  If it is not detected in step S6076 that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, that is, if no game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, step S6076 is determined to be NO, and the jackpot gaming state determination process is performed. The process exits and returns to the jackpot game preparation process, and further exits the jackpot game preparation process and returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

  Hereinafter, until a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be NO, based on the value “3” of the processing flag and the value 2 of the identification flag. S631 is determined to be YES, and in the jackpot gaming state determination process, a processing routine in which step S6071 is determined to be NO and step S6076 is determined to be NO is repeated.

  On the other hand, in step S6076, when the game ball has passed through left gate 2575L, that is, when game ball is detected by distribution detection sensor 2580L (YES in step S6076), a big hit flag in the flag ON state, that is, in step S317. Depending on the turned-on jackpot flag, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined with reference to the left gate 2575L of the round number determination table shown in FIG. 208 (B) (step S6078).

  When the execution mode of the jackpot game (number of rounds in this example) is determined in step S6074 or step S6078, the process proceeds to step S6080, and the operation of the accessory continuous action device is started (step S6080). Then, based on the fact that the accessory continuous operation device has been operated, it is determined whether or not the probability changing function is in operation (step S6081).

  If it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S6081), the probability variation function is stopped in step S6082, and the process proceeds to step S6083. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6081 that the probability variation function is not operating (NO in step S6081), step S6082 is skipped and the process proceeds directly to step S6083.

  In step S6083, the main control MPU sets the operation mode of the big prize opening 2103 based on the jackpot game mode determined in the processing of step S6074 and step S6078 (step S6083).

  The operation mode of the big prize opening 2103 is, for example, the maximum number of round games in which the big prize opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the jackpot game, and a game ball can enter the big prize opening 2103 in each round game. The opening mode of the big winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game, such as the upper limit number (for example, nine) to be taken and the opening / closing operation limit time of the opening / closing member 2106 in each round game, is set (step S6083).

  Next, a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is to be started, a round information command indicating the determined number of rounds, a jackpot game flag indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed, and the like are set. (Step S6084).

  As will be described later, the jackpot start command and the round information command set in this way are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. Through the later-described control by the peripheral control unit 4140, the display effect during the jackpot game can be selectively executed as an effect associated with the determined number of rounds.

  Thus, in the main control MPU according to this embodiment, even when the explanation interval effect timer is up, the passage of the game ball to the gate 2575 (the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R) is detected. Unless this is done, the progress to the jackpot game is stopped and the next process is not performed in the jackpot game mode determination process. That is, even if it is determined that the jackpot is determined in the process of step S315 and the condition device is activated (step S604), the jackpot game is not executed smoothly, but the gate 2575 (left gate 2575L, right gate 2575R). Until the passage of the game ball is detected, that is, when step S6072 is determined to be NO, or when step S6076 is determined to be NO, the big hit game is not started.

  As described above, here, if the player who has viewed the display screen of FIG. 229 does not drive a game ball into the sorting unit 2550 (right-handed) by the player's intention, the jackpot game is started. Therefore, it is easy for the player to immediately notice that a message that it is possible to take a break before the start of the jackpot game is displayed, and to make the player recognize the content of the message more reliably it can. Further, as a display timing, when the player is enthusiastic about the game, the game can be temporarily interrupted by the player's intention, and a break can be taken in this state or the player can go to the toilet.

  After that, when the game ball is driven into the distribution unit 2550 by the player's intention, the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, and based on this, the progress of the jackpot game is stopped. Is released, that is, step S6072 is determined to be YES, or step S6076 is determined to be YES, and one of step S6074 or step S6078 is executed, so that the execution mode of the jackpot game (number of rounds) And the jackpot game in the determined execution mode can be started. Thereby, the start timing of the jackpot game can be freely determined by the player's intention, and the moment of starting the jackpot game is not overlooked, so that the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being impaired.

  Next, the jackpot start interval effect command is set (step S6085), the jackpot start interval effect timer is set to, for example, 8 seconds (step S6086), the identification flag is set to 3 (step S6087), and the jackpot game mode is determined. The process ends and the process returns to the jackpot game preparation process, and further exits the jackpot game preparation process and returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

  The jackpot start interval effect is a display effect that is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 from when the accessory continuous operation device is activated until the opening and closing of the opening / closing device 2106 is started. Is a display effect or the like indicating that is started.

  The jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, an effect display indicating that the jackpot game is started is displayed.

  By the way, according to the processing of steps S621 to S629, the time-shortening function continues to operate until the explanation interval effect time elapses in a series of lottery processing for execution of the jackpot game. That is, the fact that the result of the special symbol lottery has already been a big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the start of the operation of the condition device is suspended while the explanation interval effect is being performed. As a result, when the time reduction function is activated, it is possible to facilitate the entry of the game ball into the second start port 2102 during the execution of the explanation interval effect.

  When the jackpot game mode determination process in step S632 ends, the process flag is “3”, and as a result of setting the identification flag to 3, in the jackpot game preparation process in the next cycle, step S621 is determined to be NO, and step S625 is performed. Is determined as NO, step S631 is determined as NO, the process proceeds to step S633, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot start interval effect set in step S6084 is timed up (step S633).

  If the jackpot start interval effect is not up, step S633 is determined as NO, the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine. Hereinafter, based on the value “3” of the process flag and the value 3 of the identification flag until the jackpot start interval effect times out, step S621 is determined as NO, step S625 is determined as YES, and step S626 is performed. The processing routine for determining NO is repeated.

  Then, when the jackpot start interval effect is timed up, step S633 is determined as YES, the processing flag is updated to “4”, assuming that the jackpot start interval effect is completed (step S634), and the identification flag is set to 0. The set value is returned to the initial value (step S635), the jackpot game preparation process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

[About Round Number Determination Table]
Next, the round number determination table used when determining the execution mode (round number) of the jackpot game in step S6074 and step S6078 of the jackpot game mode determination process will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 208 (B), the round number determination table includes 12 rounds (substantially 4 rounds), 10 rounds (substantially 4 rounds), 2 rounds, 6 rounds, It is stored in such a manner that a random number for determining the number of rounds is associated with one or more round numbers of 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, 14 rounds, 16 rounds, and 4 rounds (no actual departure). The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired round number determination random number.

  In this example, the type of jackpot and whether the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (whether the game ball was detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R). The round number determination table to be used is set differently depending on. Also, in this example, of the jackpot related to the first special symbol (12R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation A big hit, 10R probability variation B big hit, 10R probability variation C big hit, 10R normal big hit) In the round number determination table used for the 4R probability variable jackpot and the 4R normal jackpot, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the round number determination random number when the game ball passes the right gate 2575R, It is the same as the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined based on the random number for determining the number of rounds when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, but is variable among the jackpots related to the second special symbol In the round number determination table used in R probability variation jackpot, when the game ball passes right gate 2575R, round The jackpot game execution mode (number of rounds) determined based on the round number determination random number when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L is determined as the jackpot game execution mode (number of rounds) determined based on the determination random number ) Is set differently.

  Specifically, in the round number determination table corresponding to the 12R probability variation jackpot among the jackpots related to the first special symbol, the game ball has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (the split detection sensor 2580L or the swing jackpot). Even if the minute detection sensor 2580R detects a game ball), 12 rounds (12R big hit gaming state. Combination of 4 rounds for a long open round and 8 rounds for a short open round) Therefore, the distribution of the determination value is set only for the 4R jackpot gaming state (substantially). In other words, when the jackpot flag for 12R probability variable jackpot is ON, even if the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, there is a 100% probability of 12 rounds (substantially 4 rounds) Is to be decided.

  Of the jackpots related to the first special symbol, in the round number determination table corresponding to 10R probability variation A big hit, 10R probability variation B big hit, 10R probability variation C big hit, 10R normal big hit, either left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R is played. Even if the ball has passed (the game ball is detected by either the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R), 10 rounds (10R big hit game state. 4 rounds as a round for a long time, Since it is a combination of 6 rounds as short-term open rounds, the judgment value distribution is set only for the 4R jackpot gaming state. That is, when the jackpot flag for 10R probability variable jackpot is ON, even if the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, there is a 100% probability of a jackpot game of 10 rounds (substantially 4 rounds). Is to be decided.

  In addition, when a game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) in the round number determination table corresponding to the variable R probability variation big hit among the big wins related to the second special symbol. Are 6 rounds (6R jackpot gaming state), 8 rounds (8R jackpot gaming state), 10 rounds (10R jackpot gaming state), 12 rounds (12R jackpot gaming state), 14 rounds (14R jackpot gaming state), 16 rounds ( 16R jackpot gaming state) is set for the determination value distribution, whereas when the game ball passes the right gate 2575R (the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), two rounds (2R jackpot gaming state) and 16 rounds (16R jackpot gaming state) Divided has been set. That is, when the jackpot flag for the variable R probability variable jackpot is ON and the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the jackpot game of 6 rounds is determined with an 8% probability, and 8 rounds, 10 rounds and 12 rounds are determined. The jackpot game with 14 rounds is determined with a probability of 17%, and the jackpot game with 16 rounds is determined with a probability of 24%. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag for the variable R probability variable jackpot is ON and the game ball passes the right gate 2575R, the two-round jackpot game is determined with a probability of 30%, and the 16-round jackpot game is set to 70%. It is decided by probability.

  Here, when a game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) in the round number determination table corresponding to the variable R probability variable big hit among the big wins related to the second special symbol. ) And when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the mode of the jackpot game to be executed (number of rounds) is different, but the mode of execution of the jackpot game The average number of rounds calculated from (round number) and its decision probability is the same as 11.8 rounds, and the average expected value of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game is the same (exact match) They do not have to be the same, and need only be within the range that does not impair the game).

  Also, when a game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) in the round number determination table corresponding to the variable R probability variable big hit among the big bonuses related to the second special symbol. And when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the minimum number of rounds differs between 2 rounds and 6 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds Is the same as the 16th round, and the maximum expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game is the same. However, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L and when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R, the probability of determining 16 rounds, which is the maximum number of rounds, is the highest, but the right gate 2575R is When the game ball passes, it is set so that the probability of determining 16 rounds is higher (70% compared to 24%), and in order to obtain the maximum expected amount of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game Can have high expectations.

  Further, when a game ball passes through the right gate 2575R in the round number determination table corresponding to the variable R probability variable big hit among the big wins related to the second special symbol (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). Is set only 2 rounds and 16 rounds as the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and the difference in the number of rounds is as large as 14 rounds. ), The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game will vary greatly. However, when the game ball passes the right gate 2575R, the probability of determining 16 rounds is set to be higher than the probability of determining 2 rounds as the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game (with respect to 30% 70%), and it can be expected to obtain the maximum expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the big hit game mode (number of rounds) is set in increments of 2 to 6 rounds. Since the difference in the number of rounds is as small as two rounds, it is paid out during the jackpot game depending on the determined jackpot game execution mode (number of rounds) compared to when the game ball passes the right gate 2575R. The expected value of the awarded ball is not very different. Also, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the probability of determining 16 rounds is set higher than the probability of determining each round other than 16 rounds as the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game (24% against 8-17%), and it can be expected to obtain the maximum expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out during the jackpot game.

  As described above, when the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the difference in the number of rounds determined is as large as 14 rounds. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L), the difference in the number of rounds determined is 2 It is possible to have an expectation for acquiring the maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game (16 rounds in this example) while suppressing the gambling property as small as the rounds.

  In this example, in the case of the variable R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, when the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is suspended, the control is performed to the high probability time-short state after the jackpot game ends. Although it has been decided to do, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state has not been decided. Then, after the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 stops variably, when the game ball is passed to the side selected by the player in the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the big hit game mode is determined. By determining the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state in the process (step S607), even after determining that it is a variable R probability variable jackpot, interest in the jackpot is not lost, A thrilling and uplifting feeling can be continued.

  In addition, in the round number determination table corresponding to the 4R probability variation big hit and the 4R normal big hit among the big wins related to the second special symbol, the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (the distribution detection sensor 2580L or Even if the game ball is detected by any of the distribution detection sensors 2580R), for 4 rounds (4R big hit game state. Since there are 4 rounds of short-time open rounds, there is virtually no ball) Only the judgment value distribution is set. That is, when either the 4R probability variable jackpot or the 4R normal jackpot flag is ON, even if the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, there is a 100% probability of four rounds ( The jackpot game is decided (no real ball).

  In this example, of the jackpot related to the first special symbol (12R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation A big hit, 10R probability variation B big hit, 10R probability variation C big hit, 10R normal big hit) and the jackpot related to the second special symbol When either big hit flag of 4R probability variable big hit or 4R normal big hit is ON, the game ball has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (either the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R). Even if a game ball is detected by (1), the jackpot game of a predetermined number of rounds is determined using a random number for determining the number of rounds with a probability of 100%. When these jackpot flags are ON, a predetermined number of rounds are drawn without using a random number for determining the number of rounds. It may be determined in the jackpot game of.

[About jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the jackpot game process.

  As shown in FIG. 209, in the big hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is open as the process of step S801. If it is open (YES in step S801), then as the processing in step S802, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2103 is set in the processing in step S803 (see FIG. 207). It is determined whether or not the specified opening / closing operation limit time has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S802), the winning opening 2103 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2106 (step S804).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S802 that the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), the same processing is performed after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2103 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 9) set in the process of step S803 (YES in step S803), step S804 is performed. Then, the process goes to the above process and closes the special winning opening 2103. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S803), the big winning game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the big prize opening 2103 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106 (the number of round games) is set in step S803 (FIG. 207). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in the process of (see) has been reached (step S805). If it has not been reached (NO in step S805), the opening / closing member 2106 is operated to open the big prize opening 2103 (step S806), and the big hit game process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device stops and the big hit (the operation with the operation of the condition device occurs). ) Will be shifted to a state in which the operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2106 performed on the condition that it is won is impossible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processing of step S807 to step S812, so that the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) separate from the jackpot flag in the processing of step S317 (see FIG. 203), for example. The game state after the jackpot game is set based on the winning type of the jackpot that has been stored as the trigger for executing the jackpot game, and then the jackpot game process is terminated. Here, the winning type refers to whether or not the winning type activates the probability variation function or the time reduction function.

  When it is determined in the process of step S805 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds (YES in step S805), first, the big hit flag and the big hit game flag are each set to the OFF state ( In step S807), the winning type of the jackpot that is triggered by the jackpot game is determined (step S808).

  Here, in the process of step S808, the selected type that activates the probability variation function (in this example, per 12R probability variation large per unit, 10R probability variation A per unit, 10R probability variation B per unit, 10R probability variation C per unit, variable R probability variation per unit, 4R probability variation per unit) It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the selected type that activates the probability variation function is not selected, the process proceeds to step S811 without operating both the probability variation function and the time reduction function. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S808 that the winning type that activates the probability variation function is activated (step S809), the winning species that activates the time reduction function (this example) Then, among the selected species that activate the probability variation function, 12R probability variation big hit or 10R probability variation A big hit at low probability non-short time, 12R probability variation big hit at high probability non-short time, 10R probability variation A big hit or 10R probability variation B big hit, all probability variation at time shortage When it is determined that it is a big hit, the time reduction function is activated (step S810), and then the process proceeds to step S811.

  Next, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S811), and when the processing flag is set to “0” (step S812), the big hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a jackpot game process, until it is determined in the process of step 805 that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds, the big prize opening 2103 is opened according to the type of jackpot (step S802). In step S803 and step S805), the game is repeatedly released, and as a result, a player can obtain a winning ball according to the type of jackpot.

[4. Game contents]
The game content in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 195 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a functional configuration relating to payout of game balls will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, performance controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a.

  When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2302 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 for generating a predetermined normal random number which is a lottery result for the normal symbol, and the generated normal random number are determined in advance. ROM of main control board 4100 for normal symbol hold storage means 4202 for temporarily storing according to the above conditions, and normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number stored and executed by normal symbol hold storage means 4202 Normal symbol variation pattern selecting means 4204 for selecting from a predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for variably displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern 4206 and the normal symbol display 1189 displayed by the normal symbol display control means 4206. When the random number (ordinary lottery result) is “ordinary hit”, the start opening / closing control means 4208 for driving the start opening solenoid 2114 to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the normal symbol holding storage means 4202 are stored. Normal symbol memory number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of normal symbol random numbers as a memory number on the normal symbol memory display 1188 is provided.

  The normal symbol hold storage means 4202 described above generates a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol display control means 4206 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. ) And the execution of the stored normal random number is suspended until normal symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.

  The main control board 4100 has a predetermined first lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3131 by the start winning to the first start port 2101. A first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number; a first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to a predetermined condition; The first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored and executed by the first special symbol storage unit 4214 is stored in a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in the ROM of the main control board 4100 in advance. First special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected from the table and first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 Based on the turn, the first special symbol display control means 4218 for variably displaying the first special symbol of the first special symbol indicator 1185, and the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol storage means 4214 are stored. First special symbol memory number display control means 4220 for displaying on the first special symbol memory display 1184 as the memory number is provided. Although not shown in FIG. 195, the main control board 4100 further includes a first jackpot symbol random number generator and a second jackpot symbol random number generator. When the first special lottery result is a big hit, the random number generated by the first big hit symbol random number generating means is acquired to determine the stop symbol of the first special symbol. Similarly, when the second special lottery result is a big win, the random number generated by the second big jackpot design random number generating means is acquired, and the stop symbol of the second special design is determined.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 3132 by the start winning to the second start port 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number; a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition; The second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number executed after being stored in the second special symbol storage unit 4224 is stored in a predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100. Second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected from the table and second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 The second special symbol display control means 4228 for variably displaying the second special symbol of the second special symbol indicator 1186 based on the number of the second special symbol display means 1228, and the number of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224 Second special symbol memory number display control means 4230 for displaying on the second special symbol memory display 1187 as the memory number is provided.

  These first special symbol hold storage means 4214 and second special symbol hold storage means 4224 are newly added special symbols such as the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228 are variably displayed. When the first special random number and the second special random number are triggered by the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132, respectively. ) And the execution of the stored first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the special symbol can be changed.

  The main control board 4100 receives the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 for the start winnings 2101 and 2102. Priority reserved digesting means 4231 for executing (digesting) the second special random number in preference to the timing is provided, and the priority reserved digesting means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second start port 2102. The lottery result hold is prioritized (digested).

  The main control board 4100 also includes a first special random number (first special lottery result) and a second special random number (second special random number) stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 and the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224. An advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous based on a special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2106 for closing the special winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232 A special prize opening / closing control means 4234 for controlling the driving of the attacker solenoid 2121 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern is provided.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a first special random number or a second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern or second special symbol variation pattern) in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232, A fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table and the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table is further provided. The variation pattern table changing means 4236 changes, for example, to a variation pattern table (for example, a high probability variation pattern table) in which a variation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal variation pattern table ( So-called probability variation), changing to a variation pattern table with a shorter variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol than the normal variation pattern table (for example, a time shortening variation pattern table) (so-called time reduction), The probability is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time variation pattern table) having a high probability of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and a special symbol having a shorter variation time (so-called probability variation / short variation pattern table).

  In this example, a detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is input to the advantageous gaming state generation means 4232, and the advantageous game state generation means 4232 is responsive to the detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580. Thus, the opening / closing pattern (for example, determination of the number of rounds in the big hit game) of the big winning opening 2103 by the attacker solenoid 2121 can be determined. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to determining the opening / closing pattern of the big prize opening 2103 according to the detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580, but to some extent (for example, the amount of prize balls to be paid out according to the detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580) The opening time of the big prize opening 2103, etc.) may be determined.

  Further, the main control board 4100 has a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol memory according to the normal random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. Based on the second special symbol memory or the like, a command generation unit 4238 that generates a command for predetermined control such as an effect command, and a command transmission unit 4240 that transmits the command generated by the command generation unit 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140. And.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is transparent when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. A game is started by a game ball by being driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. It should be noted that the game ball driving strength can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the game ball can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball that has been thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the center ball is centered by a plurality of obstacle nails or inclined upper surfaces of the peripheral wall portion 2503. It is guided to the left area of the accessory 2500. In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the distribution space 2530 is distributed via the distribution entry passage 2545. After being sent inward, it is discharged into the game area 1100 upstream of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 arranged downstream of the gate portion 2301 and the stage 2510 via the guide passage 2540 (see FIG. 131). The

  Then, when a game ball that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center object 2500 in the game area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302, the main ball is detected based on the detection signal. In the control board 4100, the ordinary random number generating means 4200 generates ordinary random numbers as the ordinary lottery result. Based on the normal random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), A normal symbol extracted based on a normal random number (normal lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in either red or green). . The normal symbol fluctuation display is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected from a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection means 4204.

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when the normal symbol indicating the hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 for closing the second start port 2102 are expanded for a predetermined time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds), and the first A game ball can be awarded to the second starting port 2102.

  The fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 may be changed according to a special random number (special lottery result) described later. When “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted as the lottery result), the variation time or the expansion time may be changed to a short time. Specifically, for example, the normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 can be easily changed by replacing the normal symbol variation pattern table for selecting the normal symbol variation pattern with a different table and selecting it.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is determined, the normal random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored in the normal symbol storage holding means 4202 and displayed. The number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of reservations) is displayed on a normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories depending on the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of memories exceeds four, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 and flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 are moved to the center of the game area 1100 below the center accessory 2500 by the shelves 2202 and 2203 of the front side unit 2200. It is supposed to be. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104, 2201 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensors 2123, 3133, the main control board 4100 is based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command, so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are received. The payout is made to the upper plate 301.

  If a game ball that has been thrown into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103, It is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the area 1100 and is discharged from the out port 1232 (1151) to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning opening 2104, 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, or the big winning opening 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 1100. It is discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being discharged.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 opened on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. More specifically, the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the left end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510, and is the lowest part after rolling the first stage 2511 in the left-right direction. Is released forward. Then, the game ball released forward from the first stage 2511 is supplied to the second stage 2512 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the first stage 2511, and most after rolling the second stage 2512 in the left-right direction. It is discharged forward from the lowered central part.

  The game ball released forward from the second stage 2512 is supplied to the third stage 2513 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the second stage 2512, and becomes the lowest after rolling the third stage 2513 in the left-right direction. It is released backward from the affected part. Then, the game balls released from the third stage 2513 are arranged between the third stage 2513 and the first stage 2511 and below the third stage 2513 on both the left and right sides of the second stage 2512. After being supplied to 2514 and rolling the fourth stage 2514 in the left-right direction, it is discharged downward from the drop hole 2514a. Further, the game ball released downward from the drop hole 2514a of the fourth stage 2514 is supplied to the fifth stage 2515 disposed immediately below the fourth stage 2514, and after rolling the fifth stage 2515 in the left-right direction. , It is discharged forward from the lowest part on both the left and right sides across the center in the left-right direction and is returned to the game area 1100.

  When a game ball rolling on the stage 2510 enters the first chance entrance 2516 of the first stage 2511 or the second chance entrance 2517 of the second stage 2512, the chance ball 2525 opened just above the first start port 2101 It is discharged into the game area 1100 and is received by the first start port 2101 with a high probability. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3131, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2510 have a high probability. When the second start port 2102 can be received and the game ball is released from the stage 2510, the start port 2101 is likely to be received. The second starting port 2102 can also be provided with a sense of expectation relating to the acceptance of game balls, thereby enhancing the interest.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game ball is driven so as to flow down the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game is played to the upstream side of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 through the distribution space 2530 or the like. Since the ball is released, when the big prize opening 2103 is acceptable, the game ball can be accepted into the big prize opening 2103 with a high probability. Therefore, in a gaming state in which the special winning opening 2103 can be received, the game ball can be operated so that the game ball circulates in the distribution space 2530. In other words, when the grand prize opening 2103 is in a receivable gaming state, the game ball can be accepted into the grand prize opening 2103 with a high probability through the distribution space 2530 simply by striking the game ball more than a predetermined amount. It can be done.

  By the way, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate member 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302 and “normal hit” is selected as the normal lottery result, the second start port 2102 is closed as described above. When the pair of movable pieces 2105 expands for a predetermined time to be able to win, and when the winning becomes possible, when the game ball is received by the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 3132, the main control is performed. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740 via the substrate 4100 or the like.

  In the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132, the first start port 2101 and the second start port sensor 3132 detect the first start. At the port 2101, the first special random number generator 4212 generates and extracts a predetermined first special random number. At the second start port 2102, the second special random number generator 4222 generates and extracts a predetermined second special random number. Is called. Then, based on the extracted special random number, it is extracted after the change display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started. The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result.

  When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner suggesting “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) occurs, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be obtained. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  However, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests “big hit”, the big hit game does not occur immediately, but the explanation interval production is performed, and this explanation interval production timer is based on the time-up. As described above, the condition device, which is a condition for executing the jackpot game, operates.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 2400. When the special symbol is variably displayed on the device 1186, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the first start port sensor 3131 and when detected by the second start port sensor 3132, it is extracted based on the detection signals from the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132 until the special symbol change display is possible. The first special random number or the second special random number is stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214 or the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224, and the display is held. It is, has a number of the stored special random numbers, to be displayed in the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187.

  The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission states of each LED which is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of memories exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded. The second special random number stored (held) in the second special symbol hold storage unit 4224 by the priority hold digesting unit 4231 has priority over the first special random number stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 4214. Are executed (digested). That is, the lottery result hold related to the second start port 2102 is executed (digested) with priority over the lottery result hold related to the first start port 2101.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 selects the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132 and the second special random number as the first special symbol variation pattern selection. By comparing with a predetermined random number determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) determined in advance by the means 4216 or the second special symbol variation pattern selection unit 4226, the special random number is “lost” or “big hit”. In addition to being discriminated, the special symbol stop symbol is also discriminated. In addition, the random number determination table is also used to discriminate such as “short hit per probability change”, “probability per hit”, “short hit per hour”, “short per hit during probability change”, and the like.

  Then, the first special random number and the second special random number (the special lottery result) extracted (lottery) when triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 In this case, as described above, the main control board 4100 activates a condition device that is one condition for executing the jackpot game based on the time-out of the explanation interval effect timer.

  The advantageous game state generating means 4232 executes a jackpot game advantageous to the player, and a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, or a predetermined game A round game with an open / close pattern in which the open / close member 2106 is closed when any number of (for example, 9) game balls satisfy the winning prize opening 2103 and any of the winning conditions is satisfied (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 4 rounds for “4R jackpot”, 6 rounds for “6R jackpot”, “8R jackpot” 8 rounds, 10 rounds for 10R jackpot, 12 rounds for 12R jackpot, 14 rounds for 14R jackpot Four rounds, 16 rounds if it is "16R big hit", respectively repeatedly, and is adapted to generate a favorable advantageous gaming state to the player. Note that, after the end of the predetermined number of rounds, with regard to “big hit”, the random number determination table is exchanged with a high-probability time / shortness table or the like by the variation pattern table changing unit 4236 according to the extracted special random number. Note that the mode of the jackpot game is not limited to the above-described round game as long as a predetermined amount of prize balls are paid out.

  In this example, when the short-time function is activated, and when the jackpot game is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot game ends (when the short-time function is activated), the normal symbol winning probability is set to 251/251. The normal symbol lottery result is always a hit, and the time required for the normal symbol variation display control is shortened to an extremely short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the normal symbol lottery result is a win, the second start port 2102 is controlled with an open / close pattern that is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). That is, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is extremely high, the time required for the normal symbol variation display control is constant and short, and the time of the open state of the second start port 21 is short. It is much easier to win a game ball at the second start port 2102 due to its long length, and the game ball can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2102 than at the first start port 2101. In the non-short-time state control (when the time-shortening function is not activated), the normal symbol winning probability is set to 0/251, and the normal symbol lottery result does not always win, and the second start port 2102 Even if aimed at, the second starting port 2102 cannot be awarded a game ball.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the extracted first special random number or the second special random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 is based on the fact that the condition device has been activated. The detection signal of the game ball from 2580 (2580L, 2580R) is in a state where it can be received, and the number of rounds of the “big hit” game is determined by which of the distribution detection sensors 2580L, 2580R first receives the detection signal. I try to decide.

  Note that when a game ball detection signal from the distribution detection sensor 2580 can be received, the relationship between the number of rounds and the gate 2575 through which the game ball has passed is displayed in advance on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. It is like that. That is, “When a game ball is passed to the right gate 2575R, it is determined by lottery from 6 rounds to 16 rounds”, “When a game ball is passed to the left gate 2575L, 2 rounds and 16 rounds. The relationship between the gate to which the game ball passes and the number of rounds determined based on passing through the gate, such as “determined by lottery as one of the rounds”, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like. It has come to be.

  Thus, the game ball can be driven while watching the movement of the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 so that the game ball passes through the desired gate 2575 to the player. In addition to being able to entertain the operation, it is possible to be thrilled and thrilled by the distribution of the game balls in the distribution space 2530, and it is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest from deteriorating. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, according to the first special random number and the second special random number extracted in response to the start winning of the game balls at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (in accordance with the special lottery result) Accordingly, in addition to the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 being variably displayed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 also have special random numbers (special An effect image corresponding to the lottery result) is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like, the variable display of each symbol row is started in a state where a series of symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed (for example, three rows), and then sequentially. When the display is stopped and all the symbol sequences are finally stopped, the determination result of the special random number extracted by the combination of the symbols that are stopped and displayed is suggested to the player side. That is, according to the special lottery result by the start winning, an effect image that is stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result after a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed is displayed. Note that since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like are larger and easier to see than the special symbols on the first and second special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186, the player generally displays on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like. Attention will be paid to the design.

  As one of the effect images in which the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed, the “reach effect image” is displayed so that the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed leaving one variable symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition (reach) As a special lottery result on which this “reach effect image” is displayed, there are “per reach” and “reach lose”. There is also a “reach development effect image” that is displayed so as to be connected to the “reach effect image”, and that the remaining symbol sequence that is variably displayed is highlighted after the reach display. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like can display not only the effect display related to the start winning prize but also the “spot game effect image” displayed during the “spot” game.

  Note that the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 195). The variation display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150 based on a command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It has become.

  As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like that is particularly noticed by the player is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like. A plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance for one command, and the symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like can be increased. In addition, the “hit game effect image” displayed during the “hit” game or the like is also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. Thereby, the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the calculation processing load on the main control board 4100 can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that makes the player more entertaining and less likely to get bored can be obtained. It has become.

  In addition to the control of the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on a command related to the lottery result. , 3622, 3640, 3676 and the like, solenoids 3624, 3660 and the like are appropriately operated, and the decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320 provided in the game board 4 are provided. The LEDs mounted on 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, 3690, 3692 and the like are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the player can be entertained by a movable effect and a light effect.

  By the way, if the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, as described above, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 indicate that it is a “big hit”. The special symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner. However, the role that the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment should play differs from the special symbol lottery in the conventional pachinko machine.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot related to the second special symbol is the R probability variation jackpot, for one result such as “variable R probability variation jackpot”, “one notification Two types with different jackpot forms such as “type” and “rush type” are given to the player. In the present embodiment, the “one-shot notification type” and the “rush type” have different processing modes until the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is determined as the jackpot mode. Then, when two types having different jackpot forms such as “one notification type” and “rush type” are given to the player, one of these is selected. In this embodiment, when a condition ball is activated, a game ball fired by a player toward a game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, and the “rush type” is selected, and passes through the right gate 2575R. Then, “one notification type” is selected.

  It can be said that hits with different execution modes (number of rounds) of jackpot games belong to the “one-shot notification type” and “rush type”, respectively. Specifically, as can be seen from FIG. 208 (B), when the variable R probability variation is a big hit, “Rush type” (left gate 2575L), 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, The jackpot game of 14 rounds or 16 rounds can be said to belong, and the jackpot game is in 2 round increments from 6 rounds to 16 rounds, and the difference in the number of rounds is as small as 2 rounds. The possibility of the number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) that can acquire a considerably large amount of game balls is kept while suppressing the possibility of the number of rounds (for example, 6 rounds) in which only a small amount of game balls can be acquired.

  Similarly, with reference to FIG. 208 (B), when “Rush type” is seen, when it is variable R probability variation jackpot, “Rush type” (right gate 2575R) can acquire only a very small amount of game balls. The two rounds of jackpot game are played and the difference between the number of rounds is 14 rounds compared to two rounds, and 16 rounds of jackpot game that can acquire a large amount of game balls belong It can be said that.

  In this way, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L in the case of the variable R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, the round number determination table of FIG. Each jackpot game in a round (2 round steps) is executed by lottery. Further, after passing right gate 2575R, with reference to the round number determination table of FIG. 208 (B), it is determined by lottery when 2 rounds of jackpot game is executed or 16 rounds of jackpot game is executed. .

  On the other hand, when it is a big hit related to the first special symbol (12R positive change big hit, 10R positive change A big hit, 10R positive change B big hit, 10R positive change C big hit, 10R normal big hit), either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is used as a game ball. , Even if it passes, it is actually 4 rounds (12 rounds or 10 rounds) with a probability of 100% with reference to the round number determination table of FIG. It is determined when the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed). In addition, when the 4R probability variation jackpot and 4R regular jackpot of the jackpot related to the second special symbol, with reference to the round number determination table of FIG. 208 (B), 4 rounds (both open for a short time) Since the number of rounds is 4 rounds, it is determined when the jackpot game is executed (substantially no departure). Then, as a result, from the player's point of view, when it is a big hit other than the variable R probability variable big hit, it is 12 rounds or 10 rounds regardless of whether the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. It will be determined when a jackpot game of (substantially 4 rounds) or 4 rounds (no real departure) is executed.

  By the way, although the mode of the jackpot game to be executed is determined when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot other than the variable R probability variable jackpot. Whether or not there is is determined in step S316. Accordingly, when the big R other than the variable R probability variable big win, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a game ball before passing through the gates 2575L and 2575R (for example, the special symbol display 1185 and 1186 on the result of the first special lottery or When the result of two special lotteries is displayed), a display effect indicating that a predetermined number of round jackpot games will be executed is performed. However, among the big jackpots related to the second special symbol, when the 4R probable big jackpot and the 4R regular jackpot are both, the four rounds in the jackpot game are short-open rounds, so the player is expected to win the prize ball This is not possible, and there is no display effect indicating that the big hit game of 4 rounds (no actual game) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, even if it is a big win other than the variable R probability variable big hit, the winning is determined when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R (predetermined number) as in the case of the variable R probability variable big hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only when the jackpot is a jackpot other than the variable R probability variable jackpot, before the game ball passes the gates 2575L and 2575R ( For example, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186), it may be determined when a predetermined number of rounds of jackpot game is executed. .

  Further, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a big hit other than the variable R probability variable big hit (when the execution mode of the big hit game is determined using FIG. 208B), the number of rounds Although the lottery is performed using the random number for determination, the execution mode of the jackpot game may be determined without performing such a lottery.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R only when the variable R probability variable jackpot of the jackpot related to the second special symbol, Is used to select one of the jackpot forms (“single announcement type” or “rush type”). Then, it is determined for any one of the hits belonging to the selected jackpot type, and the jackpot game is executed in the execution mode of the jackpot game corresponding to the determined hit.

  In other words, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a jackpot, the functions to be performed by the gates 2585L and 2575R differ depending on the type of the jackpot.

  Specifically, the jackpot related to the first special symbol (12R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation A big hit, 10R probability variation B big hit, 10R probability variation C big hit, 10R normal big hit), and the jackpot related to the second special symbol 4R When the probability variation jackpot and the 4R normal jackpot (that is, the jackpot other than the variable R probability variation jackpot), refer to the round number determination table in FIG. Although the lottery for determining the execution mode is performed, the lottery is merely a formal lottery in which the execution mode for the jackpot is determined in advance. In other words, since a predetermined number of round hit games are executed based on the fact that the game balls have passed through the gates 2575L and 2575R, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, The distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as a trigger for executing the jackpot game.

  Further, in the case of a big hit related to the first special symbol (12R positive change big hit, 10R positive change A big hit, 10R positive change B big hit, 10R positive change C big hit, 10R normal big hit), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the game ball is gate 2575L, Before passing 2575R (for example, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is displayed on the special symbol display 1185, 1186), 12 rounds or 10 rounds (both open for a long time) Although the display effect indicating that the jackpot game of 4 rounds is executed due to the fact that the round is 4 rounds is performed, after the jackpot game is finished, it is controlled to a high probability short-time state or a non-short-time state (high probability) The display effect indicating whether to control to the non-time-short state or the low probability non-time-short state) is not performed, and the game ball is not gate 257. After passing through L, 2575R, after the jackpot game is over, an effect (in this example, high) indicating whether to control to a high-probability time-short state or to a non-time-short state (high probability non-time-short state or low probability non-time-short state) Rattle lottery effect indicating whether to enter the probability short time mode or the high probability latent mode) is performed.

  Similarly, when the 4R probability variation jackpot and the 4R normal jackpot (that is, the jackpot other than the variable R probability variation jackpot) among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the game balls pass through the gates 2575L and 2575R. 4 rounds (for example, when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186) before 4 rounds (There is no ball), and the display effect that shows whether to control the high probability short-time state or the low-probability non-short-time state after the jackpot game ends. After the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, it is controlled to a high probability time-short state after the jackpot game ends. (In this example, exit the high-probability time-shortening mode or to continue the high-probability time-shortening mode (rattle lottery effect that indicates the normal mode rush) to) production which indicates whether the control to the low probability non time reduction state is carried out. That is, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gates 2575L and 2575R, it is notified whether or not to control to the high probability time-short state after the jackpot game ends, so that the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, The minute detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as a notification trigger as to whether or not to control to a high probability time-short state after the end of the jackpot game.

  On the other hand, when it is a jackpot related to the second special symbol, it is determined that it is a variable R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 80% with reference to the symbol determination table of FIG. 208 (A), and a 4R probability variation jackpot with a probability of 20%. And 4R is usually judged to be a big hit. As described above, when the jackpot is related to the second special symbol, it is determined that the variable R probability variation jackpot has a high probability. However, when the variable R probability variation jackpot, the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, distribution). The detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) function as members that determine the execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, step S6074 and step S6078 executed by the main control MPU 4100a are respectively configured so that the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L) are jackpots related to the second special symbol. Of these, when the variable R probability variation jackpot, it will serve as a functioning means that functions as a member that determines the execution mode of the jackpot game.

  That is, when the gates 2575L and 2575R (more specifically, the distribution detection sensors 2580L and 2580R) are big hits (mainly big hits related to the first special symbol) other than the variable R probability variable big hits, While functioning as a member to determine whether or not to control to a high probability time-short state after the jackpot game ends, when the variable R probability variable jackpot of the jackpot related to the second special symbol, jackpot game It will function as a member that determines the execution mode. Therefore, step S6074 and step S6078 executed by the main control MPU 4100a determine the execution opportunity of the jackpot game when the jackpot is a jackpot other than the variable R probability variation jackpot (mainly a jackpot related to the first special symbol). The right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L) functioning as members for determining whether or not to control to the high probability short-time state after the jackpot game ends, Of the jackpots related to the two special symbols, when the variable R probability variable jackpot, it serves as a function changing means for changing the function so as to function as a member for determining the execution mode of the jackpot game.

  In this embodiment, the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L) have a result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery other than the variable R probability variation big hit. When it is a jackpot, it functions as a member that determines the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, and determines the execution mode of the jackpot game only when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a variable R probability variable jackpot Although the role to be played by functioning as a member has been changed, the mode of changing the function as the gate 2575 is not limited thereto.

  For example, the “rush type” is always selected when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L, and the “one-shot notification type” is selected when the game ball passes the right gate 2575R. When the ball passes the right gate 2575R, the “rush type” is selected, and when the game ball passes the left gate 2575L, the “one notification type” is selected, so that the function of the gate 2575 is changed. Good.

  Also, for example, it is always possible to select either “one notification type” or “rush type” according to the gates 2575L and 2575R through which the game balls pass, and which gate 2575 is selected when the specific condition is satisfied. Even if the game ball passes, the function of the gate 2575 may be changed by setting the selected jackpot form to “one notification type” (or “rush type”). In addition, even if a game ball is always passed through any gate 2575, only “one notification type” (or “rush type”) is selected, but when a specific condition is satisfied, gates 2575L and 2575R through which the game ball passes. The function of the gate 2575 may be changed by selecting “one notification type” or “rush type” according to the above.

  In addition, for example, when a game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R in which “one notification type” is selected, the jackpot game of the second mode is executed when the jackpot game of the first mode is executed. If the game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R in which “one notification type” is selected when the specific condition is satisfied, a mode different from the first mode and the second mode is determined. In this case, the function of the gate 2575 may be changed by determining one of a plurality of hits including a hit in which the jackpot game is executed (that is, “one notification type”). Even if the points are the same, the function of the gate 2575 may be changed by changing the hit belonging to the “one notification type”).

  Next, the flow until the jackpot game is started will be described with reference to FIGS. 210 to 215 from the viewpoint of the player. 210 to 216 are all image diagrams displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and FIG. 210 (A) is a notice display for explaining the game until the jackpot game is started. FIG. 210 (B) is a guidance display that guides the player's gaze in the game until the jackpot game is started, FIG. 211 is an explanation display for a method of selecting the “rush type” jackpot game, and FIG. An explanation display about how to select a jackpot game of “notification type”, FIG. 213 is a display prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game is to be executed, and FIG. 214 is a timing of “rush type” at present. FIG. 215 is a display indicating that the current timing is “one notification type”.

  As described above, FIGS. 210 to 215 are all image diagrams displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In FIGS. 211 and 212, for convenience, they correspond to the distribution unit 2550. The reference numeral 2550 is assigned to the picture, the reference numeral 2551b is assigned to the picture corresponding to the valve portion 2551b, the reference numeral 2590 is assigned to the picture corresponding to the distribution suggesting member 2590, and the left gate 2575L (distribution detection sensor 2580L). A picture corresponding to the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R) is assigned a reference numeral 2575R (2580R).

  If the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a jackpot, an image indicating that the jackpot is on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Here, in the case of a conventional pachinko machine, for example, an image indicating that a jackpot game is started or an image indicating a place to be targeted in a jackpot game such as “Aim for the right” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It had been.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit, an image indicating that the conditional device is activated and the big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display. Although displayed on the device 1900, the jackpot game is not started immediately, and the jackpot game is executed only after passing through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R after the condition device is activated. In this way, the player can proceed with the game according to the player's intention without executing the jackpot game immediately after the condition device is activated, so that the player can play like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to play the game with peace of mind without feeling irritated, such as “If you do n’t rush to put a game ball in the big prize opening”.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which allows the player to proceed with the player's intention without executing the jackpot game immediately after the condition device is activated, the player is mistakenly or excessively vigorous. Even if this game ball is led to the distribution unit 2550 as a result of launching the game ball, as described above, by providing the explanation interval effect period, the jackpot game contrary to the player's will not be executed. Has been.

  That is, during the explanation interval effect, the condition device is not yet operated, so that the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. Thus, when an image indicating that the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, the gate 2575 is contrary to the player's intention during the explanation interval effect. Even if a game ball passes, the type of jackpot game that matches the player's will can be executed reliably.

  By the way, a book that can select either “one-announcement type” or “rush type” according to the player's will when the variable R probability variation jackpot is related to the jackpot related to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, even if the player selects the “one-shot notification type”, if the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R immediately after launching the game ball (distribution detection) When a game ball is detected by the sensor 2580R), the number of rounds as a mode of jackpot game may be determined without feeling that the player is thrilled. In this case, it is now possible to select the “one notification type” at the player's will, even though the game ball is fired at the timing when the “one notification type” is selected by the sorting unit 2550. There is a risk that the significance will be lost and the interest of this pachinko gaming machine 1 will be halved.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the “one notification type” side by the distribution unit 2550, the game ball is An irregular delay unit 2585 (FIGS. 136, 137, and 140) that creates an irregular storage time so that it does not immediately pass through the right gate 2575R (so that it is not immediately detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). 2550 and right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R).

  The irregular delay unit 2585 has a function of irregularly delaying that the game ball distributed to the “one notification type” side passes through the right gate 2575R (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). . The irregular delay unit 2585 is composed of an upper irregular delay creating means 2586 and a lower irregular delay creating means 2587. In this embodiment, a crune is adopted as the lower irregular delay creating means 2587. Such a Kroon not only delays the passing of the game ball distributed to the “one-shot notification type” side through the right gate 2575 (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), but also a game ball Can be set to an irregular time from when it is distributed to the “single notification type” side until it passes through the right gate 2575R (time until it is detected by the sorting detection sensor 2580R). This is because the time for the game balls distributed to the “one-shot notification type” side to roll in the croon is irregular (that is, the time for rolling in the clune varies each time).

  In this embodiment, as described above, a croon is adopted as the lower irregular delay creating means 2587. However, in a gaming machine provided with such a crune, the croon is used for the purpose of dropping a game ball from the croon. A gaming machine may be hit when a game ball rolls inside. The player hits the gaming machine in this way in order to bring about an advantageous result for the player such as a jackpot. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player feels throbbing. It is only a loss of the accumulation time that can be enjoyed by one's own actions, and does not disadvantage the hall. However, even if a game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the one notification type side, the game ball does not immediately pass through the right gate 2575R (so that it is not immediately detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). ) Provided with a function for delaying detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580R by an irregular time as a predetermined accumulation time, it is provided between the distribution unit 2550 and the right gate 2575R (distribution detection sensor 2580R). The member is not necessarily limited to the croon.

  By the way, when a croon that functions as, for example, the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 is provided between the sorting unit 2550 and the right gate 2575R (sorting detection sensor 2580R), the game ball is rolling in the croon. In addition, another game ball may be distributed to the “rush type” side and may pass through the left gate 2575L (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L). In this case, even if the game balls launched toward the game area 1100 are distributed to the “one-announcement type” side in accordance with the intention of the player, the games are distributed to the “one-announcement type” side. Prior to the ball passing through the right gate 2575R (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), another game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L). Things can happen. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball is distributed to the “one notification type” side to the upper irregular delay creating means 2586 provided on the upstream side of the lower irregular delay creating means 2587. An irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is provided for detecting.

  As described above, the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is configured to receive a bonus game mode (number of rounds) after the conditional device is activated based on the fact that the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit. ) Is determined (that is, until the accessory continuous activation device is activated), the detection of the game ball is enabled. Then, when a game ball is detected by the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 while the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is being activated, based on this, the game detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is performed. Is invalidated.

  As a result, after the condition device is activated, once the game ball is distributed to the “one notification type” side by the distribution unit 2550, the game ball allocated to the “one notification type” side is Even if another game ball is distributed to the “rush type” by the distribution unit 2550 while rolling in the croon as the regular delay creating means 2587 (that is, before passing through the right gate 2575R) Passing of game balls to the left gate 2575L (detection of game balls by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) is invalidated. When the game ball rolling in the croon as the lower irregular delay creating means 2587 falls from the croon and passes through the right gate 2575R (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the normal type As long as the jackpot flag is ON, based on the passage to the right gate 2575R (detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580R), either a 2-round jackpot game or a 16-round jackpot game is determined by lottery.

  In this manner, even if another game ball is distributed to the “rush type” side while the game ball rolls in the croon, and the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L, the distribution detection sensor 2580L. The game ball is detected by the player, that is, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is distributed to the “one-shot notification type” side in accordance with the player's intention. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid a situation where the “rush type” is selected.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, based on the fact that the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 detects the game ball while the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is activated. Although the passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L (detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) is invalidated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the fact that the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 detects a game ball while the irregular delay side detection sensor 2588 is activated, the “rush type” side is blocked by the sorting unit 2550, for example. For example, the game balls may not be physically distributed to the “rush type” side. That is, a game ball to the right gate 2575R for the game ball distributed to the “one notification type” side even though the game ball is distributed to the “one notification type” side after the condition device is activated. Since the passage of the ball (detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R) is irregularly delayed by the irregular delay unit 2585, the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R). If it is possible to avoid that another game ball passes through the left gate 2575L (detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L) before that), the means is not limited to a specific mode. Absent.

  Here, an aspect in which the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the game description from when the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 until the jackpot game is started will be described.

  First, both a character display (see FIG. 210 (A)) and a voice output of “I will explain the target bonus” are performed as a notice display for explaining the game until the jackpot game is started. This prompts the player to stop firing the game ball. Then, as a display for prompting the user to pay attention to the distribution unit 2550, a character display of “Look at the top right of the board” and a voice output are displayed, and a picture indicating a place where the player should pay attention is displayed (FIG. 210 ( B)). At this time, in order to highlight the place where the player should pay attention, the lighting effect performed on the game area is darkened so as to be plain, and the distribution unit 2550 is blinked. In particular, such a display effect is performed during an interval period in which the progress of the game is forcibly stopped, so that, as in the conventional pachinko machine, the trend and direction of the game ball launched toward the game area It is no longer necessary to keep an eye on both objects. Therefore, not only can the game contents be explained to the player with certainty, but the player's gaze can be transferred to the sorting unit 2550 very naturally without being distracted by the trend of the game ball.

  Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 indicates that a “rush type” jackpot game is executed when a game ball fired by the player is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side by the sorting unit 2550. When the ball is passed, it is a rush type of 6R to 16R ”and a voice display is performed, and a picture indicating the route on the left gate 2575L side with an arrow is displayed (see FIG. 211).

  Further, when the game ball fired by the player is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side by the distribution unit 2550, the ball is passed to the right route indicating that the “one-announcement type” jackpot game is executed. And 16R or 2R one-shot notification type ”are displayed and voice output is performed, and a picture showing the route on the right gate 575R side with an arrow is displayed (see FIG. 212).

  As a result, when the player launches the game ball at the timing when the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate L side, the “rush type” jackpot game is executed, and the timing at which the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate R side When a game ball is fired, it is possible to grasp that a “one-shot notification type” jackpot game is executed.

  After that, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and audio output, and a picture indicating that the “rush type” is 2R or 16R, and “ A picture indicating that “one notification type” is any of 6 to 16R is displayed (see FIG. 213).

  Immediately thereafter, characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and voice output are performed. At this time, in order to have an impact, characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” are displayed so as to cover almost the entire area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the normal voice output mode ( For example, voice output is performed in a mode different from a mode in which voice is output by a single character (for example, a mode in which voice is output simultaneously by a plurality of characters). When the performance shown in FIG. 213 is finished and the characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and voice output are performed, the compulsory interval period ends at this timing, and distribution is performed. Detection of game balls by the detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated.

  When the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated, when the game ball is launched on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, An image is displayed indicating whether it is time to distribute to the left gate 2575 (distribution detection sensor 2580L) or timing to distribute to the right gate (distribution detection sensor 2580R). Specifically, “ON” is displayed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and indicators are displayed on the left side and the right side starting from this “ON”. .

  As shown in FIG. 214, when a game ball is fired while the left indicator is lit, the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side, and a “rush type” jackpot game is executed. . Also, as shown in FIG. 215, if the game ball is fired while the right indicator is lit, the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, and the “one-announcement type” jackpot game Is executed. Thus, the remaining time at each timing can be visually grasped by displaying an indicator as to whether the game ball thus fired is distributed to the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. can do.

  Here, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is an image in which the indicator on the left side is lit as the position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 is switched (see, for example, FIG. 214). And an image in which the right indicator is lit (for example, see FIG. 215). That is, when the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side to the position where the game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R, the right side indicator from the image in which the left side indicator is lit The image changes to a lit image. Further, when the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched from the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the right gate 2575R side to the position for distributing the game ball to the route on the left gate 2575L, the left indicator from the image in which the right side indicator is lit. The image changes to a lit image. In this way, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed based on the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched.

  When the right side indicator and the left side indicator are lit, the player who sees the lighting mode of the indicator can select the desired side between “rush type” and “single notification type”. The time required for this is, for example, 5000 msec. That is, every 5000 msec, the valve unit 2551b of the sorting unit 2550 moves, and accordingly, the image in which the right side indicator is lit and the image in which the left side indicator is lit are switched.

  However, although the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed based on the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched, the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are displayed. When the timing of the change is synchronized, there is a possibility that the game balls will be distributed to a route (a route on the left gate 2575L side or a route on the right gate 2575R side) against the player's will. This is because the player tends to fire the game ball in consideration of the time from launching the game ball to reaching the sorting unit 2550. For example, a player is trying to select a “rush type” jackpot game, but in anticipation that the left indicator will end soon, before the left indicator ends, May cause a ball to fire. In such a case, there is a possibility that a jackpot game of a type contrary to the will of the player will be executed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the position of the valve portion 2551b is delayed from the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched within a range in which the position of the valve portion 2551b and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be aligned. The image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed. As a result, in anticipation that the lighting of the indicator will end soon, even if the player launches a game ball before the lighting of the indicator ends, It is possible to avoid the jackpot game being executed, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  “Within the range where alignment between the position of the valve portion 2551b and the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be achieved” means that the game ball was fired while the left-side indicator was displayed. This game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, or this game ball is distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side even though the game ball is fired while the right indicator is lit. It suffices if it is within a range where there is no such thing.

  Then, as a result of the player selecting, for example, a “one-announcement type” jackpot game, the launched game balls are distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays “one-announcement type”. "Is displayed in a form covering almost the entire area of the display screen. As a result, there is a possibility that the jackpot game (16R jackpot game) having a prize ball amount larger than the 11.8R prize ball amount, which is the average expected value of the prize ball amount, will be executed. It is possible to inspire player psychology by amplifying a sense of expectation.

  After that, if the above-mentioned character display of “attention to rattle” is displayed as an indication to urge attention to the back lower right effect unit 3600, and the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern A display indicating that the 16-round jackpot game is executed, and a display indicating that the 2-round jackpot game is executed unless the effect ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 is striped are displayed. (See FIG. 216).

  At this time, the lighting effect being performed on the game area is darkened so as to stand out so that the place where the player should watch is conspicuous, and the back lower right effect unit 3600 is turned on with bright illumination. . In particular, at this point in time, the progress of the game is still being forcibly stopped, so that both the trend of the game balls launched toward the game area and the acting role, as in conventional pachinko machines. There is no need to watch. Therefore, whether or not the jackpot game to be played is a jackpot game (16R jackpot game) having a prize ball amount larger than the 11.8R prize ball amount that is the average expected value of the prize balls. Not only can the attention of the player be taken, but also the player's gaze can be shifted to the back lower right directing unit 3600 without being distracted by the trend of the game ball.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a big hit, the condition device is activated and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is a big hit. Despite the fact that an image of the effect is displayed, the progress of the game is forcibly stopped for a predetermined period, and when this is stopped, the description of the game content (game technique) until the jackpot game is executed (In other words, it can be said that the game technique is forcibly explained by providing an interval period). In other words, the player can reliably select the jackpot game mode so that the jackpot game mode against the player's will is not executed. Therefore, rather than being based on the idea of explaining the gaming technique during the interval period, in order to explain the gaming technique, it is necessary to reset the game until then (until the lottery result is a big win) This is based on the idea of providing

  Furthermore, even if the game ball passes through the gate 2575 against the player's will as a result of the player accidentally or excessively firing the game ball after the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed, It is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being executed in a mode contrary to the will of the player. Specifically, regardless of whether the player passes the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R as a result of accidentally or excessively launching the game ball, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580 is invalidated. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the jackpot game being executed in a manner contrary to the will of the player.

  In other words, after the image indicating that the jackpot is displayed, it is assumed that the player has fired a game ball in an attempt to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. However, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated, and the progress to the big hit game remains stopped. Even if the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated, the jackpot game does not proceed unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. The jackpot game can be started by the player's intention. Furthermore, the type of jackpot game can be selected according to the player's intention. At this time, the progress of the game is stopped, and the lighting effect is performed so that the sorting unit 2550 and the back lower right effect unit 3600 stand out, so that the player can play the game balls launched toward the game area. It is not necessary to pay attention to the trend, and attention can be paid to the effect sphere released from the lower right effect unit 3600.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by allowing the player to select the type of jackpot game according to the timing at which the game ball is fired, there is a possibility that a jackpot game contrary to the player's will be executed. We try to eliminate as much as possible. For example, it is possible to select the type of jackpot game by categorizing left-handed and right-handed, but especially the game ball immediately after launch, even though the game ball was fired with the intention of left-handed It may be right-handed or left-handed even though it has fired a game ball to make a right-hand shot. In this regard, by allowing the player to select the type of jackpot game depending on the timing at which the game ball is fired, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a jackpot game contrary to the player's intention is executed. Furthermore, since the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed with a delay from the timing at which the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched, even if the player flies and fires a game ball. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the execution of a jackpot game of a type contrary to the player's will, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, even after the jackpot image indicating that the jackpot is displayed, the explanation interval period effect timer before the conditional device is activated is timed up. Until then, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. Then, during the explanation interval effect in which the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated, the jackpot game to be started is started. Explanation of game contents (operation procedure) is displayed (see FIGS. 210 to 213). However, whether or not to explain the game content for starting the jackpot game is whether or not the lottery result for the first special random number or the second special random number is a variable R probability variable jackpot, It is decided according to the gaming state when it is a big hit.

  Specifically, among the lottery results for the second special random number acquired based on the start winning to the second start opening 1506, the probability variation state and the time shortening state among the big winnings (the jackpot related to the second special symbol) In the case of the first variable R jackpot (when the probability variation function and the short-time function are activated), a description of the game content for starting the jackpot game is displayed (see FIGS. 210 to 213).

  However, even if the lottery result for the second special random number acquired based on the start winning to the second start port 2102 is a variable R probability variation jackpot (variable R probability variation jackpot in relation to the second special symbol) When the variable R probability variation is the second or later in the probability variation state and the time shortening state (when the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated) (that is, when so-called continuous change), for example, as shown in FIGS. The description of the game content for starting the big jackpot game is not displayed, and characters such as “Aim for the one you like ♪” and voice output are performed as shown in FIG. A picture indicating that “type” is one of 6R to 16R, and a picture indicating that “one notification type” is 16R or 2R are displayed.

  As a result, when a jackpot game based on the variable R probability variable jackpot is executed again in a gaming state (probability short time state) shortly after the jackpot game based on the variable R probability variable jackpot is executed, FIG. Since the explanation of the game content until the jackpot game is started as shown in 210 is not displayed, it is possible to avoid having to repeat the same explanation display.

  Even if the lottery result is a jackpot, when the jackpot type flag ON in step S317 is a jackpot flag other than the variable R probability variable jackpot, the lottery result in the short time state of the probability change is a variable R probability jackpot Similarly to the above, description of the game content for starting the jackpot game is not performed. When the jackpot type flag ON in step S317 is a jackpot flag other than the variable R probability variable jackpot, regardless of which of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R the game ball is passed through, a predetermined number of rounds is used. This is because the jackpot game is executed.

  In addition, even if a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R after the image indicating that it is a big hit, the length of a period during which the game ball is invalidated is also in the gaming state. Depending on it.

  Specifically, among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, when the condition device is activated in the case of the first variable R jackpot in the probability variation state and the time shortening state (when the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated) While the description of the game content until the jackpot game is started is displayed, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. However, among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, when the condition device is activated in the case of the second and subsequent variable R jackpots in the probability variation state and the time shortening state (when the probability variation function and the time shortening function are activated), After the image indicating that the game is a big hit, a game ball that is accidentally or excessively launched by the player is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, which is contrary to the player's will. Characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and voice output are performed for a predetermined period that can prevent the type of jackpot game from being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 213) Only), the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the progress of the game is unnecessarily stopped and the interest is lowered.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game balls are distributed to either the route on the distribution detection sensor 2580L side or the route on the distribution detection sensor 2580R side by the distribution unit 2550, which route In order to be able to grasp for a long time whether or not the game ball is distributed, the distribution suggestion member 2590 on the side where the game ball is distributed is lit at least until the big hit game is completed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a player can distribute a game ball that has been shot into the game area by his / her own operation to a distribution destination according to his / her intention. Yes. That is, in the case of the variable R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, either “one-notification type” or “rush type” can be selected according to the player's intention. .

  In the case of a variable R-probability jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, when the launched game ball is distributed to the route on the right gate 2575R side, it means that “one notification type” is selected and two rounds The jackpot game is executed with a probability of 30%, and the 16-round jackpot game is executed with a probability of 70%. Further, as will be described with reference to FIG. 216, when “one notification type” is selected, a rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600 is executed from the first round to the second round in the jackpot game. The FIG. 216 is a diagram showing a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device and the flow of the display effect executed when the one notification type is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 216, in the rattle lottery effect at the time of selecting “one notification type”, first, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the back right lower effect unit 3600 to the first round to the second round in the jackpot game. A character display of “focus on rattle” as a display for prompting gaze, a display that a 16-round jackpot game is executed if the effect ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 is striped, If the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, a display indicating that a two-round jackpot game is executed is displayed.

  Then, in the rattle lottery effect at the time of selecting “one-announcement type”, when a 16-round jackpot game is determined in the second round of the jackpot game, a striped pattern from the lower right bottom rendering unit 3600 to the outside When the two-round jackpot game is determined, the non-striped effect ball 3610 is released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside. That is, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, 16 rounds of jackpot game are executed as a mode of jackpot game. On the other hand, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, a two-round jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game mode.

  After that, at the end of the rattle lottery effect at the time of selecting “one notification type” (at the end of the second round in the jackpot game), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is released to the outside from the back lower right effect unit 3600. When the production ball 3610 has a striped pattern, a display indicating that the execution of the 16-round jackpot game has been confirmed (in this example, “16R confirmed”) is performed, so that 16 It can be determined that the jackpot game continues until the round. As described above, when the “one-shot notification type” is selected, whether or not the striped effect ball 3610 is released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside until the second round in the jackpot game, that is, It must be thrilled whether or not the 16 round jackpot game is executed, but when the striped stage ball 3610 is released from the back lower right stage production unit 3600 to the outside in the second round in the jackpot game. The 16-round jackpot game is confirmed, and the player can enjoy the jackpot game with confidence from the end of the second round to the 16th round.

  On the other hand, at the end of the rattle lottery effect at the time of selecting the “one notification type” (at the end of the second round in the jackpot game), the liquid crystal display device 1900 has been released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside. When the effect ball 3610 is not a striped pattern, an indication that the execution of the two-round jackpot game has been confirmed (in this example, “2R end”) is displayed. It can be determined that the jackpot game is over.

  Next, in the case of the variable R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, when the launched game balls are distributed to the route on the left gate 2575L side, “Rush type” is selected, and 6 A round jackpot game is executed with a probability of 8%, a jackpot game of 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds is executed with a probability of 17%, and a 16 jackpot jackpot game is executed with a probability of 24%. To do. In addition, as will be described with reference to FIG. 230, when the “rush type” is selected, the 1st to 6th rounds, the 7th to 8th rounds, the 9th to 10th rounds, the 11th to 12th rounds in the jackpot game The rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is sequentially executed over a plurality of times of every 2nd round of the 13th to 14th rounds. FIG. 230 is a diagram showing a flow of a display effect that is performed when a rush type is selected, which is a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in the first rattle lottery effect at the time of selecting the “rush type”, first, the liquid crystal display device 1900 goes to the back lower right effect unit 3600 from the first round to the sixth round in the jackpot game. As a display for prompting the user to pay attention, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, two rounds of jackpot game will be added. If the display ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, a display to the effect that the jackpot game ends in the round is performed.

  In the first rattle lottery effect when “Rush Type” is selected, when a jackpot game of 8 rounds or more is determined in the sixth round of the jackpot game, the back right lower stage rendering unit 3600 goes to the outside. When a striped effect ball 3610 is released and a six-round jackpot game is determined, a non-striped effect ball 3610 is released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside. That is, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, a bonus game of eight or more rounds is executed by adding two rounds as a bonus game mode. On the other hand, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, a six-round jackpot game is executed as a jackpot game mode.

  After that, at the end of the first rattle lottery effect at the time of selecting the “rush type” (at the end of the sixth round in the jackpot game), the liquid crystal display device 1900 releases the back right lower effect unit 3600 to the outside. When the rendered ball 3610 is striped, the end of the sixth round is displayed by displaying that the continuation of the jackpot game after the seventh round is confirmed (in this example, “round continuation” is displayed) It can be determined that the jackpot game will continue for at least 8 rounds. On the other hand, at the end of the first rattle lottery effect when the “rush type” is selected (at the end of the sixth round in the jackpot game), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is released to the outside from the lower right effect unit 3600. When the production ball 3610 is not striped, the end of the sixth round is displayed by displaying that the end of the jackpot game in the sixth round is confirmed (in this example, “round end” is displayed). Accordingly, it is possible to determine that the jackpot game ends.

  In addition, when the “rush type” is selected, the seventh round to the eighth round, the ninth round to the tenth round, 11 as long as the continuation of the big hit game round is confirmed as the production result of the previous rattle lottery effect. The rattle lottery effect similar to the first round is repeatedly executed every two rounds of the round to the twelfth round and the 13th to the 14th rounds. In other words, in each of the 8th round, 10th round, 12th round, and 14th round in the rattle lottery production, if the production ball 3610 released from the back lower right production unit 3600 is a stripe pattern, As a mode, a jackpot game in which at least two rounds are added to the round is executed. On the other hand, in each of the 8th, 10th, 12th, and 14th rounds in the rattle lottery effect, if the effect ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 is not a striped pattern, The jackpot game ends in that round.

  When the fifth rattle lottery effect is executed at the time of selecting the “rush type”, at the end (at the end of the 14th round in the jackpot game), the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a lower right effect unit 3600. When the production ball 3610 released from the outside is a striped pattern, a display that the continuation of the jackpot game after the 15th round has been confirmed (in this example, the display of “continue round”) is performed. It is possible to determine that the jackpot game continues up to 16 rounds after the 14th round ends. After that, at the end of the 16th round in the jackpot game, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that the 16th round jackpot game has expired (in this example, “16R end”), With the end of the 16 rounds, it is possible to determine that the maximum number of rounds has been executed to the end when the “rush type” is selected.

  As described above, when the “rush type” is selected, the first to sixth rounds and the seventh and subsequent rounds in the jackpot game are in increments of two rounds. Whether or not it is released, that is, whether or not a jackpot game with two rounds added is executed, it is possible to enjoy a rattle lottery effect over a plurality of times. In addition, if you select “One-shot notification type”, you may choose between two rounds of jackpot game and 16 rounds of jackpot game. When the “Rush type” is selected, a lot of jackpots are made in increments of 2 rounds from 6 rounds to 16 rounds. There are cases where the execution mode of the game is prepared, and the effect result of the final rattle lottery effect (whether or not the 16-round jackpot game is executed) is finally notified at the 14th round in the jackpot game. ing. In other words, whether to select “single announcement type” or “rush type” is a difference in the mode of jackpot game to be executed (2 rounds or 16 rounds, or 6 rounds to 16 rounds). The player's preference will be divided not only by the difference between rounds of 2 rounds, etc., but also by the difference in production, and whether to select “One-shot notification type” or “Rush type” Can give fun.

  In addition, if you select “one-announcement type”, you may choose between two rounds of jackpot game and 16 rounds of jackpot game. When the game is notified, the difference from the 16-round jackpot game is as large as 14 rounds, so that the player recognizes that a great deal of damage has occurred, and the player is greatly discouraged. On the other hand, if “Rush Type” is selected, it may be in 2 round increments from 6 rounds to 16 rounds. Considering that the addition of two rounds has failed, the player only recognizes that a small amount of damage has occurred, and the player's discouragement can be reduced.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example, in the case of a variable R probability variable jackpot among jackpots related to the second special symbol, the player's intention is selected from either “one-notification type” or “rush type”. Can be selected. And if the player is not good at “rush type” or if the remaining game time is short (for example, just before closing), select “one notification type” and even if a two-round jackpot game is decided Individual games, such as quickly digesting the jackpot game and aiming for the next jackpot, or conversely, if you have plenty of game time, you can enjoy the jackpot game slowly while immersing in the satisfaction that you won the jackpot It is a specification that can be enjoyed according to the situation of the same player as well as the preference of the player. In addition, depending on whether “one-shot notification type” or “rush type” is selected, the content of the effect of the rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is different, It is also possible to select from specifications (different in nature) (difference between 2 rounds or 16 rounds, or 6 rounds to 16 rounds in 2 rounds). Although it may be selected according to preference, the effect is an effect accompanied by the determination of the number of rounds in the jackpot game, so the gameability of selecting the effect in a more tense state will be added, The degree of freedom for selecting “notification type” or “rush type” is high.

  When the player selects “one notification type”, that is, when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the player detects the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. When the game ball is fired as described above, the mode of the jackpot game is a two-round jackpot game or a 16-round jackpot game based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580R. Is determined by an internal lottery. Further, when the “rush type” is selected, that is, when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is enabled, the game is performed so that the player can detect the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L. When the ball is fired, the mode of the jackpot game is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L, which is one of the jackpot games of 6 rounds to 16 rounds in two rounds. It is decided by a lottery.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the round number of the big hit game is determined by the internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensors 2580R and 2580L. In the rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600, it is shown that the number of rounds of the jackpot game is determined based on the result of the rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600. Yes.

  More specifically, even if the lottery result for the second special random number is a variable R probability variable jackpot, as described above, the jackpot game is not started with this alone, and the player can select, for example, “one notification type” or “rush type”. Is selected, a rattle lottery effect (external lottery effect) using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is executed. The rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is, as a result of an internal lottery performed based on the fact that a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580R, When the “notification type” is selected, if a 16-round jackpot game is determined, a striped effect ball 3610 is emitted, and if a two-round jackpot game is determined, a non-striped effect ball 3610 is displayed. It is trying to release. Further, when the “rush type” is selected, if it is determined that the jackpot game has a larger number of rounds than the round at the time of executing the rattle lottery effect, a striped effect ball 3610 is emitted, and when the rattle lottery effect is executed. When the game is determined to be a jackpot game with the same number of rounds as in the round, a production ball 3610 that is not a striped pattern is emitted.

  However, when this is viewed from the player, it is based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensors 2580R and 2580L when the player selects either “one notification type” or “rush type”. A rattle lottery using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is performed, and it is shown that the jackpot game is executed in the mode of the jackpot game determined by the rattle lottery. In particular, although the mode of the jackpot game determined by the internal lottery performed based on the game balls detected by the distribution detection sensors 2580R and 2580L is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, This display shows that after the effect ball 3160 is released from the lower right effect unit 3600, a time necessary for the player to confirm whether the released effect ball 3610 is a striped pattern or not is striped. Not done until.

  That is, after the effect ball 3160 is released from the back lower right effect unit 3600, the mode of the big hit game is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the pattern of the released effect ball 3160. -ing Therefore, the mode of the jackpot game is originally determined by an internal lottery performed based on the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensors 2580R and 2580L, but the back right lower effect unit 3600 It becomes possible to perform a lottery effect as if it was determined based on the result of the rattle lottery using (the rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600 is generated by the game balls by the distribution detection sensors 2580R and 2580L. Based on what was detected). This makes it possible to attract the player's interest to the rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600, which is different from the performance of a finished race like a conventional pachinko machine, for example. Can be suppressed.

  In this way, by performing the lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600, it can be shown to the player as if the mode of the jackpot game is determined based on the external lottery result, A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  By the way, when the lottery effect is performed as if the mode of the jackpot game is determined based on such an external lottery result, for example, if the back lower right effect unit 3600 malfunctions, the player will be awakened. There is a fear. In this respect, the back right lower stage production unit 3600 of the present embodiment is configured so as not to cause such a malfunction as described above, so that the jackpot game is based on an external lottery result without causing the player to wake up. It is possible to execute a lottery effect as if the mode of the item is determined.

  Next, in the case of a jackpot related to the first special symbol, a jackpot in which the hourly function is activated after the jackpot game ends (12R probability variable jackpot or 10R probability variable A jackpot at low probability non-short-time, 12R at high probability non-short-time) A jackpot (10% probability A jackpot or 10R chance B jackpot) is determined with a probability of 50% (70% when the probability is not high), and the time-saving function is not activated after the jackpot game state ends (when the probability is low) 10R probability variation B big hit, 10R probability variation C big hit or 10R normal big hit, 10R probability variation C big hit or 10R normal big hit when high probability non-short-term is determined with a probability of 50% (however, high probability non-short time is 30%). In other words, a 50% probability (however, high probability non-probability mode) (high probability non-probability mode. Production mode when the probability variation function and the short time function are activated) that can be discriminated to control to a high probability time-short state after the jackpot game ends. High probability latent mode (70% at the time of shortage), and the high probability state is hidden after the jackpot game ends, that is, it is difficult to determine whether to control to a low probability non-short time state or a high probability non-short time state ( Probabilistic latent mode, which is when the time-short function is inactive but does not know whether or not the probability-variable function is in operation) with a 50% probability (however, 30% when the high probability non-short-time is short). In addition, as will be described with reference to FIG. 231, a rattle lottery effect using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is executed from the 1st to the 12th round or the 10th round in the jackpot game. FIG. 231 is a diagram showing a display effect performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device, and the flow of the display effect executed at the time of the big hit related to the first special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 231, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R as the explanation interval effect and the gate effective effect after the decorative symbol at the jackpot related to the first special symbol stops changing. A character display “Please make a right strike” is displayed as an indication to prompt the player to make a right strike in order to pass the crab game ball. When the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the player needs to select either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R as in the case of the variable R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol. In addition, no matter which of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected by the player, the subsequent game contents are not affected. Only has been done.

  Next, when the game ball fired by making a right strike passes either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, a rattle lottery effect using the back right lower effect unit 3600 is executed. First, from the first to twelfth round or the tenth round in the jackpot game, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a character display of “focus on rattle” as a display for prompting attention to the lower right bottom rendering unit 3600, If the effect ball 3610 released to the outside from the lower right effect unit 3600 is a striped pattern, an indication to enter the high-probability time-short mode after the jackpot game is finished, and the effect is released to the outside from the lower right effect unit 3600 If the staging ball 3610 is not striped, an indication to enter the high probability latent mode is displayed after the jackpot game ends. It is.

  And in the rattle lottery effect at the jackpot related to the first special symbol, in the 12th round or the 10th round in the jackpot game, the jackpot in which the time-shortening function is activated after the jackpot gaming state is finished (at the time of low probability non-short-time, 12R probability variable jackpot or When 10R probability variation A big hit, high probability non-short-time 12R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation A big hit or 10R probability variation B big hit) are determined, striped effect balls 3610 are emitted from the back lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside. The jackpot that does not activate the time-saving function after the jackpot gaming state is finished (10R probability variable B jackpot, 10R probability variable C jackpot or 10R normal jackpot when low probability non-shortage, 10R chance variable C jackpot or 10R normal jackpot when high probability non-shortage) is determined. If it is From door 3600 to the outside to release the production sphere 3610 is not a striped pattern. That is, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, the high probability time-short mode is executed as the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, if the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, the high probability latent mode is executed as the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game.

  After that, at the end of the rattle lottery effect at the jackpot related to the first special symbol (at the end of the 12th round or the 10th round in the jackpot game), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is externally connected from the lower right bottom rendering unit 3600. When the effect ball 3610 released to the screen has a striped pattern, a display indicating that the high probability short-time mode has been entered after the jackpot game ends (in this example, “high probability short-time mode entry”) is displayed. After the jackpot gaming state is finished, the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated, and the high probability time short / medium mode is entered to clearly determine that the high probability time reduction mode is controlled. As described above, when the striped effect ball 3610 is released from the lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside, it is determined that the probability variation function and the short-time function are activated after the end of the big hit game state. It becomes easy to win a big hit again after the end of the game, and the player can play the game with peace of mind until the big hit again. In particular, when the short-time function is activated, it is possible to enter a game ball into the second start port 2102. Therefore, the jackpot game based on the jackpot related to the first special symbol (substantially four rounds in this example). The expectation that a jackpot game (for example, 16 rounds) that can acquire a large amount of game balls based on the jackpot related to the second special symbol will increase, and the player expects to acquire a large amount of game balls until the jackpot is won again You can play games while doing so.

  On the other hand, at the end of the rattle lottery effect at the jackpot related to the first special symbol (at the end of the 12th round or the 10th round in the jackpot game), the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the back right bottom rendering unit 3600 to the outside. When the released production ball 3610 is not a striped pattern, an indication to enter the high probability latent mode after the jackpot game is finished (in this example, “high probability latent mode entry”) is displayed. Regardless of whether or not the probability variation function is activated after the end of the big hit gaming state, the time reduction function is not activated, and it is determined whether or not the high probability latent mode is entered and the high probability non-time reduction state is controlled. Can not. As described above, when the non-striped production ball 3610 is released from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside, it is difficult to determine whether or not the probability variation function is activated after the big hit gaming state is finished, and again the big hit Until then, players have to play games in anxiety. In particular, when the time shortening function is not activated, it is not possible to enter the game ball into the second start port 2102 and it is not easy to make a big hit again. You have to play games with worry.

  As with the jackpot related to the first special symbol, the rattle using the lower right effect unit 3600 is also used when the 4R probability variable jackpot and the 4R normal jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol. A lottery effect is executed. That is, if the 4R probability variation jackpot is determined among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, if the stage ball 3610 emitted from the back lower right stage rendering unit 3600 to the outside as a rattle lottery stage production is a striped pattern , It is directed to be able to enter a high probability time-short mode (probability change mode. Production mode when the probability variation function and time-short function is activated) that can be determined to control to a high probability time-short state after the jackpot game ends. Is running. On the other hand, when the 4R regular jackpot is determined among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, as the rattle lottery effect, the effect ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 is not a striped pattern , It becomes possible to enter the low probability non-time-short mode (normal mode. Production mode when the probability variation function and the time-short function are not activated) that can be determined to control to the low probability non-time short state after the jackpot game ends So that the production is executed.

  In addition, as described above, the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game is the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol, that is, the jackpot in which the time reduction function is activated after the end of the jackpot game (at the time of low probability non-short-time, 12R probability variable big hit) Or 10R probability variation A big hit, 12R probability variation big hit 10R probability variation A big hit or 10R probability variation B big hit at the time of high probability non-short-time, or a jackpot (10R probability variation B at the time of low probability non-short time short time) when the time-shortening function does not operate Depending on whether the jackpot is 10R probability variable C jackpot or 10R normal jackpot, 10R probability variable C jackpot or 10R normal jackpot at the time of high probability non-temporal), after entering the jackpot game, enter the high probability short-time mode or enter the high-probability latent mode Whether to rush is determined by an internal lottery.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game is determined by the internal lottery when determining the type of the jackpot related to the first special symbol, In the rattle lottery effect using the lower effect unit 3600, the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game (ie, high probability after the end of the jackpot game is based on the result of the rattle lottery effect using the lower right effect unit 3600). It can be shown to the player as if it is determined whether or not to control to the short time state, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In this example, in the case of the variable R probability variable big hit among the big bonuses related to the second special symbol, the explanation interval production and the gate effective production are executed, and the role of each of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R is carefully explained. Even if the game is performed, the explanation does not enter the player's ear, the game ball is launched without enjoying any gameability such as which gate 2575 is aimed at, and the game ball may pass through one of the gates 2575. is there. Then, when a game ball passes through one of the gates 2575, a flashy effect that notifies the player that the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game has been determined is executed as a rattle lottery effect, and finally the gate 2575 is moved to the game ball. Some players notice that the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined when the game passes. However, if a more advantageous number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined as the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, the player will not be disappointed, but a more disadvantageous number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) When the game is determined, the player may be discouraged and the game using the gate 2575 may be disliked.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot related to the first special symbol during the control of the low probability non-time-short state (normal state), it is 12 rounds or 10 rounds as a jackpot game, both of which are open for a long time Since the round is four rounds, the timing at which the game ball passes through one of the gates 2575 does not affect the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game. In addition, even in the case of a big hit related to the first special symbol, when a game ball passes through one of the gates 2575, an effect of notifying whether or not to enter a high-probability time-short state as a rattle lottery effect is provided. Since it is executed extensively, it is easy to notice that it is meaningful to pass the game ball to one of the gates 2575 at the time of the big hit related to the first special symbol. As a result, after the transition from the low probability non-short-time state (normal state) to the high probability short-time state, when the variable R probability variable big-bonus among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the low-probability non-short-time state (normal) In the control of the (state), each of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R in the explanation interval effect and the gate effective effect is experienced by having experienced that it is meaningful to pass the game ball to one of the gates 2575. It is easy to draw attention to the explanation of the role that the player has, and the player can fully enjoy the pleasure of selecting either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (“rush type” or “single notification type”). Can do.

  Further, in this example, when the big hit (12R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation A big hit, 10R positive variation B big hit, 10R positive variation C big hit, 10R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol, the left gate 2575L or the right gate By passing the game ball through 2575R (the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R), notification is made as to whether or not to enter the high-probability time-short state after the jackpot game is over. Further, in the case of the variable R probability variable big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the big hit game is determined by passing the game ball through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. At the same time, the decision result is notified. Also, in the case of 4R probability variation jackpot or 4R normal jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, by passing the game ball to the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, a high probability time-short state after the jackpot game ends. Notification of whether or not to continue. Then, since the player can freely determine the time until the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (in this example, the execution time of the gate effective effect), whether or not the player enters the high probability time-short state, etc. Can greatly enjoy the expectation of Also, in the case of the variable R probability variable jackpot among the jackpots related to the second special symbol, when determining the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, there is a sense of tension that the number of rounds will be determined by one's own hand from now on Also, a synergistic effect with the feeling of expectation due to the impatience that the determination result cannot be obtained until the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R can be expected.

  Next, with regard to the rattle effect in which the player is informed of the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery by performing the rattle lottery using the back lower right effect unit 3600, referring to FIGS. explain. The rattle lottery (rattle effect) using the back lower right effect unit 3600 is actually based on the result of the internal special lottery, but based on the result of the rattle lottery when viewed from the player's viewpoint. This is based on the idea that the display mode of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is determined. FIG. 217 to FIG. 220 are diagrams showing modes of display effects performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery.

  As described above, the first special random number is acquired based on the start winning at the first start port 1502, and the second special random number is acquired based on the start winning at the second start port 1506. Then, a special lottery is performed using these special random numbers, and a predetermined display effect is performed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery.

  First, when reaching the reach effect in the display effect based on the result of the special lottery, a plurality of patterns including the pattern of the lucky ticket are displayed (see FIG. 217 (A)). Then, any one picture is selected from the plurality of pictures displayed in this way. In the present embodiment, one picture is selected, but it goes without saying that the picture is not limited to this.

  When any one of the plurality of patterns is selected, the selected pattern is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 217 (B)). In FIG. 217 (B), an image indicating that a lucky ticket has been selected is displayed. When the lucky ticket is selected in this way, the player can display the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in order to clearly indicate to the player that the right to perform the rattle lottery using the back lower right effect unit 3600 has been granted. Is displayed on the substantially whole area (see FIG. 218 (A)) and is output as a sound.

  When the character “rattle chance” is displayed over almost the entire display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the sound is output, the result of the rattle effect and the content of the profit given to the player corresponding to this are displayed. (FIG. 218 (B)). The result of the rattle effect and the content of the profit given to the player corresponding to this result are specifically shown in FIG. 218 (B) when the rattle lottery is performed. If the production ball 3610 released from 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, a “Tropical Travel Invitation” is presented, and if the production ball 3610 released from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside is not a stripe pattern, “pocket” “Tissue” is displayed as a gift, and “Tropical Travel Invitation” and “Pocket Tissue” both indicate that the number of remaining prizes is three. Thereby, the player can grasp that the probability of winning the “Tropical Trip Invitation” is 50%. Here, when comparing “Tropical Travel Invitation” and “Pocket Tissue”, it can be commonly thought of that “Tropical Travel Invitation” is more advantageous for the player. For example, if the result of the rattle lottery is “Tropical Travel Invitation”, the player will be shown that the probability variation function will be activated, and if the result of the rattle lottery is “Pocket Tissue”, the probability variation function The player may be shown to be a normal jackpot that does not work.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (B), if the stage ball 3610 released from the back lower right stage production unit 3600 is striped when a rattle lottery is performed, a “Tropical Trip Invitation” is presented. After the image indicating that “Pocket Tissue” is presented if the production ball 3610 released from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, the player is watching the lower right production Guidance display for guiding to the effect unit 3600 is performed (see FIG. 219A). At this time, in order to highlight the place where the player should pay attention, the lighting effect being performed on the game area is darkened so as to be plain, and the back lower right effect unit 3600 is lit brightly. In addition, the back lower right effect unit 3600 rotates as if a lottery lottery is being performed, and in order to emphasize this, a display effect as if the rattle lottery device is rotating is a liquid crystal display device 1900. Displayed on the display screen.

  Then, when the striped effect ball is released from the lower right effect unit 3600, an image indicating that the “Tropical Travel Invitation” has been hit is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (FIG. 219 (B)). After that, as an image indicating that the game state is controlled to the high probability gaming state, the characters “Tropical mode entry!” Are displayed largely over almost the entire area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (see FIG. 220) and output as audio. The Thereby, the player can grasp that the gaming state after the jackpot game is ended is controlled to the high probability gaming state. In this way, the result of the special lottery is informed by the rattle effect by the lower right effect unit 3600.

  By the way, on the liquid crystal display device 1900, as in a conventional pachinko machine, a symbol (decorative symbol) is variably displayed with a variation pattern based on the result of the special lottery, and the player displays this symbol when the symbol stops. The result of the special lottery can be grasped according to the displayed form. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to this, if the effect ball 3610 released from the back lower right effect unit 3600 to the outside is a striped pattern, it is controlled to a high probability gaming state, and the back lower right effect unit. If the effect ball 3610 released from 3600 to the outside is not a striped pattern, the normal gaming state is controlled (more specifically, the previous gaming state is continued). That is, whether or not it is controlled to the high probability gaming state is determined based on the special lottery, but by showing the player the rattle lottery using the back lower right effect unit 3600, It is possible to make the player think as if the result is reflected in the gaming state. In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp the result of the special lottery by looking at the mode when the variation of the decorative symbol based on the result of the special lottery is stopped. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation of the decorative pattern based on the result of the special lottery and the rattle lottery using the lower right rendering unit 3600 are not performed in parallel. After the production ball 3610 is released from the lower right production unit 3600 to the outside, the variation of the decorative design is stopped. That is, the effect of the rattle lottery is made by causing the effect ball 3610 to be released to the outside from the back lower right effect unit 3600 before the decoration symbol is stopped, even though the decorative symbol is still fluctuating. Based on the above, it is shown as if the decorative pattern in the changing state is stopped. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the rattle production using the back lower right production unit 3600 is clearly different from the production of the finished race like a conventional pachinko machine. It becomes possible to give interest to the production using the unit 3600. Further, it is more preferable that the display effect by the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed based on the result of the rattle lottery. For example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the result of the special lottery is shown to the player not only by the manner in which the decorative symbol is stopped but also by the manner of display effect by the character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 By changing the aspect of the display effect after the effect ball 3610 is released from the effect unit 3600, it is possible to make it appear as if the display effect is being performed based on the result of the rattle lottery. .

  Note that the result of the special lottery notified by the rattle production by the back lower right production unit 3600 is not limited to the jackpot type (whether or not it is controlled to the high probability gaming state), for example, the winning result (the jackpot game is executed) Or not). In this case, even though the decorative symbol has fluctuated and the result of the special lottery has not been displayed yet, the result of the special lottery is displayed by stopping this decorative symbol, and the lower right effect is produced. The effect ball 3610 is released from the unit 3600 to the outside, and whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit is notified according to the released effect ball 3610.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the rotating cylinder 3608 is used in the rotating cylinder 3608 having the accommodating recess 3608a that can accommodate the effect ball 3610 of the lower right effect unit 3600 of the rear unit 3000. Since the gap between the outer periphery of the rotating cylinder 3608 and the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602 is within the range of 1/5 to 1/3 of the diameter of the effect ball 3610, the effect ball 3610 is When the rotary cylinder 3608 is rotated while being accommodated in the accommodating recess 3608a, the effect ball 3610 enters the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 whose outer peripheral side is closed by the cylindrical portion 3602b of the back lower right unit base 3602. However, the side notch 361 in the effect ball 3610 is accompanied by the rotation of the rotary cylinder 3608. When the circumferential end of the housing recess 3608a comes into contact with the portion protruding from the housing recess 3608a to the side of the housing recess 3608a, the effect ball 3610 can be returned from the side notch 3612c into the housing recess 3608a, and the discharge flap 3612 side It is possible to prevent the production ball 3610 from being caught between the cylindrical portion 3602b and the rotating cylinder 3608 by the direction notch portion 3612c, to prevent occurrence of a malfunction, and to play a game by interrupting the game. It is possible to entertain the game by avoiding a decrease in the interest of the player.

  In the lower right production unit 3600, the production sphere 3610 is emitted from the discharge port 3630b formed on the outer periphery of the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 that can rotate around the axial center extending in the front-rear direction. Since the player can hardly see the release port 3630b from which the production ball 3610 is released, the production of the production ball can be clearly different from the release of the production ball in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  Furthermore, the rotating cylinder 3608 is arranged in a direction in which the housing recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 in the lower right rendering unit 3600 coincides with the discharge portion 3602c (the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612) of the lower right unit base 3602 from above. The effect ball 3610 that has entered (partially) the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 from inside the accommodation recess 3608a by the rotation of the rotation cylinder 3608 is the rotation cylinder 3608 (accommodation recess 3608a). And the lower end of the side notch 3612c comes into contact with the effect ball 3610 before the end of the upper side in the circumferential direction of the receiving recess 3608a. The production ball 3610 is moved into the housing recess 3608a until the portion comes into contact with the upper side. In addition, due to the gravity acting on the effect sphere 3610, the effect sphere 3610 can be returned into the accommodation recess 3608a by the upper end in the circumferential direction of the accommodation recess 3608a in contact with the effect sphere 3610, and the side notch It is possible to reliably prevent the effect ball 3610 from being sandwiched between the 3612c and the housing recess 3680a and hindering the rotation of the rotary cylinder 3608. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to a problem caused by the rotation of the rotating cylinder 3608 being inhibited, and the player can surely enjoy the effect by the effect ball 3610. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the discharge part 3602c of the lower right lower unit base 3602 in the lower right lower effect unit 3600, that is, the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotation decorative body 3630, the rotary cylinder 3608 and the discharge flap 3612 are discharged. Are reciprocally rotated a plurality of times within a predetermined angle range, and by vibrating the receiving recess 3608a and the side notch 3612c, the dimensional error and positioning error are eliminated and the receiving recess 3608a The production ball 3610 can be released from the discharge part 3602c of the lower right lower unit base 3602, and the production by the production ball 3610 can be surely performed, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be realized. .

  In addition, when the effect ball 3610 is ejected from the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654 in the back lower right effect unit 3600, the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted a plurality of times, and therefore the effect ball 3610 from the ball receiving portion 3654b. Can be reliably discharged toward the collection passage 3652b, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 on which the game ball rolls is forward of the front of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The depth of the stage 2510 in the front-rear direction can be increased compared to a conventional pachinko machine that extends to substantially the same position as the front end of 1110A and has the front end substantially the same position as the front surface of the game panel 1200. Therefore, the game ball can be rolled in various states by the wide stage 2510, and by making the game ball perform various movements on the stage 2510, it prevents the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and makes it hard to get tired. In addition to being able to entertain the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 to the player. To interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the front end of the third stage 2513 in the stage 2510 in which the game ball can roll is extended to substantially the same position as the front end of the front component member 1110A that defines the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200. Since the front end of the third stage 2513 is substantially at the same position as the front end of the game area 1100, when the game ball rolls near the front end of the third stage 2513, the stage in the conventional pachinko machine It is possible to roll the game ball at a position as close to the player as possible as compared to the game ball rolling on the top, making it easier to see the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 and making the movement of the game ball more Can entertain.

  Further, the rear end of the first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 is positioned behind the rear surface of the game panel 1200, and the game ball is positioned on the stage 2510 in front of the front surface of the game panel 1200 and the game. It is possible to roll between the position behind the rear surface of the panel 1200 and the depth in the front-rear direction of the stage 2510 can be made as wide as possible. It can be rolled in a state, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from becoming monotonous by making various movements of the game ball on the stage 2510. A pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the movement of a game ball that rolls over 2510, and that can suppress a decrease in interest in the game. It is possible to truly embody.

  Further, since the center accessory 2500 includes the peripheral wall portion 2503 protruding forward, the stage 2510 arranged in the frame with the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500 being arranged in the frame, the production units 3200, 3400, 3600, the liquid crystal display device 1900, etc. can be made to stand out, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which attracts a player's interest strongly.

  Further, when a game ball enters the first chance inlet 2516 and the second chance inlet 2517 opened on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, from the chance outlet 2518 opened just above the first start opening 2101. Since the game ball is about to be released and the game ball can be received into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with a high probability, the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 is allowed to enter the first chance entrance 2516. Alternatively, the player can be thrilled by whether or not he / she enters the second chance entrance 2517, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game machine 1100 is driven into the game area 1100 with the aim of the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 arranged below the center accessory 2500. Even if the game ball abuts against the obstacle nail below the center accessory 2500 and jumps upward, the game ball bounced by the third stage 2513 bounces downward and enters the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the liquid crystal display device 1900 and causing a problem, and to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the problem. Further, the third stage 2513 for preventing the invasion of the game ball is positioned from the position between the second stage 2512 and the fourth stage 2514 formed on the lower side of the center accessory 2500 from the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). Since the third stage 2513 moves away from the inner periphery of the center accessory 2500, the third stage 2513 can be made relatively inconspicuous and the third stage 2513 extends forward. 2513 can prevent the decoration of other decorations and the like from being obstructed, and the vertical positional relationship between the third stage 2513 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 is farther than that of a conventional pachinko machine. The light emitted from the device 1900 and reflected from the upper surface of the third stage 2513 can be made difficult to reach the player's eyes. Thereby avoiding the appearance of a pachinko machine 1 is deteriorated by preventing the visible glowing top surface of the third stage 2513.

  In addition, the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513 that prevents the invasion of game balls, and abuts against obstacle nails planted below the center accessory 2500. Since it is possible to prevent the game ball that has bounced upward from being placed on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513, the game ball does not pass through the warp entrance 2504 (regular route). It is possible to prevent the player from being supplied onto the stage 2510 and to prevent the player from feeling distrusted by supplying the game ball onto the stage 2510 without passing through the regular route. The game with this pachinko machine 1 can be continued.

  Further, since the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510 are arranged above the third stage 2513 that prevents the game ball from entering, the first stage 2511 is not blocked by the third stage 2513. The game balls rolling on the second stage 2512 can be seen from the player side to make the game balls easy to see, and the game balls rolling on the first stage 2511, the second stage 2512, and the third stage 2513 It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by making the movement entertaining.

  In addition, a stage 2510 is provided that allows the game ball to be released into the game area 1100 at a position immediately above the first start port 2101, and the game ball can be played from the position immediately above the first start port 2101 in the stage 2510. When released into 1100, the game balls are accepted to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 with a high probability, so that the game balls supplied onto the stage 2510 are discharged from directly above the first start port 2101. The player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the game can be expected to be received at the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and rolled on the stage 2510. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball to be played, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Further, since the game ball can be discharged from the stage 2510 directly into the game area 1100 directly above the first start port 2101, the game ball aimed at the warp inlet 2504 is supplied so that the game ball is supplied onto the stage 2510. The player can actively perform the driving operation, can entertain the game ball, and the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 are arranged above the third stage 2513. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the stage 2510 can be seen well, and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered.

  Further, when a game ball enters the warp inlet 2504 of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2505 to the first stage 2511 and then released to the second stage 2512, and the game ball enters from the second stage 2512. Since it is supplied to the fourth stage 2514 and the fifth stage 2515 through the third stage 2513 to be prevented and discharged from the fifth stage 2515 into the game area 1100, the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515. By the stage 2510 having the above, it is possible to make the player enjoy a variety of rolling of the game balls, and to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered. Also, as described above, the stage 2510 is multi-staged, and the rolling time of the game ball that rolls on the stage 2510 becomes longer. Therefore, depending on the player, a time interval for driving the game ball into the game area 1100 may be increased. It is possible to lengthen the game ball to be consumed at an early stage, and to make the player feel like it has been enjoyed for a long time. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the third stage 2513 extending forward from the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 is provided as a part of the stage 2510, the stage 2510 enters the warp inlet 2504 and enters the stage 2510 (first stage 2511) from the warp outlet 2505. The game ball supplied to) rolls in the left-right direction on the third stage 2513, so that the game ball can roll in front of the front of the game panel 1200 (game panel 1210). The game ball can be rolled in the left-right direction on the side closer to the player than the machine. Accordingly, the stage 2510 can have an impression different from that of the conventional pachinko machine for the player, and the pachinko machine 1 can be drawn to attract the player's interest. It is possible to make it easier for the player to see the game ball rolling from the side of the player, and to suppress the interest in the game from deteriorating by making the game ball move.

  In addition, a first chance entrance 2516 and a second chance entrance 2517 into which game balls can enter are formed in the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512 in the stage 2510, and the first start is performed below the fifth stage 2515. A chance exit 2518 is formed immediately above the mouth 2101 to release the game balls that have entered the first chance entrance 2516 and the second chance entrance 2517 into the game area 1100, and roll on the first stage 2511 and the second stage 2512. Whether or not a moving game ball enters the first chance entrance 2516 or the second chance entrance 2517 can excite and thrill the player, increasing the player's expectation for the game and reducing the interest in the game. , And the game ball is the first chance 2516 and the second chance The time from entering the mouth 2517 until the game ball is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2518 until the game ball rolls from the first stage 2511 to the fifth stage 2515 and is released into the game area 1100. Since the game ball can be released from the stage 2510 into the game area 1100 in a shorter time than the time, the multistage stage 2510 increases the time that the game ball stays on the stage 2510, depending on the player. It can be avoided that the tempo of the game slows down and the interest is lowered, and it is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating by entertaining the game.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the back unit 3000 disposed below the front opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 between the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and the liquid crystal display device 1900. A back bottom back middle decoration body 3450 and a pair of back bottom rear side decoration bodies 3420 each having a predetermined decoration are supported on the back bottom unit base 3402 of the back bottom rendering unit 3400 so as to be movable up and down and rotatable. The lower back front middle decorative body 3506 is supported so as to be movable up and down via a lower back front base 3502 attached to the front side of the lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of lower back rear side decorative bodies 3420, and is in a normal state. Then, the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of lower back rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 are the front view opening 12 of the panel plate 1210. Since it is located outside (including the lower side) than 5, the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 are hard to see. It is in a state. When the player hits the game ball into the game area 1100 to change the game state, the back and bottom rear middle decorative body 3450 rises to the inside of the front view opening 1215 according to the changed game state. The pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 rotate inward of the front view opening 1215 and the tips come into contact with each other, the back bottom front decorative body 3506 rises to the inside of the front view opening 1215, Since the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 move to the inside of the front view opening 1215 in an appropriate combination, various movable effects can be achieved. This makes it possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by various effects, and to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game.

  In addition, the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 are raised to the inside of the front view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210 at the substantially center in the left-right direction, and a pair of back bottom rear side decorations Since the body 3420 is rotated to the inside of the opening 1215 in the front view so as to surround the outer periphery of the back and middle back decorative body 3450, for example, the back and back back middle decorative body 3450 is raised into the opening 1215. When the pair of lower back and rear side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated into the opening 1215 afterward, the player can be surprised by first raising the rear lower and rear inner decorative bodies 3450 to appear. At the same time, the player's interest can be attracted to the back-under-back middle decorative body 3450, and the pair of back-under-back side-side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated in a state in which the player pays attention to the back-bottom back-back middle decorative body 3450. Let By enclosing the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 with the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420, the back lower back inner decorative body 3450 can appear to be greatly deformed, which makes the player more surprised and fun. And can make the player think that there may be something good by seeing (appearing) the large back bottom middle decorative body 3450 and the back bottom rear side decorative body 3420. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 are rotated from the outside to the inside of the front-view opening 1215 of the panel plate 1210, and compared with the case where they are slid linearly. Since the direction of the back lower back side decorative body 3420 is changed by moving, the appearance of the back lower back side decorative body 3420 changes during the rotation. Thus, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the movement of the back lower side decorative body 3420 can be enjoyed to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420 are arranged such that the front surface thereof is located behind the front surface of the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, When the side decorative body 3420 is moved to the inside of the front opening 1215 and appears, the front surface of the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 surrounding the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 Since it is located on the rear side of the front surface of the middle decorative body 3450, a depth feeling is given to the decoration formed by the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of lower back rear side decorative bodies 3420, thereby making it more three-dimensional. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that enhances decorativeness (designability) and strongly attracts the player's interest can be obtained. In addition, the front surface of the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 surrounding the outer periphery of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 is positioned behind the front surface of the back lower rear middle decorative body 3450, and When the decorative body 3450 and the pair of rear back side decorative bodies 3420 appear, the outer side of the center is farther from the player side, so that it is possible to provide a spacious decoration with a sense of perspective. Can be surprised, and even if the inside of the front view opening 1215 is blocked by the appearance of the rear back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, the player can be surprised. It is possible to prevent a feeling of pressure from being exerted, and it is possible to entertain the decorations of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back lower back rear side decorative bodies 3420 to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. it can.

  Further, as described above, since the front surface of the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 is positioned rearward of the front surface of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the decoration can be given a stereoscopic effect. Even if the depth (thickness) in the front-rear direction of the lower back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back lower back side decorative bodies 3420 is reduced, the three-dimensional decoration can be sufficiently exhibited. Since the thickness of 3450 and the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 can be reduced, the space in the front-rear direction required for the installation of the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450 and the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420 is possible. It is possible to reduce the size of the decorative body relatively, and it is possible to secure a space for other decorative bodies relatively, and to make the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the back lower rear side decorative body 3420, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506, etc. Or larger It can be, can be a difficult pachinko machine 1 tired Te strongly attracted the attention of more players.

  Further, the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back bottom back side decorative bodies 3420, the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506, etc. Since the front side decorative board 3536 and the back lower front middle decorative board 3546 are provided, the back lower rear side decorative board 3426, the back lower rear middle decorative board 3456, and the back lower front side decorative board 3536 provided respectively. Further, by appropriately decorating the back / rear / rear middle decorative body 3450 and the like by the front / rear front / rear middle decorative board 3546, the appearance of the back / rear / rear middle decorative body 3450 and the like can be changed in various ways. A variety of effects can be presented to the player by combining the light emitting decorations of the decorative body 3450, the pair of back and bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506. Can be interest in the user of the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the panel board 1210 is provided with a hook-shaped pointer member 3458 that rotates on the front surface of the back lower back middle decorative body 3450 (decorative body main body 3454) that moves up and down between the inside and the lower side of the front opening 1215. Therefore, by rotating the pointer member 3458 after being raised to the inside of the opening portion 1215 when viewed from the front, not only the appearance of the decoration body 3454 but also the rotation of the pointer member 3458 can be enjoyed, and a variety of players can be enjoyed. It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by presenting the production, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced, and it is possible to make the hook-shaped pointer member 3458 look like a clock hand, By rotating the pointer member 3458, it is possible to make the player think that time is approaching, and it can be thrilling and exciting, making the player entertained and playing Against interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the pointer member 3458 in the back-under-rear middle decorative body 3450 can be illusioned like a clock hand, the pointer member 3458 has a predetermined rotational position (for example, the position where the pointer member 3458 has started to rotate and the pointer member 3458 is substantially vertical). , The position of the specific decoration provided on the decorative body main body 3454 on the rear side of the pointer member 3458, etc., so that at least the pointer member 3458 is predetermined. Until the rotation position is reached, the player's interest can be attracted to the pointer member 3458 (the back-rear middle decorative body 3450), and the player is less tired and the interest in the game is reduced. Can do.

  Further, the back bottom front unit 3500 has a three-dimensionally shaped front bottom front middle decorative body 3506, and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 extends outward from the left and right sides, respectively, and the base end side is rotatable. And a pair of lower back front side decorative bodies 3530 that rotate between a position where the tip side is lower than the base end side and a raised position as the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 is raised and lowered. When the lower back front middle decorative body 3506 is lifted inward from the lower side of the opening 1215 in the front view, the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 appears and at the same time the left and right sides of the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 are arranged. The pair of back-under-front side decorative bodies 3530 rotate to a position where the distal end side is higher than the base end side, so that a pair of back-bottom front sides extending diagonally upward and leftward from the back-bottom front-inside decorative body 3506 The entire decorative body is large due to the decorative body 3530 The player can be attracted to the player's front unit 3500 strongly, and the player can have an impression of spreading by the movable state of the unit 3500. It is possible to increase a player's feeling of exaltation and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, the back / rear / rear middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back / rear / rear side decorative bodies 3420, the back / rear front / rear middle decorative body 3506, and the like of the back / bottom rendering unit 3400 are arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, respectively. When the back bottom back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back bottom rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back bottom front middle decorative body 3506 are moved from the outside of the front view opening 1215 to the inside, respectively, the liquid crystal display device 1900 Since it is positioned (appears) in the front, the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body that have displayed the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 have appeared. By blocking by 3506, etc., it is possible to change the appearance of the displayed effect image and the appearance of the ornament that has appeared, and to present more various effects to the player. Flavor can be suppressed.

  Further, since the decorative bodies such as the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 move (appear) to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display The effect image displayed on the device 1900 is obstructed by the decorative body that appears, so that the player can easily notice the movement of each decorative body, and the decorative body moves to the inside of the front-view opening 1215. You can enjoy the movement with attention, and you can make the player think that there is something good with the advent of the decorations, which raises the expectation for the game and lowers interest Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since each of the decorative bodies such as the back lower back middle decorative body 3450, the pair of back lower rear side decorative bodies 3420, and the back lower front middle decorative body 3506 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, The effect image displayed on the device 1900 and the movement of each decorative body can be associated with each other, and a collaboration effect that combines the image effect by the effect image and the movable effect by the movement of the decorative body can be performed. It is possible to entertain the player with various effects and to suppress the interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second slide base 3248 of the back effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 moves up and down according to the game state that is changed by driving a game ball into the game area 1100. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) attached to the front surface of the second slide base 3248 also moves and the entire effect image can be moved, so that the effect image is displayed. A strong impact can be given to a player who has a preconception that the display device is fixed and does not move, and the player's interest is expressed in the effect image (second liquid crystal display device 3252). Attract and entertain the effect image and display a variety of effect images according to the movement of the second elevating decorative body 3250 It can be presented an effect on the player, interest in the game of the player to hardly tired effect can be suppressed.

  In addition, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100, and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Since it is blocked by the (second lifting decoration 3250), the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the blocked effect image and the second liquid crystal display device The effect image displayed on 3252 can be used to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from being reduced, and the effect image is displayed on the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252. The movement of the elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) and the effect image are not shifted, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 19 are not shifted. 0 production images can be displayed in a good state, respectively, and the movement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) and each production image can be enjoyed to prevent the interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  Further, in a state where the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 are separated, the second slide base 3248 is fixed so that the fixing piece 3248a is inserted into the fixing groove 3250a of the second elevating decorative body 3250. The slide base 3248 and the second elevating decoration body 3250 are moved relative to one side in the vertical direction to insert the fixing piece 3248a into the fixing groove 3250a, and the second elevating decoration is inserted into the locking hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. By elastically locking the locking claw 3250c of the body 3250, the fixed piece 3248a is prevented from being detached from the fixed groove 3250a, and the second elevating decorative body 3250 ( The second liquid crystal display device 3252) is attached. On the other hand, in a state where the second elevating decorative body 3250 is attached to the second slide base 3248, the engaging claw 3250c of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is elastically deformed to engage with the engaging hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248. After releasing the stop, the second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 are moved relative to each other in the vertical direction to fix the fixing piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 to the fixing groove of the second elevating decorative body 3250. The second elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252) is removed from the second slide base 3248 by removing it from the inside of the 3250a, and the second elevating decorative body 3250 is securely attached to the second slide base 3248. Can be detachably attached to. Further, the locking claw 3250c of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is elastically engaged with the engaging hole 3248c of the second slide base 3248, so that the fixed piece 3248a of the second slide base 3248 becomes the second elevating decorative body. The second slide base 3248 and the second elevating decorative body 3250 can be easily detached by the elastic deformation of the locking claw 3250c. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252 of the second elevating decorative body 3250, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed, so that maintenance such as replacement of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be performed. It can be easily performed, and the time that the game is interrupted by maintenance can be shortened as much as possible, and the game is resumed before the player feels irritated by the interruption, and the player's interest in the game It is possible to suppress the decrease, and various effects using the effect image by the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be performed without problems, and the movement of the second elevating decorative body 3250 (second liquid crystal display device 3252). It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which can suppress that a player's interest falls by delighting a player with an effect image.

  Further, since the second elevating decorative body 3250 is detachably attached to the second slide base 3248, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, and the cost for manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 increases. Since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be easily removed when the pachinko machine 1 is discarded, the waste separation work can be easily performed, and the environment-friendly pachinko machine 1 It can be.

  In addition, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and, from the second slide base 3248 located on the outside of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in front view, the second liquid crystal display device. 3252 is attached so as to extend to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, when the second slide base 3248 is moved, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is likely to vibrate. Although there is a possibility that a problem is likely to occur, as described above, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is detachably attached to the moving base, even if a problem occurs in the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be maintained in a good state. Therefore, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900 without any problem, and it is possible to prevent the player from having fun and reducing the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is a display device separate from the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect image can be displayed even if the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved outside the liquid crystal display device 1900. The production patterns of the moving second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made more diverse, and the pachinko machine 1 that is hard to get tired of can be obtained, and there is no need to provide a large liquid crystal display device 1900. An increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, a separate second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved to the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 are different in the front-rear direction. As a result, it is possible to perform a deep effect with two effect images, to suppress a player from being surprised and to reduce interest, and to attract each player's interest. And the movement of the image display means can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) that partitions the rear end of the game area 1100, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is disposed. Can prevent the flow of the game balls flowing in the game area 1100 from being obstructed, so that the pachinko machine 1 can enjoy the movement of the game balls, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be used as the game panel 1200 ( Since the second liquid crystal display device 3252 has a problem, it can be removed from the second slide base 3248 through the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200. The same effect as described above can be achieved by facilitating the maintenance of the two liquid crystal display device 3252. Rukoto can.

  Further, since the first elevating decorative body 3218 that can cover a part of the front surface of the second elevating decorative body 3250 and is movable independently of the second elevating decorative body 3250 is provided, the first elevating decorative body 3218 is provided. By appropriately moving the decorative body 3218, it is possible to change the range in which the effect image of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 can be seen from the player side, and the player can be entertained with more various effects. It is possible to prevent the interest in games from being reduced by making it difficult to get bored.

  In addition, since the first elevating decorative body 3218 that moves on the front side of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 has a predetermined decoration, the first elevating decorative body 3218 decorates the player with the first elevating decorative body 3218. The second liquid crystal display device 3252 (second elevating decorative body 3250) also enters the field of view and is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252 when the player pays attention to the first elevating decorative body 3218. The produced effect image can be shown reliably, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b and the side notch portion 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 in the lower right unit base 3602 are not aligned. Above, a gaming state that is changed by a game ball being driven into the game area 1100 (here, a special lottery result that is drawn by receiving a game ball at the first start port 2101 or the second start port 2102). Accordingly, in the state where the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is rotated, the housing recess 3608a in which the effect ball 3610 of a specific mode that is released by rotating the rotating cylinder 3608 is housed is formed in the cylindrical portion of the back lower right unit base 3602. The rotation is stopped at a position substantially coincident with the discharge portion 3602c of 3602b. In this state, the production ball 3610 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3608a of the rotary cylinder 3608 is blocked by the peripheral wall portion 3612b of the discharge flap 3612 and cannot move to the cylindrical portion 3602b side. In this state, the rotation of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is stopped so that the discharge port 3630b of the lower right lower rotating decorative body 3630 substantially coincides with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right lower unit base 3602. Subsequently, the discharge flap 3612 is rotated and stopped so that the side cutout portion 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 substantially coincides with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b. As a result, the receiving recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608, the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612, the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right unit base 3602, and the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 are provided. The effect ball 3610 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3608a is released to the outside from the discharge port 3630b of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and the effect ball 3610 having a specific aspect corresponding to the gaming state is obtained. It can be discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. The effect ball 3610 released from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is received by the ball receiving portion 3654b of the ball receiving member 3654, so that the released effect ball 3610 can be easily seen. The aspect (color or pattern) of the produced effect sphere 3610 can be reliably recognized. Then, when the ball receiving member 3654 is tilted by the back lower right collection solenoid 3660 while the effect ball 3610 is received by the ball receiving member 3654, the effect ball 3610 is moved from the ball receiving member 3654 to the collection passage 3652b of the collection unit cover 3652. It is discharged upward, rolls on the collection passage 3652b, and is guided to the collection port 3602f below the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. When the recovery port 3602f and the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 are substantially coincident with each other, the effect ball 3610 guided to the recovery port 3602f passes through the recovery port 3602f and the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 When the ball lift member 3670 is raised in this state, the effect ball 3610 housed in the opening 3670a is lifted. Thereafter, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 rises to a position that substantially matches the return port 3602e of the lower right unit base 3602, the movable bottom plate 3672 that forms the bottom of the opening 3670a in the ball lift member 3670 is The lower rotation decoration body 3630 side is inclined so as to be lowered, and the effect ball 3610 rolls from the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 to the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 side and returns through the return port 3602e. Become. In addition, in the rotating cylinder 3608 disposed inside the lower right rotating decorative body 3630, the plurality of receiving recesses 3608a are sized to accommodate only one effect ball 3610, and thus are released and emptied. The production ball 3610 that has returned to the housing recess 3608a enters and is returned to the same housing recess 3608a as before the discharge. Therefore, when the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 starts to rotate, the player can recognize that the production ball 3610 is released, and the lower right lower rotation rotating the player's interest. The player can be strongly attracted to the decorative body 3630, and the player is excited and excited by whether or not the production ball 3610 of a desired mode is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630. It can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, since the effect ball 3610 having a different mode depending on the game state is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630 in the back lower right effect unit 3600, the mode of the effect ball 3610 to be released ( The player may be informed of the possibility (for example, probability, reliability, etc.) of the arrival of an opportunity or an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player due to differences in colors, patterns, etc. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game, and to enjoy the effect using the back lower right rotating decoration 3630 and the effect ball 3610, and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game. Can do.

  Further, the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630 is formed in a polygonal cylindrical shape with the front end side closed, and a discharge port 3630b is formed at a predetermined position on the outer periphery, so that the player can On the other hand, a rotary lottery machine (so-called rattle lottery machine) can be recalled from the appearance of the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630, and the player can see the back lower right rotating decoration body 3630 at a glance. The rotation decoration body 3630 can be recognized to rotate, and the stage ball 3610 is released from the discharge port 3630b after the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 rotates in accordance with the gaming state. It can be surprised by the illusion as it is done, and the entertainment by the lower right rotating decoration body 3630 and the production ball 3610 is enjoyed and the interest in the game is low. It can be suppressed to.

  In addition, the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 by the lower right lower collection solenoid 3660 or the like is returned again to the inside of the lower right rotation decoration body 3630, so the effect ball 3610 is supplemented separately. Even without this, it is possible to automatically repeat the effect using the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the effect ball 3610, and to continuously entertain the player and make it difficult to get bored, and the effect ball 3610. Is returned to the inside of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and the effect ball 3610 can be a separate medium from the game ball, so that the effect balls 3610 can have different aspects from each other, It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which shows the effect mentioned above reliably.

  In addition, since the housing recess 3608a of the rotating cylinder 3608 that houses the effect sphere 3610 is sized to accommodate only one effect sphere 3610, the effect sphere 3610 is moved from the discharge port 3630b of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630. When the next stage ball 3610 is released after being collected via the back lower right collection solenoid 3660, the ball lift member 3670, etc., the released stage ball 3610 is released inside the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630. When returning to the rotating cylinder 3608, the production ball 3610 is accommodated only in the empty accommodation recess 3608a, and the effect ball 3610 can be returned into the accommodation recess 3608a originally accommodated. Accordingly, each effect ball 3610 having a different aspect can be automatically returned and accommodated in the predetermined accommodation recess 3608a, so that when the effect ball 3610 of a specific aspect is released according to the gaming state, Rotating cylinder 3608 is rotated so that predetermined receiving recess 3608a coincides with discharge portion 3602c of cylindrical portion 3602b in back lower right unit base 3602 by making production balls 3610 correspond to receiving recesses 3608a. The effect ball 3610 having a desired mode can be released simply by stopping the operation, and the control related to the release of the effect ball 3610 can be simplified.

  Furthermore, unless the side notch 3612c of the discharge flap 3612 provided between the cylindrical portion 3602b and the rotary cylinder 3608 in the lower right unit base 3602 is substantially matched with the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b, The effect ball 3610 accommodated in the accommodation recess 3608a is prevented from passing through the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b, so that the effect ball 3610 cannot pass through without substantially matching the side notch 3612c and the discharge portion 3602c. In the state, it is possible to prevent the production ball 3610 from being released from the discharge port 3630b during the rotation of the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 inserted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3602b, and the production ball unintentionally. With the release of 3610, the production using the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 becomes incomplete, and the player It becomes possible to prevent from being given an uncomfortable feeling against the effect using the back lower right rotary decoration member 3630 amused ensures interest in the game it can be suppressed. Further, as described above, the effect ball 3610 can be prevented from being released from the discharge port 3630b during the rotation of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630, and thus the effect ball 3610 is released in an unintended direction. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a trouble occurs and the game cannot be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming uncomfortable and detracting from interest due to the interruption of the game. it can.

  Further, if the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b in the lower right unit base 3602 and the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 do not substantially coincide with each other, the effect ball 3610 is not discharged to the outside through the discharge port 3630b. Therefore, the rotation position of the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 from which the effect ball 3610 is discharged from the discharge port 3630b of the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is likely to correspond to the discharge portion 3602c of the cylindrical portion 3602b. The fixed direction of the effect ball 3610 emitted from the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 can be made constant, and the effect ball 3610 emitted from the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 can be reliably received by the ball receiving member. 3654 can be received.

  Further, when collecting the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right rotating decoration body 3630, the player receives the tilt of the ball receiving member 3654 and the effect ball 3610 rolling on the recovery path 3652b of the recovery unit cover 3652. This makes it possible to show not only the release of the production sphere 3610 but also the movement of the ball receiving member 3654 and the production sphere 3610, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. .

  Further, between the main body 3602a and the lower right lower unit case 3604 in the lower right lower unit base 3602, the ball lift member 3670 is raised to the rear side of the lower right lower rotating decorative body 3630, and the front back is returned through the return port 3602e. Since the production ball 3610 is returned to the inside of the lower right rotation decoration body 3630, the player side shows that the production ball 3610 collected by the back lower right unit base 3602 is lifted up to the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630. It can be difficult to see or hide, and the player feels that the stage ball 3610 emitted from the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 is not returned to the lower right rotating decorative body 3630 be able to. Accordingly, when the effect sphere 3610 is released from the lower right rotation decoration body 3630, it can be assumed that the number of the effect balls 3610 in the lower right rotation decoration body 3630 decreases. If the effect sphere 3610 emitted from the body 3630 is not the effect sphere 3610 of the desired aspect, it becomes possible to make an illusion that the probability that the effect sphere 3610 of the desired aspect is released becomes high, and the next right The expectation for the release of the production ball 3610 from the lower rotation decoration body 3630 can be further increased, and the entertainment using the back lower right rotation decoration body 3630 and the production ball 3610 can be enjoyed to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the collection port 3602f in the lower right unit base 3602 is arranged directly below the return port 3602e, a mechanism for lifting the production ball 3610 from the collection port 3602f to the return port 3602e is held straight. For example, the mechanism for lifting the effect ball 3610 can be suppressed and recovered as compared with a case where the mechanism is lifted by rotation. The mechanism (collection mechanism) can be made compact and compact, and the collection mechanism can be miniaturized, so that the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the like can be relatively enlarged, and the back lower right rotating decorative body. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that attracts the player's interest by making 3630 and the like stand out.

  Further, the back lower right unit base 3602 and the back lower right unit case 3604 are formed in a box shape, and the strength and rigidity can be increased, so that the rotating lower right rotating decorative body rotates. 3630, the rotation cylinder 3608, the discharge flap 3612, etc. can be securely held in a rotatable manner, and the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 and the like are prevented from rotating in an unstable manner, and the appearance during rotation is deteriorated. The discharge port 3630b, the side cutout 3612c, the housing recess 3608a and the like can be accurately matched with the discharge portion 3602c of the back lower right unit base 3602, so that the effect ball 3610 can be secured. Can be released.

  Further, when the opening 3670a of the ball lift member 3670 does not coincide with the collection port 3602f of the lower right lower unit base 3602, the effect ball 3610 released from the lower right rotation decorative body 3630 is collected from the ball receiving member 3654. Even if it reaches the recovery port 3602f via 3652b, it is possible to prevent the effect ball 3610 from dropping through the recovery port 3602f by the front surface of the ball lift member 3670, so that the effect ball 3610 can be reliably recovered. Thus, the back lower right rotating decorative body 3630 can be returned to, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball that has been shot into the game area 1100 is received into the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102, after a predetermined lottery result is drawn, According to the lottery result, the winning prize opening 2103 can be received, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by accepting the gaming balls to the winning prize opening 2103. It is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and the game ball payout aiming at the 2101, the second start opening 2103, and the big winning opening 2103. In this pachinko machine 1, when a game ball is driven, the game ball is driven so that it circulates along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, that is, the game ball is hit with a strength higher than a predetermined level. (So-called right-handed), the game balls thrown into the upper part of the game area 1100 from the left side along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 flow to the right side on the opposite side along the inner circumference. Since the player enters the distribution space 2530 via the entry passage 2545, the game ball can be driven (entered) into the distribution space 2530 by a simple driving operation, and has entered the distribution space 2530. Since the game ball is discharged from the distribution space 2530 through the guide passage 2540 to the upper side of the big winning opening 2103, the game ball is discharged from the guide passage 2540 through the distribution space 2530 when the big winning opening 2103 can be received. Played game balls It is possible to make acceptance to the winning opening 2103 with a high probability. As a result, when the special winning opening 2103 can be received, a driving operation aiming at the distribution space 2530 can be performed so that the game ball is released from the guide passage 2540. In this distribution space 2530, a distribution valve 2551 is arranged, and when the game ball is distributed in either the left or right direction by the distribution valve 2551, and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580, A privilege (for example, the number of rounds for a “big hit” game) according to the direction distributed by the distribution valve 2551 is awarded. At this time, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 that are visible on the rear side through the transparent distribution space 2530 are rotated in the same direction as the game ball is distributed by the distribution valve 2551. Since it tilts, it is possible to clearly recognize the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the movement of the distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565. Therefore, it is clear by looking at the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 whether or not the distribution direction of the game balls by the distribution valve 2551 is a direction in which a desired privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to take the timing at which the game balls are distributed in a desired direction, and it is possible to entertain the game ball driving operation and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the distribution detection sensor 2580 for detecting the passage of the game ball is arranged on the front side of the movement of the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567, the distribution for detecting the game ball distributed by the distribution valve 2551. The distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 points to the detection sensor 2580, and the player can be surely recognized the distribution direction by the distribution valve 2551, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, since the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 are arranged on the rear side of the sorting space 2530, the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 are sorted. It is possible to prevent the game area 1100 including the space 2530 from being compressed and to prevent the game area 1100 from becoming narrow, and it is possible to distribute the game balls within the widest possible range. The movement of the original game ball of the machine 1 can be enjoyed, and the size of the movable movable decoration 2567 and the movable movable decoration 2565 can be increased without enlarging the game area 1100 or the moving range can be increased. The distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be made conspicuous and are distributed to the player by the distribution valve 2551. Countercurrent reliably recognize to the operational effects can be achieved in the same manner as described above.

  In addition, the rotation centers of the distribution valve 2551 and the distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 that distribute game balls by rotating are arranged substantially concentrically and rotate in the same direction. The way of movement of the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 is substantially the same, and even if a game ball is shot at a timing in accordance with the movement of the distribution movement lower decoration body 2567, the movement of the distribution valve 2551 is substantially reduced. At the same time, the game ball can be distributed in a desired direction by the distribution valve 2551, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 are rotated in the same direction, the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution movable lower decorative body 2567 can be seen as an integral feeling. It becomes possible, and the player can be given an illusion as if the distributed movable decoration 2567 distributes the game balls, and the movement of the distributed movable decoration 2567 and the distribution valve 2551 can be enjoyed. In addition, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the distribution of game balls by the distribution valve 2551 (distributed movable decorative body 2567) and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the front of the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567, the sorting movable upper decorative body 2565, and the sorting valve 2551 are respectively decorated with the same predetermined character, the sorting movable lower decorative body 2567 is provided. And the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be made more conspicuous, and the player can surely recognize the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551. In addition, since the predetermined character is formed by the decoration of the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565, and the distribution valve 2551, the movement of the predetermined character moves the distribution character. The movement of the movable lower decorative body 2567, the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565, and the distribution valve 2551 (character) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Furthermore, by emitting the LED mounted on the sorting decoration board 2590, the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 can be illuminated and decorated from the rear side. The distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565 arranged on the rear side of the 2530 emit light and become brighter, so that the distributed movable lower decorative body 2567 and the distributed movable upper decorative body 2565 from the player side. Can be easily seen, and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be made more conspicuous, and the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body can be arranged in the direction distributed by the distribution valve 2551. 2565 can be surely recognized. In addition, since the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565 can be illuminated and decorated by the sorting decoration board 2590, for example, the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting moving lower decoration body 2567 and When the distribution movable upper decorative body 2565 is decorated with light emission, it is possible to make it easy for the player to set the timing of the game ball, and to make the player more entertained and to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the slide of the sorting slider 2555 that reciprocally slides by the sorting drive motor 2558 is transmitted to the sorting valve 2551 through the connection spring 2556 and the like, and is movable through the rack gear 2555f and the first transmission gear 2562 and the like. Since the lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are transmitted, the distribution valve 2551, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are operated by one distribution drive motor 2558. Can be driven, the configuration related to each drive can be simplified, and the entire space related to the drive can be reduced. That is, since the space for driving the distribution valve 2551, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567, and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 can be reduced, the distribution movable lower decoration body 2567 and the distribution movable upper decoration body 2565 are relatively used. It is possible to widen the space such as the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting movable upper decoration body 2565, and the sorting movable lower decoration body 2567 and the sorting can be moved. The movable upper decorative body 2565 is made conspicuous so that the player can surely recognize the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551, and it is easy to take the timing of the game ball and suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. can do.

  Further, when the game ball is hit with a strength of a predetermined level or more, the game ball hit from the left side along the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to the upper part of the game area 1100 is directly changed to the right side on the opposite side along the inner circumference. , And will enter the distribution space 2530 via the distribution entry passage 2545, so that a game ball can be driven (entered) into the distribution space 2530 by a simple driving operation. In the game ball driving operation by the player, it is only necessary to place importance on the driving timing at which the game ball is distributed in a desired direction with respect to the distribution direction of the distribution valve 2530, and it is easy to distribute the game ball in the desired direction. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player first hits a game ball aiming at the first start port 2101 (second start port 2102), and the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is the first. When a special lottery result (bonus) that can be received by the winning opening 2103 that is received at the start opening 2101 and accepts a predetermined number of game balls by receiving a game ball is drawn, the jackpot flag is turned ON and the big prize is won. A “hit” game that allows the mouth 2103 to be accepted is started. However, even if the jackpot is lottery, it is not possible to immediately accept the game ball to the big winning opening 2103. First, the explanation interval effect is performed, and when the explanation interval effect ends, the condition device operates. In this state, when a game ball is hit with a strength of a predetermined level or more, the game ball hit on the upper part of the game area 1100 along the inner periphery of the game area 1100 from one side in the left-right direction remains as it is in the game area. It flows along the inner periphery of 1100 to the opposite side and enters the distribution space 2530. In this distribution space 2530, the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game balls in the left and right directions at a constant cycle irrespective of the game state that changes by driving the game balls into the game area 1100. A game ball that has entered 2530 is distributed to either the left or right direction by the distribution valve 2551, and the distribution detection sensor 2580 provided in the distributed direction is in a state where the condition device is operating. When a game ball is detected, the number of rounds of “big hit” game is determined as a predetermined privilege. Then, the game balls distributed in the distribution space 2530 are released to the upstream side of the big prize opening 2103 and are received with high probability into the big prize opening 2103 that can be received. Therefore, when it becomes possible to accept the game ball to the big prize opening 2103 according to the special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2103 or the like, If the game area 1100 is driven into the game area 1100, it can be received through the distribution space 2530 with a high probability to the prize winning opening 2103, so that the game ball can be easily accepted into the prize winning opening 2103, which is sufficient even for beginners. The number of rounds is given according to the direction of distribution by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530, and the movement and state of the distribution valve 2551 so that it can be distributed in a desired direction. The game ball can be driven in while watching the game, etc., so that the operation of driving the game ball can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game is reduced. Door can be.

  In addition, game balls distributed in a predetermined direction by the distribution valve 2551 in the distribution space 2530 are all released into the game area 1100 upstream of the big prize opening 2103, and the distribution valve According to the direction to which the game ball is distributed, it is possible to vary the distance that the game ball circulates until it is released from the distribution valve 2551 into the game area 1100. By changing the distribution distance of the balls, it is possible to catch up with the game balls that have been hit later on the game balls that have been hit first, and to connect a plurality of game balls upstream of the big prize opening 2103 to the normal game balls. The game area 1100 can be continuously released at intervals shorter than the distribution interval. Therefore, it is possible to release and accept more game balls than usual from the upstream side for the time during which the grand prize winning opening 2103 can be received, which makes the player more entertaining and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the game balls are distributed by the distribution valve 2551 at a constant interval regardless of the game state, when the game balls are distributed in a desired direction, the distribution of the game balls is adjusted according to the movement of the distribution valve 2551. This makes it easy to measure the timing of the game ball, so that the game ball can be timed so that the game ball can be distributed in a desired direction, and the game ball can be operated to entertain the game. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the game balls are distributed at a constant cycle regardless of the game state, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being felt to be intentionally distributed by the distribution valve 2551. It is possible to entertain the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means without causing distrust to the player, and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, the game ball cannot enter the distribution space 2530 while the distribution direction is changed, and the game ball that has attempted to enter the distribution space 2530 during the change of the distribution direction can be moved. Since it can be stopped at the entrance of the distribution space 2530 (the upper side of the distribution valve 2551), as a game ball driving operation, the game ball is driven so as to reach the distribution valve 2551 during the change of the distribution direction. Thus, a plurality of game balls can be stopped before the distribution valve 2551. Therefore, when changing the distribution direction so that the distribution valve 2551 distributes the game balls in a desired direction, by driving a plurality of game balls and stopping the game balls in front of the distribution valve 2551, When the change of the distribution direction is completed, the stopped game balls can be reliably distributed in a desired direction, and more privileges can be obtained by distributing a plurality of game balls in the desired direction almost simultaneously. It is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating by simultaneously giving the privilege and the game ball driving operation.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball can be stopped on the front side of the distribution valve 2551 while the distribution direction is being changed, so that by inserting more game balls while the game ball is stopped, The interval (time interval, distance interval) through which the game ball that is stopped and the game ball that has been subsequently circulated can be made as small as possible. In other words, the distribution intervals of the plurality of game balls can be shortened by the time stopped by the distribution valve 2551 so as to be close to each other, so that the change of the distribution direction is completed and the distribution space 2530 is entered. When the game ball can enter, at least two game balls can be continuously released to the side of the big prize opening 2103 at an interval shorter than usual, and at the time when the big prize opening 2103 can be received. On the other hand, a larger number of game balls than usual can be accepted, and it is possible to make the player more entertaining and to prevent the interest from deteriorating. In addition, as described above, in order to accept more game balls to the big prize opening 2103, the timing at which the game balls are stopped by the distribution valve 2551 and the distribution space 2530 to the big prize opening 2103. Since it is necessary to hit the game ball at a timing that takes into account the timing at which the game ball is received, it is likely that the difficulty of the drive operation will increase, and it will be hard to get tired of players who are accustomed to the drive operation. It is possible to improve the motivation for the driving operation and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by making the game enjoyable.

  Further, since the game balls distributed by the distribution valve 2551 are detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580 and the corresponding round number is given, the game balls distributed in the direction in which the corresponding round number is given. Can be reliably detected, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably realized. In addition, a distribution detection sensor 2580 for detecting the game balls distributed in the distribution space 2530 is provided, and the player can be made aware of the presence of the distribution detection sensor 2580. Since it is possible to see where the distributed game balls are detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580, it is possible to prevent mistrust from being given to the privilege (number of rounds) to be given. While the game can be continued, the expectation with respect to the number of rounds to be given can be increased, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, since the predetermined privilege granted by the privilege granting means is the number of rounds of “big hit” game, when a larger number of rounds is awarded, more game balls can be accepted into the big prize opening 2103. It becomes possible gaming state, the player can be thrilled by whether or not the game ball is distributed in the direction in which the desired number of rounds is given in the distribution valve 2551, and the player can be expected to increase the player's expectations. It is possible to prevent the interest of the music from deteriorating. In addition, the game ball can be placed in the game ball so that the game ball is distributed in the direction in which the desired number of rounds is given by the distribution valve 2551. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating by delighting the game.

[Recovery measures in the event of a power outage or instantaneous power failure]
By the way, when the pachinko gaming machine is configured as described above, before the player starts the jackpot game, after viewing the game description, the game medium is placed in the game area for the selection of the rush type or the single notification type. Before the game medium is entered into the distribution unit 2550, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, and then supplied to the power supply board. Instruction to cause the game medium to enter the distribution unit 2550 on the display screen of the effect display means (liquid crystal display device 1900) when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery) The instruction screen was not displayed before the screen ("Aim for the one you like ♪" in Fig. 213) is displayed, or the instruction screen has already been displayed. , Gaming state can not be grasped at the time of recovery by the player.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes a process for returning to the power outage state (recovery process) according to the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e, and returns to the jackpot game preparation process (FIG. 206). However, unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L (first distribution detection sensor) or the distribution detection sensor 2580R (second distribution detection sensor), the game does not proceed to the big hit game (the execution mode of the big hit game is not yet determined). Therefore, in the jackpot game mode determination process, the process does not proceed to the next process while the progress of the jackpot game is stopped. For this reason, no command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. For this reason, the player cannot grasp the game state at the time of restoration and cannot start the jackpot game.

  FIG. 221 is a time chart showing a process from the occurrence of a jackpot with a special symbol to the start of a jackpot game. In FIG. 221, when a predetermined stop symbol display time (in the embodiment, for example, 1.008 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and the jackpot is generated, the procedure proceeds to jackpot game preparation processing. The interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S622 in FIG. 206 and step S18 in FIG. 200). In FIG. 221, a period A indicates an explanatory interval effect period from the time when an explanatory interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Note that in the period A, even if the player fires a game ball to pass either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R by his / her own intention, the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection are detected. The detection of the game ball by the sensor 2580R is invalidated, and the progress to the big hit game remains stopped.

  When the explanation interval effect period elapses, the condition device starts operating (step S627 in FIG. 206), and the gate 2575 of the distribution unit 2550 is activated. That is, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is effective. In FIG. 221, a period B indicates an effective period of the distribution detection sensor 2580.

  The effective period of the distribution detection sensor 2580 continues until a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. In the period B, even if the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled, the big hit game proceeds unless the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R. do not do. In other words, the jackpot game can be started by the player's intention.

  When a game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is invalidated. In addition, when the number of rounds (the jackpot game mode) is determined, the accessory continuous operation device starts operating (step S6080 in FIG. 207). Further, the jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 (step S6085 in FIG. 207 and step S18 in FIG. 200). In FIG. 221, a period C indicates a jackpot start interval effect period from the time when the jackpot start interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. Then, when the jackpot start interval effect period elapses, the jackpot 2103 is opened and the jackpot game is started (FIG. 209).

  By the way, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during the game, a power failure warning signal is transmitted from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 as described above. 199), the RAM checksum is calculated and stored, and the backup flag is set. The game data stored in the RAM when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs is held by a backup power source (backup data).

  Then, in the event of a power failure, the main control MPU executes the power-on process in step S1 of FIG. 198 by power-on again in the event of a power failure, or in the event of a momentary power loss by resetting the watchdog timer reset signal input. Execute power recovery processing to return to the current state.

  In FIG. 221, when a power failure or instantaneous interruption occurs in period A, that is, the explanation interval effect period (indicated by x in the figure), the game state at that time is set to “3” by the jackpot game preparation process of FIG. In addition, it is defined by the identification flag having a value of 1. In addition, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during period B, that is, the distribution detection sensor effective period (indicated by x in the figure), the processing state is that the processing flag is “3” and the identification flag is “2”. It is stipulated in. However, since the interval effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in both the period A and the period B, the command is not transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 at the time of recovery.

  The embodiment described below has been made in view of such circumstances, and in the above power recovery process, when it is determined that a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred in the period A or the period B, the peripheral control is performed. The present invention relates to an invention in which a driving instruction effect command for displaying a driving instruction screen (FIG. 213) indicating that a game ball is driven into a sorting unit 2550 is transmitted to the unit 4140.

  FIG. 222 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process executed according to the backup data as one process in the power recovery process (power-on process) by the main control MPU. When starting the gaming state determination process, the main control MPU first determines whether or not the processing flag is “3” (step S30). If the process flag is not “3”, it is determined as NO in step S30, the game state determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the power recovery process routine (not shown).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is “3”, it is determined as YES in step S30, and then it is determined whether or not the identification flag is 2 (step S31). That is, it is determined whether or not a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred during the effective period of the distribution detection sensor. When the identification flag is 2, step S31 is determined to be YES, the process proceeds to step S37, the driving instruction effect command is set (step S37), the game state determination process is exited, and the process returns to the power recovery process routine. To do.

  On the other hand, if the identification flag is not 2, step S31 is determined to be NO, the process proceeds to step S32, and it is determined whether or not the identification flag is 1 (step S32). That is, it is determined whether or not a power failure or a momentary power failure has occurred during the explanation interval effect period. If the identification flag is not 1 in step S32, it is determined NO in step S32, the game state determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the power recovery process routine.

  On the other hand, if the identification flag is 1 in step S32, step S32 is determined as YES, and the process proceeds to step S33. If it is determined that a power outage or a momentary power failure has occurred during the explanation interval production period, the operation of the condition device will be started as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, assuming that the explanation interval production has ended when power is restored (Step S33).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is activated (step S34). When the time reduction function is activated, step S34 is determined to be YES and the operation of the condition device is started. The operation is stopped (step S35), and the process proceeds to step S36. On the other hand, when the time reduction function is not activated, step S34 is determined as NO, and step S35 is skipped and the process proceeds directly to step S36. When the process proceeds to step S36, the identification flag is updated to 2 (step S36), the process proceeds to step S37, the driving instruction effect command is set (step S37), the game state determination process is exited, and the power recovery process routine Return to

  As described above, when it is determined that a power failure or instantaneous power failure has occurred during the distribution detection sensor effective period, and when it is determined that a power failure or instantaneous power failure has occurred during the explanation interval effect period, Is set.

  The driving instruction effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S18) illustrated in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side, an effect display showing a driving instruction screen indicating that the game ball is driven into the sorting unit 2550 is displayed.

  The display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” and audio output. At this time, in order to have an impact, characters such as “Aim at the one you like ♪” are displayed so as to cover almost the entire area of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the normal voice output mode ( For example, voice output is performed in a mode different from a mode in which voice is output by a single character (for example, a mode in which voice is output simultaneously by a plurality of characters).

  In this way, when the power is restored, the game instruction ball is shot on the sorting unit 2550 on the effect display means, so that the player can hit the game ball on the sorting unit 2550. It can be clearly recognized. The player who sees the driving instruction screen may hit the game ball to the right while aiming at the sorting unit 2550 arranged on the right side of the game area. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area enters the distribution unit and is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R, the execution mode in the jackpot game is determined. Will start, so you can enjoy the jackpot game with peace of mind after the restoration.

  The main control MPU returns to the effective period of the sorting detection sensor by executing the special control process in step S14 of FIG. 200 based on the value “3” of the process flag and the value 2 of the identification flag (FIG. 206). Step S632).

  When the jackpot game can be started, a jackpot related command (S6084, S6085) is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140. Thereby, a lamp | ramp, a sound, a drive motor, etc. return to a normal state.

[Modification]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control MPU 4100a transmits the explanation interval effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 and the peripheral control unit 4140 receives the description interval effect command, the jackpot game of FIG. Notice display to explain the game until the start of the game, guidance display for guiding the player's gaze in the game until the big hit game of FIG. 210 (B) is started, the rush type jackpot game of FIG. 211 An explanation display on the selection method, an explanation display on the method of selecting the single-announcement type jackpot game in FIG. 212, and a display prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game in FIG. 214), display showing that the current time in FIG. 214 is a rush type timing, and the current time in FIG. Display indicating that the timing of the one-shot announcement type, but has a configuration that will switch the effect screen and so on, may be configured as follows.

  For example, at the end of the explanation interval effect (when step S626 in FIG. 206 is determined to be YES), main control MPU 4100a transmits a drive instruction effect command to peripheral control unit 4140, and peripheral control unit 4140 has a drive instruction effect command. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, an effect display showing a placement instruction screen (FIG. 213) indicating that a game ball is to be placed into the sorting unit 2550 may be displayed through control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  Further, when the main control MPU 4100a is configured to transmit a driving instruction effect command at the end of the explanation interval effect, the main control MPU 4100a transmits to the peripheral control unit 4140 at the time of power recovery after the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off. The driving instruction effect command to be performed (step S37 in FIG. 222) may be the same command, or a separate command (referred to as a driving instruction effect 2 command) may be provided.

  FIG. 223 is an image diagram that is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device in the case of providing a separate command instruction effect 2 command, and shows an example of a specific operation instruction screen for performing a specific operation by a player However, when the driving instruction effect 2 command is separately provided, the peripheral control unit 4140 receives the driving instruction effect 2 command, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 distributes the game balls through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. It is a figure which shows the driving instruction | indication screen to the effect of driving into the unit 2550. FIG. As shown in FIG. 223, the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the characters “Power has been restored” and “Please turn right” and an image of an arrow indicating the right direction. Thereby, the player can understand that the electric power has been restored and can easily grasp at a glance that the player should make a right turn by operating the steering wheel.

[External output of jackpot signal]
A hall computer for managing the gaming machine is installed in the game hall facility where the gaming machine is installed, and the gaming machine has an external terminal board 784 for outputting a gaming state signal indicating the gaming state to the outside of the gaming machine (FIG. 5, see FIG. 194). The external terminal board is electrically connected to the hall computer, and the hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the gaming machine, gaming information of the gaming machine, and the like. .

  FIG. 226 is a time chart showing the process from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the jackpot game according to the present invention, and the on / off state of the time-short signal and jackpot signal output from the external terminal board.

  In FIG. 226, when a predetermined stop symbol display time (in the embodiment, for example, 1.008 seconds) elapses after the special symbol is stopped and the jackpot is generated, the condition device starts operating, In synchronization with the start of operation of the condition device, the time reduction function is stopped when the time reduction function is in operation, and the output of the time reduction signal output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer in response to this. And turn on the output of the jackpot signal. After this, when the player hits the game medium and enters the sorting unit to determine the execution mode (number of rounds) of the big hit game, the accessory continuous operation device starts operating. Then, at the end of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, the output of the jackpot signal is turned off.

  On the other hand, the hall computer periodically acquires the game information signal output from the gaming machine, and if it is determined that the jackpot signal acquired at the current read timing is ON, the previous read timing It is determined whether or not the jackpot midway signal acquired in step 1 is off, and if the jackpot midway signal acquired at the previous reading timing is confirmed to be off, it is determined that the rise of the jackpot midway signal is detected. To do. That is, it is determined that the jackpot game has started. If it is determined that the jackpot game has started, it is determined whether the time signal acquired at the previous read timing is on (solid line in the figure) or off (dashed line in the figure). It is determined that a big hit has occurred in the short-time gaming state. That is, it is determined as a continuous channel. On the other hand, if it is off, it is determined that a big hit has occurred in the normal gaming state. That is, it is determined that it is a single shot.

  As is apparent from FIG. 226, when a big hit occurs in the normal gaming state, the output of the time signal to the hall computer is turned off, and from the external terminal board in synchronization with the start of operation of the condition device. By turning on the output of the jackpot signal for the hall computer, it is determined that the hall computer hits one shot.

  On the other hand, if a big hit occurs in the short-time gaming state, the output of the short-time signal to the hall computer is turned off in synchronization with the start of operation of the condition device from the state where the output of the short-time signal to the hall computer is on. In addition, by turning on the output of the jackpot signal in the hall computer, it is determined that the hall computer is a jackpot in the short-time gaming state, so-called chain-changing. it can.

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a jackpot game preparation process for outputting a jackpot medium signal. In FIG. 227, the processing when step S621 is determined to be YES and the processing when step S625 is determined to be NO are the same as the processing in steps S622 to S624 and the processing in steps S631 to S635 in FIG. So it is omitted.

  In the following description, processing related to the output of the jackpot signal will be described. As a result of the process flag being “3” and the identification flag being set to 1, in the jackpot game preparation process, step S621 is determined to be NO, and the process proceeds to step S625. In step S625, it is determined whether or not the value of the identification flag is 1 (step S625). In this case, since 1 is set in the identification flag, step S625 is determined to be YES, and the process proceeds to step S626 to determine whether or not the explanation interval effect has timed up (step S626). If the explanation interval effect is not up, step S626 is determined as NO, the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interruption process routine.

  Hereinafter, based on the value “3” of the process flag and the value 1 of the identification flag until the explanation interval effect times out, step S621 is determined to be NO, step S625 is determined to be YES, and step S626 is determined to be NO. Is repeated.

  Then, when the explanation interval effect is timed up, step S626 is determined to be YES, and as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game as the explanation interval effect has ended (first condition), The operation is started (step S627). Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is activated (step S628). When the time reduction function is activated, step S628 is determined as YES, and the operation of the time reduction function is started based on the start of the operation of the condition device. Is stopped (step S629), the time signal is turned off (step S640), and the process proceeds to step S642.

  On the other hand, when the time reduction function is not operating, step S628 is determined to be NO, and step S629 and step S640 are skipped and the process proceeds directly to step S642. When the process proceeds to step S642, the jackpot signal is turned on (step S642), the identification flag is set to 2 (step S630), the jackpot game preparation process is exited, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process routine.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the short-time gaming state, the output of the short-time signal to the hall computer is synchronized with the start of operation of the condition device from the state in which the output of the short-time signal to the hall computer is on. Turns off and turns on the output of the jackpot signal. The time-short signal set to OFF and the jackpot signal set to ON are output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer in the output data setting process in step S17 of the timer interrupt process in FIG. Is off, the jackpot signal is on). Thereafter, the jackpot signal is turned off at the end of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device. In step S807 of the jackpot game processing in FIG. 209, the jackpot flag and the jackpot game-in-progress flag are turned OFF (corresponding to the stop of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device), and the jackpot / medium signal is set to OFF. In the embodiment, starting the operation of the condition device corresponds to the specific operation valid means for validating the specific operation by the predetermined player according to claim 1. Further, starting the operation of the accessory continuous operation device corresponds to jackpot game execution means for starting the jackpot game in the determined execution mode according to claim 1. Further, the distribution detection sensor 2580 corresponds to the detection means described in claim 1.

  By the way, a notification lamp disposed on the top board adjacent to the upper side of the gaming machine may be lit using a jackpot signal output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. According to the ON timing of the jackpot signal shown in FIG. 226, the notification lamp is lit when the explanation interval effect is finished and the selection explanation screens of FIGS. 214 to 215 are displayed. In this case, since the timing when the notification lamp shines is delayed with respect to the time when the special symbol is stopped and the jackpot is generated, the timing is not perfect.

  Therefore, instead of the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 228, when the ON timing of the jackpot signal is adjusted when the special symbol stops and the jackpot occurs, the special symbol stops and the jackpot occurs Since the notification lamp shines, it is suitable as a timing for notification of a big hit. Further, in the process of the main control MPU, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag of the changing process shown in FIG. 205 is ON (step S504), and if it is determined that the big hit flag is ON, On is set, and the processing flag is updated to [3] (step S505).

  As is clear from FIG. 228, in this embodiment, the timing for turning on the output of the jackpot signal is before the conditional device starts to operate, so that the output of the short time signal is turned off in the normal gaming state. Yes, the output of the time-short signal is on in the time-short game state. The time signal does not change in both the previous reading timing and the current reading timing of the hall computer. Since the hall computer determines whether it is a single shot or a continuous change based on a short time signal at the previous reading timing, it does not affect the hall computer judgment routine, so there is no need to change the hall computer judgment routine. It is possible to correctly communicate whether it is a hit or a chain.

[Example of production based on passing through the gate]
In this embodiment, the time from the start of the gate effective effect until the start of the jackpot game, that is, after the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are enabled, the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. The time until the game ball passes through any of the above is measured, and an effect of sending a comment based on the measurement result to the player is executed. Examples of such effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 234. FIG. 232 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a game comment display process as a control process executed by the peripheral control board 4140 (particularly the peripheral control MPU 4140a). FIG. 233 is an effect example in which a comment is transmitted based on the time until the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. FIG. 234 is an effect example in which a comment is transmitted based on an average time until a game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R in the ream when the ream ends.

  As shown in FIG. 232, when starting the game comment display process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether or not the gate effective effect is being executed (step S901). In addition, the gate effective effect is when the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are enabled (when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled). A gate effective effect is started based on a gate effective effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100 side, and when a game ball passes through the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R (distribution detection) Effect of jackpot game based on the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100 side (when a game ball is detected by the sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R) (for example, “one notification type” or “rush type”) The production of the effective gate is ended when the production is started.

  When it is determined that the gate effective effect is being executed (YES in step S901), it is determined whether or not the gate effective effect is a gate effective effect triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot ( Step S902). If it is determined in step S902 that the gate is a gate effective performance triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot (YES in step S902), either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 is valid. The liquid crystal display device 1900 provides an effect display for informing the player whether the game ball detection by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled. The elapsed time of the validated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R is measured cumulatively (step S903). That is, the left gate 2575L of the distribution unit 2550 is valid based on the left gate valid command transmitted from the main control board 4100 side in the execution time of the gate valid effect triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot. (Specifically, a display indicating that the current timing of FIG. 214 is the “rush type” timing) is performed (that is, the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L is enabled). When it is off, the elapsed time of the activated left gate 2575L is cumulatively measured. Also, the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 is valid based on the right gate valid command transmitted from the main control board 4100 side in the execution period of the gate valid effect triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot. (Specifically, a display indicating that the current timing in FIG. 215 is the timing of “one notification type”) Is performed, the elapsed time of the activated right gate 2575R is cumulatively measured.

  In this embodiment, the position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 is switched every 5000 msec. Even if the position of the valve portion 2551b is switched, the left gate 2575L or the right gate Until the game ball passes through 2575R, the elapsed time of the left gate 2575L and the elapsed time of the right gate 2575R are kept, and when the left gate 2575L becomes valid, the left gate held Measurement is performed by adding time to the elapsed time of 2575L, and when the right gate 2575R becomes valid, the time is added to the elapsed time of the held right gate 2575R and measured. Like that.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S902 that the gate is an effective production based on a jackpot other than the variable R probability variable jackpot (NO in step S902), the left gate 2575L or It is not necessary for the player to select one of the right gates 2575R, and no matter which one of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected by the player, the subsequent game content will not be affected. It is only displayed to urge you. In this case, all of the execution times of the gate effective effects triggered by the jackpot other than the variable R probability variable jackpot, that is, the elapsed times of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R that have been validated are collectively measured (steps). S904).

  If it is determined in step S901 that the gate effective effect is not being executed (NO in step S901), the process proceeds to step S905 without executing steps S902 to S904.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the game ball launched by making a right strike has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (step S905). Note that the fact that the game ball has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R indicates that the game ball has passed through the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R (the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor). This can be determined by transmitting a jackpot start command or a jackpot start interval effect command from the main control board 4100 side (when a game ball is detected by 2580R).

  If it is determined that the game ball has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (YES in step S905), the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are activated. Time (when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is validated) and the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. Then, it is stored as a history in the peripheral control RAM 4140e (step S906). Specifically, when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L in the execution time of the gate effective effect triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot, the left gate 2575L is actually effective in the execution time of the gate effective effect. The elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time of the left gate 2575L measured in step S903 is stored as a history, and the time during which the right gate 2575R is actually effective in the execution time of the gate effective effect, that is, the right gate 2575R. When the game ball passes, the elapsed time of the right gate 2575R measured in step S903 is stored as a history. In addition, in the execution time of the gate effective effect triggered by a jackpot other than the variable R probability variable jackpot, if the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, all of the execution time of the gate effective effect, The total elapsed time of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R measured in step S904 is stored as a history.

  If it is determined that the game ball has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (YES in step S905), the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R is moved after the step S906. When the game ball passes (when the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R), the start display of the big hit game is based on the big hit start interval effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100 side. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R stored as the history in step S906 is displayed, and the game is displayed. This is based on the elapsed time required for the ball to pass. Adding cement to be displayed (step S907).

  In this embodiment, the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the distribution unit 2550 are activated (when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is activated) The comment based on the elapsed time is set to change depending on the length of the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. For example, the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is 2.5 seconds, and it is relatively short after the detection of the game ball is enabled. When it is determined that the game ball is passed in step 233, as shown in FIG. 233 (A), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that the elapsed time until passing through the gate is 2.5 seconds. As a comment based on the fact that the elapsed time is short, for example, a comment “early!” Is displayed so as to praise that the player acted without hesitation in gate selection. In addition, the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is 18 seconds, and it takes a relatively long time after the detection of the game ball is enabled. When it is determined that the game ball has passed, as shown in FIG. 233 (B), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that the elapsed time until the gate passes is 18 seconds. As a comment based on the fact that the elapsed time is long, for example, a comment “careful?” Is displayed so as to ask whether the player has acted while wondering about the gate selection. Further, when the elapsed time until the gate passes is a long time of 1800 seconds, a comment “Return home. Was it delicious?” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the effect is produced by voice. May be raised.

  If it is determined in step S905 that the game ball has not passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (NO in step S905), the process proceeds to step S908 without executing steps S906 to S907. move on.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a finishes the jackpot gaming state based on the 4R normal jackpot at the end of the continuous operation in which the probability fluctuation function continuously operates for each jackpot, that is, the 4R normal jackpot without operating the probability fluctuation function. It is determined whether or not it is time to do so (step S908). In this example, among the jackpots related to the first special symbol, the re-chan starts with the jackpot that activates the probability variation function, and when the jackpot that activates the probability variation function again, If you continue to play and become a jackpot that does not activate the probability variation function, you will end the run. In addition, if the jackpot that activates the probability variation function is a jackpot that also activates the short-time function, it is possible to make a right-hand hit, and if the jackpot related to the second special symbol is a jackpot that activates the probability variation function When the re-chan is continued and the 4R normal big hit that does not operate the probability variation function among the big wins related to the second special symbol is reached, the re-chan is terminated.

  Then, it is judged that the time when the re-chan who has continuously operated the probability variation function for each jackpot is ended, that is, when the 4R normal jackpot without the probability variation function is activated and the jackpot gaming state based on the 4R normal jackpot is terminated. If it is determined (YES in step S908), either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R in the ream is selected based on the respective history stored in step S906 until the ream ends. An average time is calculated for the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass (step S909). That is, until the end of the rend, the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is stored as a history in step S906 every time it is a big hit. Based on these histories, an average time is calculated for the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R in Ren-chan.

  In addition, it is determined that the time when the chain that the probability variation function continuously operates for each jackpot ends, that is, when the 4R normal jackpot that does not operate the probability variation function is reached and the jackpot gaming state based on the 4R normal jackpot is terminated. If YES (YES in step S908), following step S909, the time required for the game ball to pass through either left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R calculated in step S909 in liquid crystal display device 1900. The average time for the time is displayed, and a comment based on the average time is added and displayed (step S910).

  In this embodiment, depending on the length of the average time for the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R from the start to the end of the ream, The comment based on the average time is set to change. Also, between the start and end of Ren-chan, the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, the shortest time or the longest time The comment is set so as to change depending on which jackpot timing is in the time (the number of jackpots in the time).

  For example, the average time length of the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R in the five jackpots until the end of the ream is 9.5. When it is calculated as seconds, as shown in FIG. 234, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that the time until passing through the gate is 9.5 seconds. Also, the shortest time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is determined as 2.5 seconds in the second jackpot out of the five jackpots, If it is determined that 18 seconds of the fifth jackpot out of the five jackpots, as shown in FIG. 234, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a gate when the second jackpot of the five jackpots. It is displayed that the shortest time to pass was 2.5 seconds, and that the longest time to pass the gate was 18 seconds when it was the fifth big hit out of 5 big hits. Become so. In addition, with respect to the average time to pass through the gate, the early jackpot of the five jackpots (second jackpot) has a short time to pass through the gate, and the late jackpot of the five jackpots (the fifth jackpot) Based on the situation that it takes a long time to pass through the gate, it is determined that the player is gradually getting bored with the game passing through the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R, and as shown in FIG. The display device 1900 displays a comment “I'm tired? Let's increase concentration!”.

  If it is determined in step S908 that it is not at the end of the continuous operation in which the probability variation function is continuously activated, that is, it is not a 4R normal big hit that does not activate the probability variation function (NO in step S908), step S909 is performed. The process is terminated without executing step S910.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is measured, the selection is completed within, for example, less than 2 seconds depending on the elapsed time. The player is impatient, the player who finishes the selection in 2 seconds or more and less than 10 seconds is the solid type, the player who needs 10 seconds or more is the quiet type, etc. From time to type, the comments and effects displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 for each character of the player from the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R May be changed. As described above, for example, the elapsed time required for the game ball to pass through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is 1800 seconds, and it is hard to think of which time it was wondering which gate to select If time is required, a common comment may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 1900, such as “Come back, was it delicious?”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, a comment is sent to the player based on the elapsed time from when the gate detection is enabled until the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. A comment is sent to the player based on the average time of the elapsed time until the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R in the rend-chan at the end of the rend-chan. Production is being performed. Since it is possible for the player to freely determine at what timing the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, the elapsed time until the game ball passes through is determined by the player. This is based on the behavior of the player, and a comment can be transmitted based on the behavior of the player. That is, when such an effect is executed, a unique comment is transmitted to each player, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be attached. Also, when you pass the game ball next time, you will also add a way of enjoying that is not conventional, such as making you want to pass it intentionally, or trying to see if the same comment is sent next time The operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R, that is, when the start display of the big hit game is performed, it is based on the elapsed time until the game ball passes. The comment is sent to the player, but the timing for sending the comment may be after the game ball has passed the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R. When the jackpot gaming state is triggered by the passing of a game ball through those gates (when the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot that triggers the gate is activated) Also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the chan-chan who has continuously operated the probability variation function for each jackpot, that is, the 4R normal jackpot that does not operate the probability variation function, the jackpot gaming state based on the 4R normal jackpot is terminated. Sometimes, based on the average time about the elapsed time until the game ball in the ream-chan, the rendition of sending a comment to the player is performed. After the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R activated at the time of the end of the game, that is, the 4R normal jackpot that does not operate the probability variation function, for example, the game ball passes through those gates Is performed during the execution of the jackpot gaming state based on the 4R normal jackpot Good.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R, that is, when a jackpot game start display is performed, the process until the game ball passes. Based on the time, an effect of sending a comment to the player is used. For example, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected (when “Rush Type” or “One Notification Type” is selected), a dedicated character is used. The character may change depending on which gate is selected. Also, depending on the gender, age, etc., the selected gate and the time required for selection when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected are patterned, and based on this, the character is changed or the comment is changed. May be. For example, if it is determined that the woman is a young woman from the selected gate and the time required to select it, the character that the cute woman likes is changed, and the comment that is uttered by the character also changes to a cute word. It may be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of Ren-chan, that is, after the end of the 4R jackpot gaming state triggered by the 4R normal jackpot that does not operate the probability variation function, the performance mode that can indicate the gaming state is low. The normal mode in which it is possible to determine that the probabilistic non-time-short state is entered, for example, the average time until the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is a specific time. If it is within a range (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds), as a bonus to the player, a special mode that can only be seen for a certain period of time after the transition control to the low probability non-time-short state is made You may make it transfer to. When transitioning to such a special mode, the player intends to allow the appearance of characters and reach productions that do not appear in any other production mode (eg, normal mode or probability change mode). Thus, it is possible to give a sense of accomplishment to what can be achieved within a specific time range, or to give a sense of superiority to other players. And, for example, at the end of Ren-chan, by notifying the player that the mode will be shifted to the special mode when it is within a specific time range, the player who did not know that will receive the special mode benefit The player intends to continue the game in order to obtain the game time, and in the continued game, the player intends the timing when the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R so as to be in a specific time range. A game such as aiming at the target can be performed.

  In addition to the above, by installing a real-time clock that can grasp the date and time internally, it is possible to change the specific time range described above that makes it possible to shift to the special mode for each date. The contents of the special mode may be different. Even in such a case, the player wants to get a special mode benefit, and can try various times (time until the game ball passes) so that it falls within a specific time range. You can be inspired to play games.

  Further, in this embodiment, the position of the valve portion 2551b in the distribution valve 2551 of the distribution unit 2550 is switched every 5000 msec. Of the time after the right gate 2575R becomes effective), the elapsed time (the time during which the “rush type” can be selected) when the left gate 2575L is effective, and the right gate 2575R is made effective Elapsed time (time during which “one notification type” can be selected) is separately measured. For this reason, when the player desires which side at the time of selection of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (when "Rush type" or "One notification type" is selected) triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot. Even if it exists, it is possible to aim at a specific time range (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds) as an elapsed time until the game ball passes, and a special mode can be obtained. ing. For example, when the specific time range is set to 2 to 2.5 seconds and you want to select the right gate 2575R (select “one notification type”), First, the left gate 2575L is activated, but when 2 to 2.5 seconds have passed since the switching to activate the right gate 2575R after 5 seconds, the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R. Just aim.

  Further, as different from the above, in step S903, the elapsed time in which the left gate 2575L is enabled (the time during which the “rush type” can be selected) and the elapsed time in which the right gate 2575R is enabled. All of the execution time of the gate effective performance triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot, that is, the left (the time during which “one notification type” can be selected) is not separately measured according to switching, that is, the left You may make it measure the elapsed time after gate 2575L and right gate 2575R become effective collectively. Then, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected in response to the variable R probability variation jackpot (when the “rush type” or “single notification type” is selected), the player selects a specific side (a predetermined side) If “” is not selected, the elapsed time until the game ball passes may be set so as not to fall within a specific time range.

  For example, when the specific time range is set to 2 to 2.5 seconds, the left gate 2575L is first activated at the start of the gate effective performance. When 2.5 seconds have elapsed, the game ball must be aimed to pass through the left gate 2575L. That is, when the player selects the left gate 2575L, a special mode is set by aiming at an elapsed time until the game ball passes through a specific time range of 2 to 2.5 seconds. Benefits can be obtained. On the other hand, when the player selects the right gate 2575R, at least 5 seconds elapse until the right gate 2575R is switched to be effective, and exceeds a specific time range of 2 to 2.5 seconds. Therefore, the special mode cannot be obtained.

  As described above, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected in response to the variable R probability variation jackpot (when the “rush type” or “single notification type” is selected), the player is selected on a specific side (predetermined). If it is not selected, the elapsed time until the game ball passes is set so that it does not fall within a specific time range, while the player can freely choose which side , It can be made to choose a specific side (predetermined side). For example, if the player does not select the left gate 2575L and the elapsed time until the game ball passes does not fall within a specific time range, the player is determined to select the right gate 2575R. However, it is possible to get an idea of whether to select the left gate 2575L by trying to obtain a special mode privilege. Therefore, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected, the player can obtain a privilege by selecting a specific side (predetermined side), thereby affecting the player's selection. Can increase the range of player choices.

  In this embodiment, the left gate 2575L is first activated at the start of the gate effective performance. For example, the first gate that is activated every time the variable R probability variation is won, the left gate 2575L and the right gate are activated. It may be alternated with 2575R or random. In such a case, when selecting the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot, the player selects a specific side (predetermined side) to be in a specific time range. At that time, the gate on the specific side is not fixed, and in the game to obtain the privilege of the special mode, the gate on either side (“Rush type” or “One-shot notification type”) ) Can also be entertained. Therefore, when the player selects a specific side (predetermined side), only one of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R must be selected. It is possible to feel free to try the selection on the (predetermined side), and the player can expand the range of selection.

  Further, in this embodiment, based on the average time of the elapsed time until the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R in the ream-chan, for a certain period (for example, 20-30 fluctuations), it is determined whether or not to shift to the special mode. For example, every time the variable R probability variation big hit, the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. Whether or not to shift to the special mode may be determined based on the elapsed time. In other words, after the jackpot gaming state is triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot, as the performance mode capable of suggesting the gaming state, it enters the probability variation mode in which it can be determined that the high probability time-short state. However, for example, if the elapsed time until the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R falls within a specific time range (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds), As a privilege for a person, it is only necessary to make it possible to shift to a special mode that cannot be seen otherwise until the next big hit after the transition control to the high probability short-time state. In this way, each time the variable R probability variation jackpot is reached, it is determined whether or not the mode is shifted to the special mode, so that the game is made only once within a specific time range (for example, 2 to 2.5 seconds). If the ball can be passed, the special mode can be obtained. In other words, since it becomes easy to obtain a special mode benefit, the player can feel free to try to select a specific side (predetermined side). Can be spread.

[Example of production when selecting a gate]
Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of the variable R probability variable big hit among the big hits related to the second special symbol, by passing the game ball to the side selected by the player out of the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R, The execution state (number of rounds) of the gaming state is determined, but the side selected by the player from the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R after executing the determined jackpot game mode (number of rounds) Or the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state is stored as a history. When the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected, the 16R jackpot gaming state acquisition rate calculated from the history when the left gate 2575L is selected or the history when the right gate 2575R is selected is calculated. The 16R jackpot gaming state acquisition rate and other information that can affect the player's selection are notified. Examples of such effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 237.

  FIG. 235 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a history information display process as a control process executed by the peripheral control board 4140 (particularly the peripheral control MPU 4140a). FIG. 236 explains that the “rush type” is selected when the left gate 2575L passes in the explanation interval effect, and the 16R jackpot gaming state acquisition rate calculated from the history when the left gate 2575L is selected, and the like. It is an effect example in which information is notified. FIG. 237 explains that in the explanation interval effect, “one-notification type” is selected when the right gate 2575R passes, and the acquisition rate of 16R jackpot gaming state calculated from the history when the right gate 2575R is selected. It is an effect example in which such information is notified.

  As shown in FIG. 235, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts the history information display process, it first determines whether or not the explanation interval effect is being executed (step S921). The explanation interval effect is one in which the explanation interval effect is started based on the explanation interval effect command transmitted from the main control board 4100 side after the decorative symbol (hit symbol) at the big hit stops variably. Sent from the main control board 4100 side when the left gate 2575L and the right gate 2575R of the minute unit 2550 are enabled (when the detection of the game ball by the distribution detection sensor 2580L and the distribution detection sensor 2580R is enabled). The explanation interval effect is ended when the gate effective effect is started based on the gate effective effect command.

  When it is determined that the explanation interval effect is being executed (YES in step S921), it is determined whether or not the explanation interval effect is an explanation interval effect triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot ( Step S922). If it is determined in step S922 that the explanation interval effect is triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot (YES in step S922), the game ball is passed to the left gate 2575L side as the explanation interval effect. The explanation that the “rush type” is selected and the explanation that the “one notification type” is selected by passing the game ball to the right gate 2575R side are sequentially given to the player by the liquid crystal display device 1900. An effect display for explanation is performed (step S923). In the liquid crystal display device 1900, when explaining that the “rush type” is selected by passing the game ball to the left gate 2575L side, the variable R up to the previous time stored as a history in step S927 described later is used. Information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state when the left gate 2575L is selected (the “rush type” is selected) among the probable jackpot times is displayed. On the other hand, at the time of explaining that “one notification type” is selected by passing a game ball to the right gate 2575R side in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the previous time stored as history in step S927 described later is displayed. Information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state when the right gate 2575R is selected ("one notification type" is selected) among the variable R probability variation jackpots is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected when the variable R probability variation jackpot is triggered (when the “rush type” or “single notification type” is selected), the variable R probability variation big hit up to the previous day on today is selected. Information on the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state when selecting the left gate 2575L (selecting “rush type”) and the right gate 2575R (select “one notification type”) Information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state at the time of selection) is notified to the player. Specifically, as information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state for each selection of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (selection of “rush type” or “single notification type”), 16R success count (number of times 16R jackpot gaming state was acquired), 16R consecutive success count (number of times 16R jackpot gaming state was acquired most continuously), 16R success rate (16R jackpot gaming status with respect to the number of executions of jackpot gaming status) Etc.) is notified to the player by the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected with the variable R probability variable jackpot as an opportunity, the execution mode of the jackpot gaming state when the left gate 2575L is selected among the variable R probability variable jackpots up to the previous day today ( Both the information regarding the determination result of the number of rounds) and the information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state when the right gate 2575R is selected are sequentially notified to the player. Only one of them may be notified to the player.

  For example, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, when explaining that the “rush type” is selected by passing a game ball to the left gate 2575L side, as shown in FIG. Based on the history of selection of the left gate 2575L triggered by the jackpot (history stored in step S927 described later), the 16R success count (three times in this example), the 16R consecutive success count (two times in this example) , 16R success rate (20% in this example) is displayed. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, when explaining that the “one notification type” is selected by passing a game ball to the right gate 2575R side, as shown in FIG. Based on the history of selection of the right gate 2575R triggered by the R-probability jackpot (history stored in step S927 described later), the number of 16R successes (10 in this example), the number of 16R consecutive successes (10 in this example) ), 16R success rate (83.3% in this example) is displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected when the variable R probability variation jackpot is selected (when “Rush type” or “One notification type” is selected), Based on the history of selection of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R triggered by the variable R probability variable jackpot, the player is notified of information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state for each selection. The production of performing is performed. As a result, when selecting the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, it becomes possible to determine which side to select while referring to the information related to the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state. Can broaden the choice of the person.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected when the variable R probability change jackpot is triggered (when the “rush type” or “single notification type” is selected), the player uses the left gate 2575L. If selected, the 16R jackpot gaming state is internally determined with a probability of 24%, and if the player selects the right gate 2575R, the 16R jackpot gaming state is internally determined with a probability of 70%. However, since it is determined by an internal lottery, the appearance rate of the 16R jackpot gaming state is actually higher or lower than the probability. For example, if the appearance rate of the 16R jackpot gaming state (16R success rate) is higher than the internal decision probability of 70% based on the history of selection of the right gate 2575R, Even if the right gate 2575R is selected, the 16R jackpot gaming state can be obtained, and even if the right gate 2575R is selected at the time of this selection, the 16R jackpot gaming state cannot be stochastically obtained. The idea of selecting the left gate 2575L can also be made. Also, even if the player decides to select the right gate 2575R, for example, if the number of times that the 16R jackpot gaming state appears continuously (the number of 16R consecutive successes) is 10, this selection Even if the right gate 2575R is sometimes selected, the 16R jackpot gaming state cannot be probabilistically acquired, so that the idea of selecting the left gate 2575L can be interrupted. Thus, in a state where the player is likely to be uplifted by winning the variable R probability variation jackpot, more profits (advantageous results) if either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected. Even if the player decides to select one of the gates in advance by notifying the player of information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game The other gate may feel attractive, and the selection can be deceived by attracting interest not only to one of the gates but also to the other. As a result, the player's selection can be influenced, and the player's selection range can be expanded. In addition, for example, when the variable R probability variation jackpots are continuous (a state in which it is easy to determine that selection by the same player is performed), the number of times one gate is continuously selected is set in advance. When the number of times (for example, 3 times) is exceeded, information on the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state is notified from the next selection onward, and not only one gate but the other You may also be interested in the gate.

  In addition, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected, a player who participated without interest (for example, a player who has decided to select the right gate 2575R in advance, or a jackpot game if the gate is not selected). For players who are reluctant to make a choice because they do not move, etc.), the information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, that is, the previous time By notifying information on profits up to the time of selection, you will feel that you will participate in a game that will earn profits (selecting left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R) and 16R jackpot (maximum number of rounds) It can be expected to acquire. Also, based on such information, the player can imagine during the selection by letting the player think about which of the profits (advantageous results) can be obtained if either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected. Will be bothered and annoyed, and will enjoy the choice. Also, at the time of this selection, whether it is better to continue the idea or change the way of thinking at the next selection, depending on whether or not the player was able to gain profits as thought by the player The player's way of thinking can be utilized at the time of selection after the next time, and it becomes possible to actively participate in the selection.

  If it is the first variable R probability change jackpot as of today, when the left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R is selected when the variable R probability change jackpot is selected (when "Rush Type" or "One Notification Type" is selected) ), The player is notified of information related to the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state for each selection of the previous day based on the history of the selection of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R of the previous day. I am doing so.

  In this embodiment, information on the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state for each selection of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (selection of “rush type” or “single notification type”). 16R success count (number of times the 16R jackpot gaming state was acquired), 16R consecutive success count (number of times the 16R jackpot gaming state was acquired most continuously), 16R success rate (16R jackpot gaming status relative to the number of executions of the jackpot gaming status) The ratio of the number of times the player has won). Other than this, it is only necessary to provide the player with information based on the history of selection of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R triggered by the variable R probability variation jackpot, and the jackpot gaming state for each selection The player may be provided with an average number of rounds and a list of determination results of the execution mode (number of rounds) of a simple jackpot gaming state. For example, when the average number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state is provided to the player as information related to the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state, the average number of rounds in the internal jackpot gaming state (11. If the player is provided with an enumeration regarding the result of determining the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state with reference to whether it is higher or lower than (8 rounds), etc., at the time of the most recent selection Decide which side to select while predicting the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state at the time of this selection, referring to whether or not the 16R jackpot gaming state has been acquired It becomes possible, and the range of the player's game can be expanded.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the explanation interval effect, the player is notified of information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state for each selection of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R until the previous time. However, what is necessary is just to provide such information to the player when selecting the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. In other words, after notifying the player that it is a variable R probability variation jackpot, information may be reported until the game ball passes through the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R. Not only the description interval effect but also the subsequent gate effective effect (effect indicating which of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is activated) may be notified. In this way, when the gate effective effect is notified, when the display (see FIG. 213) prompting the player to select which type of jackpot game is executed (see FIG. 213), the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R up to the previous time is displayed. Information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state for each selection is added and notified, and a display (see FIG. 214) indicating that the current timing is “rush type” is displayed. When the left gate 2575L up to the previous time is selected ("rush type" is selected), information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot gaming state is added and notified. When the display indicating that the timing is “notification type” (see FIG. 215), the right gate 257 up to the previous time is displayed. R selection it is sufficient to notify by adding information about the determination result of ( "one shot announcement type" select) and jackpot gaming state of the execution mode when the (round number).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step 922 that it is an explanation interval effect triggered by a jackpot other than the variable R probability variable jackpot (NO in step S922), the left gate 2575L or It is not necessary for the player to select one of the right gates 2575R, and no matter which one of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected by the player, the subsequent game content will not be affected. Only the display to urge the user is performed (step S924).

  If it is determined in step S921 that the explanation interval effect is not executed (NO in step S921), the process proceeds to step S925 without executing steps S922 to S924.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines whether or not the game ball launched by making a right strike has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (step S925). Note that the fact that the game ball has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R indicates that the game ball has passed through the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R (the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor). This can be determined by transmitting a jackpot start command or a jackpot start interval effect command from the main control board 4100 side (when a game ball is detected by 2580R).

  If it is determined that the game ball has passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (YES in step S905), the game ball is triggered by the variable R probability change big hit. Is determined (passage of the game ball to the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R activated with the variable R probability variation jackpot as a trigger) (step S926). If it is determined in step S926 that the game ball has passed due to the variable R probability variation jackpot (YES in step S926), the game ball passes through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R. The result of determination on the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game determined by the game ball passing through either side is stored as a history in the peripheral control RAM 4140e (step S927). As to which side of the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R the game ball has passed, in the state where the left gate valid command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 side, the activated left gate 2575L is played. When a big hit start command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 side by passing the ball, it is determined that the game ball has passed through the left gate 2575L, while a right gate valid command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 side. In the state, when a game ball passes through the activated right gate 2575R and a jackpot start command is transmitted from the main control board 4100 side, it can be determined that the game ball has passed through the right gate 2575R. As for the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, when the game ball passes through the activated left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R (the game ball is detected by the distribution detection sensor 2580L or the distribution detection sensor 2580R). And the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 4100 side.

  In addition, when it is determined in step S925 that the game ball has not passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R (NO in step S925), it is activated with a jackpot other than the variable R probability variation jackpot. If it is determined that the game ball has passed to left gate 2575L or right gate 2575R (NO in step S925), the process ends without executing step S927.

The claims that can be grasped from the above embodiment and technical ideas other than the claims will be described below together with the effects thereof.
In the invention according to claim 1, lottery means (of the main control MPU 4100a) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball has entered the starting port (first starting port 2101 or second starting port 2102). As a process, in the variation start process (step S130), a portion for determining whether or not the jackpot determination random number related to the special symbol is a random number corresponding to the jackpot (jackpot value),
Specific determination means (main control) for determining one of predetermined profit levels (6 to 16 rounds) when a specific determination condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the left gate 2575L) As a process of the MPU 4100a, a portion determined to be any of 6 rounds to 16 rounds when the “rush type” is selected in the jackpot game state determination process (step S632),
When a special determination condition different from the specific determination condition is satisfied (the game ball passes through the right gate 2575R), any one of the profit types (16 rounds or 2 rounds) different from the specific type is selected. Special decision means (a part to be decided as 16 rounds or 2 rounds when selecting “one notification type” in the jackpot game mode decision process (step S632) as the process of the main control MPU 4100a),
Selection means (as a process of the main control MPU 4100a) that allows the player to select which of the specific determination condition and the special determination condition is to be established when the lottery result is a lottery win. In the jackpot gaming state determination process (step S632), it is determined which of the right gate 2575R or the left gate 2575L has passed the game ball (whether “one-notification type” or “rush type” has been selected). Part) and
Profit grant control for starting control of the big hit game based on the profit degree determined by the selected one after selecting either one of the specific determination condition and the special determination condition by the selection means Means (a part for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106 in the jackpot game process (step S210) as the process of the main control MPU 4100a);
After the lottery means wins the lottery result and before the selection by the selection means, according to the determination result of at least one of the specific determination means and the special determination means before the selection and the lottery Benefits that can promote the selection (when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected (when "Rush Type" or "One Notification Type" is selected)) Number) when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected in the history information display process as the process of the peripheral control MPU 4140a ("rush type"). ”Or“ One-shot notification type ”), the execution mode of the jackpot game (L The information regarding the determination result of the number of command), characterized in that it comprises a portion) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, when the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R is selected when the variable R probability variation jackpot is selected, not only the jackpot game is started by passing the game ball but also the execution mode of the jackpot game ( The number of rounds) is determined. Then, when selecting those gates 2575, the information regarding the determination result of the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game at the time of selection up to the previous time is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is possible to make the player think whether profits can be acquired and to expand the range of selection of the game, and to encourage the player to actively participate in the game, and to suppress a decrease in the game interest.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In the above embodiment, when the jackpot is related to the first special symbol, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is a high-probability short-time state, a high-probability non-short-time state, or a low-probability non-short-time state (normal state). Which control is performed depends on the type of jackpot based on the first symbol random number (12R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation A big hit, 10R probability variation B big hit, 10R probability variable C big hit when the game ball enters the first start port 2101 10R is usually determined based on the random number obtained when the game ball enters the first start port 2101 without being determined, and the left gate after that. It may be determined based on a random number acquired when the game ball is passed through either the 2575L or the right gate 2575R. For example, the execution mode (number of rounds) of the jackpot game is determined based on the first symbol random number, and then the random number acquired when the game ball is passed through either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R ( For example, it may be determined whether to control the high probability short-time state as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game based on the gaming state determination random number), or the jackpot game is given based on the first special random number Only after that, based on the first symbol random number acquired when the game ball is passed to either the left gate 2575L or the right gate 2575R, the execution mode of the jackpot game (number of rounds), and the jackpot game It may be determined whether or not to control the high probability short time state as the gaming state after the end. Thus, when a game ball passes through the gates 2575L and 2575R, not only whether or not to control to the high probability short-time state after the jackpot game ends, but also whether to control to the high probability short-time state or not By making a decision, it gives a sense of tension that the control of the high probability short-time state is decided by one's hand, draws out the expectation to the fullest, and actively plays the game of passing the game ball through the gates 2575L and 2575R. Will be able to participate.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the allocation unit is arranged near the upper right of the game area, and the player makes a right-hand hit after becoming a state in which the jackpot gaming state can be given based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Therefore, the game medium is driven into the distribution unit to determine the execution mode of the jackpot game state. However, the arrangement position of the distribution unit is not limited to this, and is intended by the player. The game medium may be placed at any position within the game area as long as the game medium can be inserted.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the distribution unit is used as the specific operation receiving means for receiving the specific operation by the player, and the execution mode of the jackpot game is changed depending on whether the game medium is distributed to the left or right in the distribution unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when a sorting unit is used, it is possible to use three or more sorting destinations, and a selection button is provided instead of the sorting unit. The execution mode of the jackpot game may be changed according to the player's selection of the button.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Table unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3040 Panel relay board 3041 Lamp drive board 3045 Motor drive board 3600 Bottom right bottom Production unit 3602 Bottom right bottom unit base (base member)
3602a Body (rear wall)
3602b Cylindrical part 3602c Release part 3602e Return port 3602f Collection port 3604 Back lower right unit case (base member)
3608 Rotating cylinder 3608a Housing recess 3610 Production ball (production medium)
3612 Release flap (door member)
3612a Base part 3612b Peripheral wall part 3612c Side notch part (notch part)
3612d Rear notch 3612e Actuation rod 3622 Back lower right first drive motor 3623 Back lower right first detection sensor 3626 Discharge link member 3630 Back lower right rotating decorative body (rotating decorative body)
3630b Discharge port 3640 Back lower right second drive motor 3652 Collection unit cover 3652b Collection passage 3654 Ball receiving member (receiving member)
3654a Bearing portion 3656 Recovery link member 3658 Recovery slider 3660 Bottom right recovery solenoid 3670 Ball lift member (lift member)
3670a Opening (storage part)
3672 Movable bottom plate (movable bottom member)
3672a Actuating piece 3676 Back lower right third drive motor 3686 Backflow preventing front member 4010 Peripheral control board (production control means)
4140 Peripheral control unit (production control means)

Claims (1)

Lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the starting opening;
A specific determination means for determining one of a predetermined type of profit degree when a specific determination condition is satisfied;
Special determination means for determining any one of the profit types of a special type different from the specific type when a special determination condition different from the specific determination condition is satisfied;
A selection means by which a player can select which of the specific determination condition and the special determination condition is to be established when the lottery result is a lottery win by the lottery means;
Profit grant control for starting control of the big hit game based on the profit degree determined by the selected one after selecting either one of the specific determination condition and the special determination condition by the selection means Means,
After the lottery means wins the lottery result and before the selection by the selection means, according to the determination result of at least one of the specific determination means and the special determination means before the selection and the lottery A game machine, comprising: a selection means capable of executing a well-being effect capable of promoting the selection.